CAPITAL PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT SERVICES

Document Sample
CAPITAL PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Powered By Docstoc
					CAPITAL PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT SERVICES
  ARCHITECTURAL & ENGINEERING SERVICES
   3610 – 9 Street S.E., Calgary Alberta T2G 3C5
Design Guidelines
Calgary Board of Education                                  Table of Contents
Capital Planning and Development Services                         Page 1 of 6


                      T A B L E OF C O N T E N T S
                                                                     Page #
A1     MANDATORY CONSULTANT REQUIREMENTS                               1 – 12

       1.1    Basic Requirements
       1.2    Consultant Contract & Billing
       1.3    Process
       1.4    Approvals & Permits
       1.5    Construction Budget
       1.6    New School Site Review Requirements
       1.7    Existing School & Site Review Requirements
       1.8    Hazardous Materials Consultant Requirements
       1.9    Contract Documents
       1.10   CBE Construction Document Review
       1.11   Tender Period
       1.12   Addendum
       1.13   Construction Administration
       1.14   Drawing Standards
       1.15   Close Out
A2     SITE PLANNING                                                     1 –5

       2.1    Development of Site
       2.2    Joint Use Agreement
       2.3    Site Considerations
       2.4    Location of the Building on Site
       2.5    Future Building Additions
       2.6    Subsoil Conditions
       2.7    Site Elevations & Drainage
       2.8    Services
       2.9    Site Development
       2.10   Landscaping
       2.11   Sloped Areas
       2.12   Paved Play Areas
       2.13   Transportation & Drop-off Areas
       2.14   Parking Facilities
       2.15   Garbage Bins
A3     GENERAL BUILDING DESIGN                                          1–8

       3.1    General Building Design
       3.2    General Building Layout
       3.3    Community Use of the Building
       3.4    Security & Safety
       3.5    Energy Management
       3.6    Access for Operations & Maintenance
       3.7    Building Envelope Consultant
       3.8    School Functional Relationships
Design Guidelines
Calgary Board of Education                                                 Table of Contents
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 2 of 6


                                                                                    Page #
A4     BUILDING EXTERIOR                                                               1–2

       4.1    General Exterior Design
       4.2    Exterior Finishes
       4.3    Exterior Stairs, Ramps & Railings
       4.4    Painted Exterior Items
       4.5    Roofing
       4.6    Roof Access Hatches & Ladders
       4.7    Skylights & Clerestory Windows
       4.8    Windows
       4.9    Doors, Frames & Sidelights
       4.10   Exterior Lighting
A5     GENERAL MECHANICAL DESIGN                                                          1

       5.1    Detailed Procedures to be Followed by Consultants
       5.2    Energy Management
       5.3    Mechanical Equipment
       5.4    Central System Air Handling Unit
       5.5    Gas Service
       5.6    Emergency Domestic Water Service
       5.7    Fire Protection
       5.8    Combustion Air
       5.9    Controls & Energy / Building Management System
A6     GENERAL ELECTRICAL DESIGN                                                       1–2

       6.1    General
       6.2    Site Electrical Services
       6.3    Service Distribution, Subdistribution & Branch Panelboards
       6.4    Conduit & Wiring
       6.5    Wiring Devices & Boxes
       6.6    Lighting
       6.7    Emergency & Exit Lights
       6.8    Stage & Drama Room Lighting / Power
       6.9    Fire Alarm System
       6.10   Security System
       6.11   Communications System
       6.12   Data Network System
A7     INTERIOR SPACE REQUIREMENTS                                                    1 – 34

       7.1    General Application of Interior Space Requirements
       7.2    Interior Space Design - New Schools
       7.3    Interior Space Design - Renovations
       7.4    General Interior Finishes
       7.5    Interior Space Requirements - Instructional Spaces
              .1 General Classroom Requirements – Elementary
              .2 General Classroom Requirements - Junior / Senior High
                  .1 General Breakout Space Requirements
              .3 Science Room – Elementary
              .4 Science Room - Junior High
              .5 Science Room - Senior High
              .6 Science Preparation Room(s) - Junior / Senior High
              .7 Ancillary Room – Elementary
Design Guidelines
Calgary Board of Education                                                Table of Contents
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 3 of 6


                                                                                    Page #
              .8 Ancillary Room - Junior / Senior High
                  .1 Drama or Dance – Junior High
                  .2 Drama – Senior High
                  .3 Music Room – Junior / Senior High
                  .4 Fine Art Room – Junior / Senior High
              .9 Gymnasium – Elementary
                  .1 Elementary Dressing Area
                  .2 Elementary School Physical Education Staff Office / Change Area
              .10 Gymnasium - Junior / Senior High
                  .1 Junior / Senior High Dressing / Shower Area
                  .2 Junior / Senior High Physical Education Staff Office / Change Area
              .11 Gymnasium Stage / Auxiliary Gymnasium Space - If Applicable
              .12 Library – Elementary
              .13 Library - Junior / Senior High
              .14 Media Centre Spaces
              .15 Career & Technology Studies (CTS) - Junior / Senior High
                  .1 CTS Shop – Construction Technology
                  .2 CTS Lab
                  .3 CTS Lab – Domestic Foods
                  .4 CTS Lab – Fashion Studies
       7.6    Interior Space Requirements - Non-Instructional Spaces
              .1 Flexible Space – Elementary
              .2 Flexible Space - Junior / Senior High
              .3 Kitchen Servery – Elementary
              .4 Cafeteria Kitchen - Junior / Senior High
              .5 Administration Spaces
                  .1 General Office Space
                  .2 Administrative Offices
                  .3 Administrative Workroom & Storage Area
                  .4 Counselling Offices
                  .5 Conference Room(s)
                  .6 Infirmary
                  .7 Staff Room & Staff Kitchen
              .6 Washroom Facilities
                  .1 Student Washrooms
                  .2 Special Needs Barrier Free Accessible Washroom
                  .3 Staff Washrooms
              .7 Circulation
                  .1 Corridors
                  .2 Stairs & Stairways
                  .3 Elevators
                  .4 Vestibules
              .8 Facility Operations & Storage
                  .1 Facility Operator’s Office
                  .2 Caretaking Rooms / Closets & Storage Rooms
                  .3 General Storage Rooms
              .9 Facility Service Rooms
                  .1 Mechanical Service Rooms
                  .2 Electrical Service Rooms
                  .3 Communications
                  .4 Exterior Storage Rooms
Design Guidelines
Calgary Board of Education                                                Table of Contents
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 4 of 6


                                                                                   Page #
B1            GENERAL SPECIFICATION GUIDELINES                                        1–2

              Section 00200   Instructions to Bidders
              Section 00410   Stipulated Price Bid Form
              Section 00700   General Conditions of Contract
              Section 00800   Supplementary Conditions
              Section 01000   General Instructions
              Section 01020   Allowances
              Section 01100   Project, Separate, Breakout & Unit Prices

B2            ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION GUIDELINES                                 1 – 14

              Section 02070   Selective Demolition
              Section 02241   Irrigation
              Section 02485   Sodding
              Section 02495   Hydro-Seeding
              Section 02950   Trees, Shrubs & Plants
              Section 06400   Architectural Woodwork
              Section 07500   SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing
              Section 08100   Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
              Section 08200   Wood Doors & Frames
              Section 08500   Windows
              Section 08600   Skylights
              Section 08700   Finish Hardware
              Section 08740   Electronic Access
              Section 08800   Glass & Glazing
              Section 09510   Acoustic Unit Ceilings
              Section 09640   Wood Flooring
              Section 09650   Resilient Flooring
              Section 09680   Carpeting
              Section 09900   Painting
              Section 10100   Whiteboards & Tackboards
              Section 10162   Metal Toilet Partitions
              Section 10350   Flagpoles
              Section 10400   Signage
              Section 10500   Metal Lockers
              Section 10800   Washroom Accessories
              Section 11060   Stage Curtains
              Section 11480   Gymnasium Equipment
              Section 11600   Laboratory Equipment
              Section 12490   Blinds
              Section 13280   Asbestos Control
              Section 14200   Elevators

B3            MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION GUIDELINES                                    1 – 33

              Section 15010   Mechanical General Requirements
              Section 15015   Outside Services - Sanitary & Storm Drainage
              Section 15060   Pipe & Pipe Fittings
              Section 15100   Valves
              Section 15160   Pumps
              Section 15175   Tanks
              Section 15190   Mechanical Identification
              Section 15210   Cleaning & Treatment General Requirements
              Section 15211   Hydronic Systems Water Treatment
Design Guidelines
Calgary Board of Education                                             Table of Contents
Capital Planning and Development Services                                    Page 5 of 6


                                                                                  Page #
              Section 15212   Steam Boiler Systems Water Treatment
              Section 15214   Glycol Systems Water Treatment
              Section 15215   Spray-Type Humidification Systems Water Treatment
              Section 15250   Piping & Equipment Insulation
              Section 15260   Duct Insulation
              Section 15430   Plumbing Specialties
              Section 15440   Plumbing Fixtures & Trim
              Section 15510   Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems
              Section 15515   Hot Water Specialties
              Section 15557   Water Tube Boilers
              Section 15561   Fume Hoods
              Section 15575   Breeching & Chimneys
              Section 15660   Electric Motors
              Section 15671   Air Cooled Condensing Units
              Section 15705   Glycol Systems
              Section 15755   Heat Exchangers
              Section 15783   Humidification Systems
              Section 15820   Fans
              Section 15830   Terminal Heat Transfer Units
              Section 15833   Unit Ventilators
              Section 15855   Air Handling Units
              Section 15860   Duct Accessories
              Section 15870   Air Outlets & Inlets
              Section 15960   Building Automation System

B4            ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION GUIDELINES                                  1 – 23

              Section 16010   Electrical General Requirements
              Section 16110   Wiring Materials & Methods
              Section 16415   Main Service & Distribution
              Section 16500   Lighting Systems
              Section 16721   Fire Alarm Systems
              Section 16727   Security Alarm System
              Section 16728   Electronic Access & Electronic Locking System
              Section 16729   School Electrical Lockdown System
              Section 16760   Telephone System
              Section 16770   Voice Communication System
              Section 16790   Computer Network System
              Section 16812   Security Camera System (CCTV)

B5            LIST OF STANDARD FORMS                                                   1

B6            TYPICAL DRAWINGS                                                      1-2
Design Guidelines
Calgary Board of Education                  Table of Contents
Capital Planning and Development Services         Page 6 of 6


                                                     Page #
Appendix 1 Instructions to Bidders                      1-9

Appendix 2 Stipulated Price Bid Form                   1 - 11

Appendix 3 General Conditions of Contract               1-2

Appendix 4 Supplementary Conditions                    1 - 18

Appendix 5 Standard Forms                              1 - 11
Design Guidelines                                                                        A1
Calgary Board of Education                                Mandatory Consultant Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 1 of 12


A1      MANDATORY CONSULTANT REQUIREMENTS
These are the minimum requirements for Consultants involved with the Calgary Board of
Education (CBE) building(s). The expectation includes, but is not limited to, adherence to these
guidelines in all respects unless written authorization is received from the Architectural &
Engineering Services (AES) project manager.
 1.1 Basic Requirements
    1.1.1 Major buildings at the CBE are administered through AES by an assigned AES
           Project Manager. This individual is the primary contact at the CBE for all issues and
           information pertaining to the project. All correspondence must be directed to the
           AES project manager.
    1.1.2 Information outlined in these documents is deemed mandatory unless written
           authorization is received from the AES project manager.
    1.1.3 These documents are not intended to limit the ideas and initiatives of the
           consultants but to establish the outcomes required for all new building(s) and major
           renovation(s).
    1.1.4 Should any discrepancies or errors be found in these documents, they must be
           brought to the attention of AES staff in writing. Acknowledgment of the discrepancy
           or error by AES must be made before the consultant can proceed.
    1.1.5 Issues specific to the project may take precedence over the guidelines, as
           determined and established by the AES project manager.
    1.1.6 Any exception to these guidelines is considered an alternate proposal by the
           consultant. CBE, at its sole discretion, can accept or reject alternate proposals. Prior
           to the review of an alternate proposal, the consultant shall provide a life cycle cost
           analysis to justify the choice of any system or material proposed. The review
           process can be expected to take 4-6 weeks.
    1.1.7 The inclusion of an alternate proposal without prior specific, written approval is at the
           sole risk of the consultant and may be rejects by the AES project manager, at any
           time following the discovery of the alternate proposal.
    1.1.8 The CBE reserves the right to revise these guidelines by addendum as required.
1.2 Consultant Contract & Billing
    1.2.1 For all new school and major renovation / modernization(s), the consultant is to
           provide the full range of services as per the Designated Services Summary Chart,
           Appendix 14, Table 1, in the School Capital Manual.
    1.2.2 The Agreement between the CBE and the Architect will be RAIC Document 6,
           Canadian Standard Form of Agreement between Client and Architect, as modified by
           the Supplementary Conditions found in Appendix 4 of this document.
    1.2.3 The fee shall include all disbursements except for the printing of 35 tender sets and
           three (3) sets for contract purposes and AES use. The printing of these sets must be
           done through the CBE printer, coordinate with the AES project manager.
    1.2.4 As part of each invoice, the consultant is to provide a breakdown of the fee as noted
           below and in the Letter of Engagement and the percentage amount complete for each
           stage:
           1.2.4.1 Design                        20%
           1.2.4.2 Construction Documents 45%
           1.2.4.3 Tender Period                  5%
           1.2.4.4 Construction Period           20%
           1.2.4.5 Close Out                     10%
1.3 Process
    1.3.1 The consultant is required to provide a project schedule immediately upon initiation of
           the project. At a minimum, the schedule must outline the following stages:
           1.3.1.1 Preliminary Design
           1.3.1.2 Detail Design
           1.3.1.3 Construction Documents (include milestones for 50% and 99%)
           1.3.1.4 Development Permit Submission
           1.3.1.5 99% CBE Review (at least two (2) weeks prior to Tender Period)
Design Guidelines                                                                        A1
Calgary Board of Education                                Mandatory Consultant Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 2 of 12


          1.3.1.6 Building Permit Submission
          1.3.1.7 Tender Period
          1.3.1.8 Construction Period
          1.3.1.9 Close Out.
    1.3.2 The AES project manager will convene a Design Team to facilitate input to the project.
          The design team may include representatives from the school, AES, community (as
          required), and consultant group. The AES project manager will organize these
          meetings as required by the consultant in order to resolve design decisions and meet
          the project schedule. Consultants are responsible for taking and distributing meeting
          minutes.
    1.3.3 As requested by the consultant or required by the process, the AES project manager
          will bring in specialists in various curriculum areas. All information gathered must be
          documented by the consultants and copied to AES.
    1.3.4 Design information must ultimately be approved by AES.
1.4 Approvals & Permits
    1.4.1 Consultants shall review all current regulations and codes. (Due to changes in
          Occupational Health & Safety Code (OH&S), special attention is required.) Projects
          must comply with all requirements of the Alberta Building Code and OH&S Code.
    1.4.2 Consultants are required to have designs approved by necessary regulator authorities
          and obtain required permits. Consultants are responsible for documenting any special /
          unique conditions and rulings. Consultant to discuss and forward this information to
          AES.
    1.4.3 Development and Building Permit application fees will be borne by CBE. Consultants to
          advise the AES project manager of costs and request a cheque to be prepared a
          minimum five (5) working days prior to application submission.
    1.4.4 Consultant shall make Development Permit submission to the City, and shall provide
          a copy of all documents and reports including but not limited to waste water
          management and the completed application form to the AES project manager.
    1.4.5 Consultant must forward all permit comments, conditions and correspondence to AES
          project manager. Responses to City Development Permit comments to be reviewed
          with AES project manager prior to sending to the City. The consultant is responsible for
          ensuring that the Development Permit is approved and released in a timely manner.
    1.4.6 Consultants shall prepare and make the Building Permit application, copies of the
          submission and comments back from the City to be provided to AES.
1.5 Construction Budget
    1.5.1 Architect and consultants to prepare and coordinate a Preliminary Design Budget prior
          to Detail Design as part of their service, unless otherwise indicated in the Letter of
          Engagement.
    1.5.2 Pretender Construction Budget at 99% Construction Document phase required as part
          of the basic service, unless otherwise indicated in the Letter of Engagement.
    1.5.3 When a separate cost consultant is engaged by the CBE, the consultant must provide
          documentation as defined in the Letter of Engagement.
    1.5.4 Hazardous materials abatement costs must be included in the budget.
    1.5.5 Include all built-in and infrastructure equipment. Instructional equipment will not be
          included in the construction budget.
    1.5.6 Data conduit, wiring, patch panels terminations and testing will be carried in these
          budgets, but hub equipment will not be included.
    1.5.7 Installation of telephone, PA system, master clock and security to be included.
    1.5.8 Furniture and computers not included.
    1.5.9 AES will carry a project contingency separately; do not include a project contingency in
          the budget.
1.6 New School Site Review Requirements
    1.6.1 CBE will provide geotechnical report and site survey.
    1.6.2 Complete an extensive site review of all existing conditions, including accessing and
          obtaining information from the City of Calgary as required.
Design Guidelines                                                                          A1
Calgary Board of Education                                  Mandatory Consultant Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 3 of 12


     1.6.3  Contact and make application to the various utility companies to ensure available
            servicing. Confirm schedule and maintain contact with these companies to ensure
            smooth procession of project.
1.7 Existing School & Site Review Requirements
     1.7.1 Complete an extensive site review of all existing building and site conditions, in
            particular areas to be renovated. If destructive testing is required in order to conduct a
            thorough investigation, make arrangements with the AES project manager.
     1.7.2 Provide detailed documentation of the existing conditions prior to start of design.
     1.7.3 Consultants must obtain security badges from the CBE Highfield Security Office prior
            to visiting existing schools.
     1.7.4 Visits should be scheduled for ‘non’ school days or after 3:30 p.m. during school days
            when possible. Please check in at the general office upon arrival, failure to check in
            may result in an individual being removed from the site.
     1.7.5 The consultant must review areas to be renovated for Hazardous Materials content.
            Reports outlining the general conditions are available from AES; however a detailed
            survey of the site is required, including destructive testing if deemed necessary.
            Complete and submit a checklist as per Appendix 5 standard forms.
     1.7.6 If hazardous materials consultants are required; AES will contract with and hire
            hazardous materials consultants directly. Coordination of hazardous materials
            consultants will be by the consultant.
     1.7.7 All Hazardous materials abatement costs will be part of the construction budget.
            Separate funds are not available for hazardous materials abatement.
1.8 Hazardous Materials Consultant Requirements
     1.8.1 Hazardous materials consultants will be expected to meet the same standards of
            service as other CBE consultants and provide specification sections and drawings as
            required to be incorporated into contract documents.
     1.8.2 Hazardous materials consultants must provide fixed fees for full scope of services as
            required to meet all applicable acts, codes, regulations, standards and guidelines.
     1.8.3 All hazardous materials abatement costs will be part of the construction budget.
            Separate funds are not available for hazardous materials abatement.
     1.8.4 Hazardous materials consultants to submit “Asbestos Database Update Report”, as
            Appendix 5 standard forms, upon completion of the abatement.
1.9 Contract Documents
     1.9.1 Drawings to follow CBE drawing standards as noted in the drawings standard portion of
            this section.
     1.9.2 Drawings and specifications to follow information outlined in the Contract Document
            Standards portion of these guidelines.
     1.9.3 The prime consultants are responsible for proper coordination of all the documents.
            Any review by CBE personnel does not in any way relieve the consultant group of their
            professional responsibility in any regard.
1.10 CBE Construction Document Review
     1.10.1 Submit construction documents and specifications for review by CBE staff when 99%
            complete (as a minimum) early reviews maybe required depending on the project.
            AES will not accept documents for review that it deems are not 99% compete.
     1.10.2 Submit drawings a minimum of two (2) weeks prior to tender.
     1.10.3 The AES project manager will provide a written list of deficiencies / issues at least one
            (1) week prior to tender with the documents that must be corrected prior to tender, not
            issued as an addendum.
     1.10.4 Provide two (2) complete sets of drawings and specifications.
     1.10.5 The CBE document review does not relieve the consultant from document review and
            coordination to ensure high professional standards.
1.11 Tender Period
     1.11.1 New schools and major additions or renovations over $100,000 will go to “Public
            Tender”. Tenders will be received by the CBE, AES. CBE Division 0 (zero) documents
            to be used, any modification to be pre-approved. Copies included in Appendices 1 to 4.
Design Guidelines                                                                           A1
Calgary Board of Education                                   Mandatory Consultant Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 4 of 12


     1.11.2 Contract to be used is CCDC 2, 2008 edition Stipulated Price Contract amended by the
             CBE Standard Supplementary Conditions, reference B1, Section 00800. (These to be
             used without modification.)
     1.11.3 Smaller projects (under $100,000) can be tendered by “Invited Tenders”, minimum
             three (3) bids required. tenders also received by AES.
     1.11.4 Invited tenders between $50,000 and $100,000 will require a 50% Performance Bond
             and a Labour & Materials payment bond only (no Bid Bond).
     1.11.5 Distribution of final Drawings and Specifications to the contractors for tendering to be
             coordinated through the Architect’s office. All deposit cheques received by the
             consultant during the tender period must be made out to the “Calgary Board of
             Education”.
     1.11.6 Standard three (3) week tender period or as determined by AES and the consultant.
     1.11.7 AES will publicly advertise the tender. Consultants are responsible for coordinating the
             timing of the tender period.
     1.11.8 AES must accept all approvals of “equals” or “equivalents” to any product named in
             the Design Guidelines. The consultant will be considered responsible for any approvals
             given which do not meet CBE standards. Issue a list of all approved equals by
             addendum.
     1.11.9 Existing buildings: conduct a bidders’ site visit during the tender period (approximately
             one (1) week after documents are available) at a specific time. If the site visit is deemed
             mandatory, bids will only be accepted from general contractors who have signed in at
             the meeting. Consultants to be available to answer any questions and describe scope
             of work, etc.
     1.11.10 Document any issues raised and respond by addendum.
1.12 Addendum
     1.12.1 All changes proposed to be made by addendum are to be reviewed and approved by
             AES staff prior to issuance.
     1.12.2 All addenda to be coordinated and issued by Architect (Prime Consultant).
     1.12.3 All addenda must be issued 48 hours prior to tender closing. No addenda or
             clarifications to be issued after this time, unless for an extension to the closing date
1.13 Construction Administration
     1.13.1 Site Visits: Architect and Consulting Engineers, while any work under their discipline is
             in progress, must conduct a site review on a weekly basis at a minimum and (more
             often if required to resolve problems). Review is to confirm compliance with contract
             documents, quality control of materials and workmanship, and progress of the work
             relative to the schedule. A “Field Review Report” must be prepared by the Architect
             and sub-consultants following each visit and a copy sent to the AES, construction
             administrator.
     1.13.2 Contract administration: Architect must issue the following documents in the format as
             per sample forms found in Appendix 5 of this document.
             1.13.2.1 Proposed Change Notice (PCN)
             1.13.2.2 Change Order (CO)
             1.13.2.3 Change Directive For PCN (CDPCH)
             1.13.2.4 Cash Allowance Authorization (CAA)
             1.13.2.5 Supplementary Instruction (SI)
             1.13.2.6 Certificate of Payment (COP)
             1.13.2.7 Field Review Report (FR).
     1.13.3 Maintain a log of all Requests for Information (RFI’s), Supplementary Instructions,
             Proposed Change Notices and Change Orders, recording dates issued, responded,
             resolved or approved.
     1.13.4 Architect to obtain pre-approval from AES construction administrator prior to issuing
             Change Orders and Change Directives. Copies of Change Orders or Change
             Directives are issued and signed first by the Architect, then by the contractor and then
             sent to the AES construction administrator. Change Orders and Change Directives
             must be signed and approved by AES prior to the work proceeding.
Design Guidelines                                                                           A1
Calgary Board of Education                                   Mandatory Consultant Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 5 of 12


     1.13.5 Progress claims should be reviewed and any adjustments made prior to issuing a
            Certificate of Payment. The amounts on the contractor’s invoice and the Certificate of
            Payment must agree. The Certificate of Payment and all backup documentation to be
            delivered to AES within ten (10) working days from receipt of contractor’s invoice CBE
            finance issues cheques on Wednesdays only. Certificates of Payment received by
            Thursday in AES will be processed for payment the next week.
     1.13.6 Site meeting minutes to be recorded by the consultant and to accurately reflect the
            date, time, place and issues discussed. Minutes to include the following topics: review
            of previous minutes, safety, quality and schedule, review of requests for Information,
            review of proposed change notices and change orders, new business as agenda items.
            The minutes are to be circulated to the CBE and contractor within three (3) working
            days of the date of the meeting.
1.14 Drawing Standards
     1.14.1 The following are Drawing Standards that the AutoCAD files must conform to when
            they are submitted to the CBE for record drawing purposes.
     1.14.2 Submissions are to be made as one (1) complete and coordinated set and are to be
            submitted by the Architect. The Architect shall check all sub-consultant’s drawings and
            drawing files for completeness.
     1.14.3 Layering / Colours: consultant may use their own layering and colouring standard. All
            entities must be colour bylayer. Conversion will be required to produce CBE
            “Composite” plans for Close Out, reference Section 1.15.
     1.14.4 Xref’s: All xrefs are to be bound using the “INSERT” option so that the xref block name
            with the $0$ syntax is not included in the entity’s layer names.
     1.14.5 Plot style table files (pen assignments) .ctb for all of the A, S, M and E drawings are to
            be included.
     1.14.6 Font Files: Standard AutoCAD “RomanS.shx” font to be used on all drawings by all
            consultants.
     1.14.7 Blocks: All blocks are to be constructed on layer 0 and are to be colour “by layer”.
     1.14.8 Drawing Cleanup: All non applicable information, i.e., reference details, notes or other
            information outside the area of the main drawing is to be deleted.
     1.14.9 Title block: Consultant may use its own titleblock style. General information to be
            included in the titleblock is as follows:
            1.14.9.1 Prime consultant’s company name, address, phone and fax numbers (on all
                       drawings including sub-consultant’s drawings).
            1.14.9.2 Sub-consultant’s company name, address, phone and fax numbers on their
                       own drawings only.
            1.14.9.3 CBE Logo and name (supplied by CBE).
            1.14.9.4 “Issued for Tender” note and date.
            1.14.9.5 “Record drawing revisions” note and date.
            1.14.9.6 The CBE School / number to be included in the lower right corner.
            1.14.9.7 Date: The date that the drawing was plotted.
            1.14.9.8 Drawing size: CBE standard drawing size is 24” X 36” and whenever
                       possible this size is to be used. If a larger size is required by the size of the
                       floor plan then B1 size (707mm X 1000mm) is preferred. Larger size
                       considered only if needed to fit a large plan on one (1) sheet. A Ø size
                       (841mm X 1189mm) is the maximum.
            1.14.9.9 Check Set Submissions: Blueprint sets shall clearly and boldly include a
                       note
            1.14.9.10 “PRELIMINARY ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION” complete with
                       printing date.
1.15 Close Out
     1.15.1 Prime consultants shall be responsible to coordinate and review all submissions from
            the sub-consultants for completeness.
     1.15.2 All close out information to be received as one (1) complete package of all disciplines
            partial or incomplete submissions will not be accepted.
Design Guidelines                                                                         A1
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mandatory Consultant Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 6 of 12


    1.15.3 All close out information to be received within three (3) months of substantial
           completion or this portion of the fee may be forfeited.
    1.15.4 A portion of consultant fees will be held for close out. The amount of holdback will vary
           with the size of the project. The total amount of this portion of the fee will be released
           upon acceptance of this documentation.
    1.15.5 Record Drawings:
           1.15.5.1 Two (2) complete and bound printed sets will be required for CBE use.
           1.15.5.2 AutoCAD Drawing Files:
                       .1 Submissions are to be made as one (1) complete and coordinated set
                          and are to be submitted by the Architect. The Architect shall check all
                          sub-consultant’s drawings and drawing files for completeness.
                       .2 Any new additional details or sketches issued during construction are to
                          be put together on a large drawing sheet as issued with the tender set.
                          Cross referencing on the floor plans is required as applicable.
                       .3 Title block information shall include “Issued for Tender” complete with
                          date and “Record Drawing Revisions” and date. The Consultant may
                          remove all professional stamps that may be in digital form on the
                          drawing file.
                       .4 Drawing view should be saved to reflect the same as the plotted
                          drawing.
                       .5 Drawing File names shall be revised to match the printed drawing
                          number, e.g., A1,A2…S1,S2…M1,M2….etc. include cover sheet with
                          list of drawings.
                       .6 Submission format: CDR discs properly labeled with name, date, prime
                          consultant name, general content info (i.e. Record Drawings for A, S, M
                          and E).
           1.15.5.3 Reference Section 1.14 “Drawing Standards” for drawing file requirements
                     (ensure all xref files are bound).
           1.15.5.4 PDF files of Record Drawings:
                       .7 Adobe Acrobat PDF files are to be created from the AutoCAD drawing
                          files to eliminate the common problems associated with such things as
                          non-standard fonts, xrefs not included or bound and line thickness.
                       .8 Provide one (1) PDF file for each major discipline (i.e. A, S, M and E,
                          etc.) that includes all the drawings in that set. Create bookmarks for
                          each page as an index with drawing description.
    1.15.6 Specifications
           1.15.6.1 Hard Copies: Two (2) sets of Project Specifications incorporating all applicable
                     revisions from previously issued addenda, change orders, etc.
           1.15.6.2 Digital Format: Specifications including all addenda to be included in
                     document file (.doc) for Microsoft Word. Information to be included on the
                     same CDR disks with drawing files.
    1.15.7 Standard CBE Composite Floor Plan Drawings: After “as-built” information has been
           incorporated into the drawings, Consultant will be responsible for converting the
           working floor plans into a CBE standard “Composite” plan. (“Composite” refers to the
           original school plan combined with all subsequent additions / renovations.)
           1.15.7.1 The Consultant will be supplied with AutoCAD floor plans of the school
                     building. The format of the drawing shall be retained when converting working
                     drawing floor plans back to CBE Standard Composite Plan
           1.15.7.2 Drawings must follow ‘Drawing Standards’ outlined in section 1.14.
           1.15.7.3 Drawing information must comply with the CBE Standard Layers. These
                     layers should already exist in the file provided by AES.
           1.15.7.4 Delete detailed information (notes, cross referencing, dimensions, demolition
                     items, etc.) and include only the basic floor plan information as per the
                     example CBE Composite Plan.
           1.15.7.5 Revise perimeter area polylines that are on the frozen layers "area" and "area
                     2", etc., to suit modified plan. Update the area in the room name block.
                     Update the overall area in the titleblock if it has changed.
Design Guidelines                                                                           A1
Calgary Board of Education                                   Mandatory Consultant Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 7 of 12


             1.15.7.6 Add door header lines on layer “ARHEADER” (frozen).
             1.15.7.7 On layer “RENOVATIONS”, outline the areas on the floor plan that have been
                      renovated and include a note that reads, e.g. “2005 Modernization”, with
                      applicable year and type.
             1.15.7.8 Drawing information that is to be included for submissions to Alberta
                      Infrastructure (A.I.) The CBE Standard Floor Plans has 2 sizes of titleblocks,
                      depending on the dwg, file. The 8½ X 14” Titleblock is the size that the CBE
                      submits to A.I., along with a data sheet with room numbers and areas. The
                      Consultant will be responsible to update or create this plan information and
                      data sheet to suit the new plan revisions. The sample floor plan that will be
                      issued to the Consultant will be the format to be utilized. All of the 8½ X 14”
                      titleblock are to be placed in one layout tab in paper space..
             1.15.7.9 The site plan dwg requires the addition of the 8½ X 14” titleblock if not already
                      in the file.

        COMPOSITE FLOOR PLANS – CBE STANDARD LAYERING REQUIREMENTS
(Note: these layers are for the CBE Standard Floor Plan Dwg file and not the as-built Working
Drawings. There may be additional layers depending on School Dwg file.)
 Layer Name           Colour             Linetype         Drawing Entity

0                        21                   Continuous
ARDOOR                   2 (yellow)           Continuous            doors and frames, operable wall
AREA                     120                  Continuous            room area polylines
AREA2                    140                  Continuous            building perimeter area polylines
ARHEADER                 1 (red)              Continuous            door header lines
ARLOCKER                 3 (green)            Continuous            lockers
ARPARTITIOND             3 (green)            XDashdot              open area classroom divider lines
ARROOF                   3 (green)            Continuous            roof line (on 2nd Floor Plan)
ARSILL                   252                  Continuous            window sill lines
ARSTAIR                  1 (red)              Continuous            stairs, handrails
ARSTALL                  3                    Continuous            toilet partitions
ARWALL                   7 (white)            Continuous            walls, partitions
ARWHEADER                53                   Continuous            window header lines
ARWINDOW                 1 (red)              Continuous            window (glass and frame)
BORDER11X17              7 (white)            Continuous            11 X 17 Titleblock block
BORDER24X36              6 (magenta)          Continuous            24 X 36 Titleblock block
DEFPOINTS                7 (white)            Continuous            viewport in paperspace
FIXT                     4 (cyan)             Continuous            toilets, sinks, drinking. ftn.
GRID                     1 (red)              Center2               structural bldg. grids
HISTORY                  30                   Hidden                polyline around building additions c/w year
MILLWORK                 3 (green)            Continuous            counters, cabinets, fixed shelving
NORTH                    6 (magenta)          Continuous            north arrow
RENOVATIONS              201                  Hidden2               outlines the renov. area c/w date of renov.
ROOMNO                   4 (cyan)             Continuous            room name/area block
STALL                    3 (green)            Continuous            toilet stall
TEXT                     3 (green)            Continuous            misc. text

For Drawings that have the room numbers, data table and data text, the following layers will be included
DATA-TABLE               5 (blue)          Continuous             data table lines
DATA-TEXT                2 (yellow)        Continuous             data table text
ROOMNUMBER               1 (red)           Continuous             room number block
ROOMNAME                 4 (cyan)          Continuous             room name (replaces layer ROOMNO)
ROOMAREA                 3 (green)         Continuous             room area (within the room name block)
Design Guidelines                                                                        A1
Calgary Board of Education                                Mandatory Consultant Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 8 of 12



    1.15.8 Standard CBE Site Plan:
            1.15.8.1 The CBE will supply the consultant with a sample AutoCAD file for a
                      standard site plan. Similar to the floor plan, the detailed information and
                      entities in the drawing are to be removed and only include similar entities
                      as the sample drawing. All site services are to remain on the drawing. (The
                      CBE Site Plan files originated from the City of Calgary, and do not include
                      certain items such as site services.)
            1.15.8.2 The CBE standard site plans are done in meters, but the consultant may
                      leave their file in millimeters.
            1.15.8.3 Change the layer names and colours to match the standard drawing.
                      Certain entities to remain on layers unique to the consultant’s file may
                      remain.
            1.15.8.4 Only the 11 X 17” and 8½ X 14” titleblocks are to be included, and shall be
                      placed in paper place located in the same layout window.
    1.15.9 Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Consultants are responsible for coordinating with
            the contractor to prepare two (2) complete sets of manuals for the CBE upon
            completion of the project. Reference pages 11 & 12 of this section for sample cover
            layout.
            1.15.9.1 The following is a minimum requirement: upgrade to meet Division 15 and
                      Division 16 requirements where applicable. Data is to be bound as follows:
                       .1 Submit data in extension type catalogue binders bound with heavy
                           fabric, sized for 216mm X 279mm paper. Binder colours: Architectural –
                           white; Mechanical – green; and Electrical – yellow.
                       .2 Enclose title sheet labeled “Operating and Maintenance Manual”,
                           include name, date and list of contents.
                       .3 Label binder front and spine in hot stamped black lettering (on the white
                           and yellow binders) and hot stamped gold lettering (on the green
                           binder) the project, title, date, location, manual title, volume number,
                           CBE project number and, on spine, school number.
                       .4 Organize content into applicable sections of work to parallel
                           Specification Break Down. Each section to be identified with labeled
                           tabs protected with celluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividing
                           sheets.
    1.15.10 Architectural Manuals to include data specified in each section as well as the
            following:
            1.15.10.1 Manufacturer’s maintenance guides, parts lists, name and address of
                         nearest vendor of parts and any special tools required for maintenance of
                         building components with movable parts.
            1.15.10.2 Copy of installed hardware.
            1.15.10.3 List of materials installed including manufacturer’s name and
                         manufacturer’s code name for products.
            1.15.10.4 Manufacturer’s recommended maintenance of resilient and non-resilient
                         floor and wall coverings.
            1.15.10.5 Names, addresses and phone numbers of all sub-contractors and
                         suppliers.
            1.15.10.6 Copy of all guarantees and warrantees issued.
            1.15.10.7 Copy of all approved shop drawings with all data concerning changes
                         made during construction. Where contents of the manual include
                         manufacturer’s catalogue pages, clearly indicate the precise items
                         included in this installation and delete or otherwise clearly indicate all
                         manufacturer’s data with which this installation is not concerned.
            1.15.10.8 Document training provided for all specialties, equipment, etc.
    1.15.11 Mechanical Manuals to include data specified in each section as well as the following:
            1.15.11.1 Instructions in this manual shall be in simple language so as to guide in
                         proper operation and maintenance of mechanical components.
Design Guidelines                                                                       A1
Calgary Board of Education                               Mandatory Consultant Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                      Page 9 of 12


            1.15.11.2 Operation Data to include: Complete schematic drawings for each control
                         system.
                       .1 Description of each system and its control.
                       .2 Description of operation of each system at various loads together with
                           reset schedules and seasonal variances.
                       .3 Operation instructions for each system and each component.
                       .4 Description of actions to be taken in the event of equipment failure.
                       .5 Valve schedule number location and service, and flow diagrams.
                       .6 Colour coding charts.
            1.15.11.3 Maintenance Data to include:
                       .1 Servicing, maintenance, lubrication, operation and trouble shooting
                           instructions for each item of equipment.
                       .2 Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, e.g., Daily (D), Weekly
                           (W), Monthly (M), Semi-annually (SA), Annually (A), and special tools
                           required.
                       .3 Schedule and procedure for monitoring and maintaining chemical
                           treatment for each Loop System of piping.
                       .4 Provide a list of equipment suppliers and contractors, including address
                           and telephone numbers.
            1.15.11.4 Performance Data to include:
                       .1 Equipment manufacturer’s performance data with point of operation as
                           left after commissioning is complete.
                       .2 Copy of all approved shop drawings.
                       .3 Equipment Performance Verification Test results.
                       .4 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing reports.
                       .5 Test Reports as required in other sections:
                            Plumbing Test Reports
                            Gas Fired Equipment Test Reports
                            Pressure Test Reports for all Piping Systems
                            Hydronic Systems Cleaning and Treatment Reports
                            Fire Protection System Tests and Reports
                            Chemical Treatment Reports.
                       .6 Document training provided for all equipment and systems.
            1.15.11.5 Information Specified: Tabulate into divisions using dividers tabbed with
                         coloured mylar plastic tabs identified and numbered as follows:
                       .1 Division 1. General (clear)
                       .2 Division 2. Plumbing (green)
                       .3 Division 3. Fire Protection Systems (red)
                       .4 Division 4. Heating (yellow)
                       .5 Division 5. Ventilation and Air Conditioning (blue)
                       .6 Division 6. Controls (orange).
            1.15.11.6 Secure copies of final Air and Water Systems Balance report and include
                         in this division as one (1) single submission, complete with title page,
                         index and site data.
    1.15.12 Electrical Maintenance Manuals: Covering all details relating to operation,
            maintenance and replacement parts for electrical equipment with sections (as
            applicable) for:
            1.15.12.1 List of Electrical Engineer Firm, Electrical Contractor, and suppliers of
                         electrical equipment / services with names, addresses and telephone
                         numbers.
                       .1 Warranties.
                       .2 Documentation of proper disposal of hazardous materials.
                       .3 Electrical Service, Distribution Panels, Transformers and Surge
                           Suppression Units.
                       .4 Motor Controls.
                       .5 Heat Tracing.
                       .6 Lighting
Design Guidelines                                                                         A1
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mandatory Consultant Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 10 of 12


                            Provide a report that includes a schedule describing each typical
                              area, luminaire, lighting source, load (W/m2) and design lighting
                              levels. Upon completion, add field measured levels to the report.
                            Fixture schedule and specification sheets, including lamps for
                              general, exit and emergency lighting.
                            Provide a description of systems for the control of interior and
                              exterior lighting. Include Specification sheets for time clocks,
                              photocells, occupancy sensors, special ballasts and daylight
                              harvesting control modules.
            1.15.12.2 Fire Alarm System
                       .1 Verification Certificate and Fire Alarm Supplier’s Report.
                       .2 Schedule of devices inspected during System Verification including
                           each device’s zone, address, location and test confirmations.
                       .3 Technical data and illustrated parts list with part numbers.
                       .4 A copy of the final reviewed shop drawings.
                       .5 A complete copy of the Fire Alarm System program to be used to verify
                           future System modifications. Supply both paper and electronic copy in
                           MS Excel format.
            1.15.12.3 Security System: Including a zoning diagram (size: 11 X 17”) showing all
                         field device locations.
            1.15.12.4 Communications Systems: Including public address, master clock and
                         telephone systems.
            1.15.12.5 Computer Network System: Including manufacturer’s performance
                         warranty, test results and record drawings.
    1.15.13 Document the training provided for all systems.
    1.15.14 System Demonstration and Verification: A Verification Program will be carried out
            involving the Consultants, Contractors and the CBE to demonstrate safe operation of all
            systems. Include in the Specifications the Contractor’s scope of work including training
            seminar requirement.
Design Guidelines                                                                                     A2
Calgary Board of Education                                                                 Site Planning
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                    Page 1 of 5


A2      SITE PLANNING
2.1 Development of Site
     2.1.1   Development of the site required under the contract to be restricted to an area defined
             for the project by Capital and Urban Planning Services (CUPS) in coordination with
             AES. The design area will be limited to the school reserve portion of the Joint Use Site
             (JUS).
2.2 Joint Use Agreement
     2.2.1   Unless specifically identified by CUPS and AES, all new school buildings fall under the
             terms of the Joint Use Agreement between the City of Calgary, Calgary Board of
             Education (CBE) and Calgary Roman Catholic Separate School District #1 (CSSD).
     2.2.2   Under the Joint Use Agreement, “Joint Use Purposes” means those varied activities or a
             program conducted by the City of Calgary or the School Boards in each other’s facilities
             for the benefit of the citizens of Calgary; and also includes community uses that occur in
             school buildings and student use in playfield area.
     2.2.3   In order to facilitate “Joint Use Purposes”, the building and the playfields shall be
             designed to allow such uses and ensure that the security of the remainder of the site or
             building is not compromised. (Reference A3 General Building Design.)
2.3 Site Considerations
     2.3.1  The location of the school portion of the site will have been determined at the outline
            place stage of the development between the CBE and The City Planning Department.
            The Site Planning Team (SPT), a subcommittee of the “Joint Use Coordination
            Committee” will recommend approval to City Council. A concept plan will have been
            developed to identify school and parking lot access areas.
     2.3.2 Service lines locations and sizes shall be coordinated with The City during outline /
            subdivision approval process.
     2.3.3 Hydrants, light posts, mail boxes, utility boxes shall not be placed in or too close to
            identified access areas or at the corner of the site.
     2.3.4 Public transit bus stops shall not be placed along the school reserve portion of the site.
     2.3.5 Impacts on dry pond / storm water retention areas, if located on the site, are to be
            coordinated with the City of Calgary sewer division and AES mechanical engineer.
     2.3.6 City Parks Department sports field layouts outside of the school reserve portion of the
            joint use site which will be affected by the construction of the school are to be
            rehabilitated by the contractor. Contractor to repair any damage to city site adjacent to
            the school envelope including irrigation system, trees, etc.
     2.3.7 The City places temporary soccer / baseball diamonds on the school reserve portion of
            the site. It is the City’s responsibility to relocate these playfields once school construction
            occurs. Removal or relocation of these facilities will not be a requirement under the
            contract and must be coordinated with the City of Calgary Parks & Recreation
            department.
     2.3.8 Allow for repair / replacement of City Park’s existing facilities, irrigation, tree location,
            etc., which are to remain in the playfield areas, in scope of work. Include in the
            specifications for all new schools a requirement that the contractor contact the City of
            Calgary Parks & Recreation department to arrange a meeting to discuss the relocation
            of existing facilities, irrigation, tree location, etc. The Parks development Inspector at
            268-1381 and the Operations Supervisor from the appropriate area office will be
            contacted.
     2.3.9 An area for future community creative playground to be indicated on the site plan.
            Locate this close enough to the school for teacher supervision but far enough away to
            allow for future additions or location of relocatables / portables. Creative playgrounds
            should meet the CBE “Requirements and Guidelines for Creative Playground Planning
            and Construction” and be approved by SPT.
     2.3.10 When designing a school yard, leave intact a representative natural area to enhance
            student learning, including wetlands, forests and native prairie. If these areas do not
            exist consider creating natural learning spaces that use native plants. This
Design Guidelines                                                                                   A2
Calgary Board of Education                                                               Site Planning
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                  Page 2 of 5


           Naturalization and Landscape project should meet the CBE’ “Guidelines and
           Procedures for Construction of School Landscape Projects”.
    2.3.11 Set up site inspection with Calgary Roads to finalize replacement of sidewalk, curb and
           gutter prior to work starting, include AES contract administrator.
    2.3.12 All site improvements shall allow for easy ground maintenance and snow removal.
2.4 Location of the Building on Site
    2.4.1   The actual position of the school building is to be determined in conjunction with AES
            and CUPS and relayed by AES project manager.
    2.4.2   Position of the school building must consider topography, site drainage, site access
            (including parent and bus drop-off, pedestrians, vehicles), subsoil conditions, existing
            trees, services, modular classrooms; minimize cut and fill, etc.
    2.4.3   Position the parking lot in the most efficient portion of the site with respect to
            topography, site drainage, site access (including parent and bus drop-off, pedestrians,
            vehicles), subsoil conditions, existing trees, services, road system, etc.
    2.4.4   Parking lot access must be placed in such a way that it does not split a drop-off area in
            two.
    2.4.5   Main entry door (Fire Department access) to be within 15m of curb of street.
2.5 Future Building Additions
    2.5.1   Consideration must be given for future additions or placement of relocatable / portable
            classrooms when siting the school. The proposed area where additions might take place
            should be marked down on the site plan to avoid tree planting, irrigation systems,
            playground, goad-posts, and landscaping project placing by CBE or others.
    2.5.2   An unobstructed path for relocatables / portable transport must be identified.
    2.5.3   Surface drainage at minimum slope of 2% to be provided away from areas identified
            for future building additions.
2.6 Subsoil Conditions
    2.6.1   Geotechnical consultants will be commissioned to prepare a report on subsoil conditions
            and provide recommendations on foundation design, etc. In addition, the geotechnical
            consultants will provide a Level 1 Environmental Assessment will be provided as per
            the City of Calgary development guidelines. Consultants and its geotechnical team are
            to coordinate all test hole locations to ensure adequate information is provided for all
            areas of the building and paved areas to ensure proper design.
    2.6.2   Geotechnical specialists are to request access permit to CBE, and have the adequate
            insurance and liability documentation in place prior to start soil tests. After testing
            completion the site shall be re-mediated to its original state.
    2.6.3   If monitoring wells are to be installed for future underwater / soil tests, they should be
            covered with protecting locking cap and completely flushed to grade.
2.7 Site Elevations & Drainage
    2.7.1   A surveyor will be commissioned to prepare topography site plan indicating site
            elevations, benchmarks, boundaries, etc, all as required by the City of Calgary
            development guidelines.
    2.7.2   The building floor level is to be set so surface water will drain away from building on all
            sides. Site areas to be sloped a minimum 2% to catch basins.
    2.7.3   Parking areas and roof may be designed for storm water retention as required by the
            City of Calgary. Rain gardens are encouraged within the school site to allow for water
            infiltration.
    2.7.4   Roof drains to be tied into storm sewer system or if downspouts are absolutely
            necessary, they are to be located away from entrances and walkways (reference A3,
            Section 3.4 Security & Safety).
    2.7.5   Splash pads to be provided under downspouts and erosion control on slopes
            (reference A3, Section 3.4 Security & Safety).
    2.7.6   All finished grades of school construction area must be tied into existing playfield
            grades.
    2.7.7   Balance of cut and fill of materials must also be considered.
    2.7.8   Retaining walls are to be avoided.
Design Guidelines                                                                                  A2
Calgary Board of Education                                                              Site Planning
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                 Page 3 of 5


    2.7.9   Catchment areas shall be designed away from the parking lot entrance way to prevent
            ice formation hazards.
2.8 Services
    2.8.1   All services should be available on site, or to the property line. Verify location and size
            of services with City of Calgary department responsible (water, storm and sanitary
            sewer, electric). Also confirm natural gas service and telephone and fibre service.
    2.8.2   Catch basin lids must be round so vandals cannot drop them down the wells (reference
            B3, Mechanical Section 15015 Outside Services - Sanitary & Storm Drainage).
    2.8.3   Electrical and telephone pull boxes to be installed so that surface drainage at 2% slope
            away from them can be achieved.
    2.8.4   Locate pad-mounted Enmax transformers and any other utility boxes away from
            playground and entranceway areas.
    2.8.5   Include a spare 4” conduit for future use. Run conduit from property line together with
            telephone or fibre line to main electrical or main communications room, depending on
            layout.
2.9 Site Development
    2.9.1   Site development area may be increased, as negotiated, to meet additional
            requirements of the City of Calgary’s development approval process.
    2.9.2   Provide concrete (hard-surfaced) walkways from street to main entrance. Provide
            asphalt walkways wherever possible from streets to paved play area at the back of the
            school.
    2.9.3   Provide bollards at main entry sidewalk to prevent trucks backing up to doors.
    2.9.4   Provide a loading area.
    2.9.5   Garbage enclosure should be conveniently located for access by the facility operator.
            Enclosure to be minimum required by City of Calgary. Lighting must be provided to
            ensure safe access in winter.
    2.9.6   Provide one (1) aluminium flagpole located near main entry (reference B2, Architectural
            Section 10350 Flagpoles).
    2.9.7   Provide 19mm hose bibs adjacent to each entry and paved play area and provide
            coverage to water lawn areas with 30m hose.
    2.9.8   Provide barrier free accessibility to all play areas.
    2.9.9   Provide and install bike racks as required by the City of Calgary development approval
            process. Area must be sufficiently large enough to accommodate bike racks and paved,
            to the same specifications as for paved play areas. Location to be visible from general
            office windows.
2.10   Landscaping
    2.10.1 Project scope for landscaping must meet but not exceed all the requirements of the
           City of Calgary’s development approval process and the “Guidelines and Procedures for
           construction of school landscape projects”.
    2.10.2 Trees to be set back from the building, playground areas and paved areas far enough
           that they will not protrude on to those areas at maturity.
    2.10.3 School name sign must not be obscured by trees or other landscape elements.
2.11   Sloped Areas
    2.11.1 A maximum slope of 30% is allowed on grassed banks.
    2.11.2 The foot of all slopes to be set back 3m from hard surfaced areas.
    2.11.3 Provide steps and / or ramps to all slopes that must be crossed by students which
           exceed 30%.
2.12   Paved Play Areas
    2.12.1 Elementary Schools:
           2.12.1.1 Paved play areas are required for elementary schools; sloped for drainage
                    away from building.
           2.12.1.2 Base on the ultimate projected capacity of the building, the play area size is
                    to be 0.75 m2 per student.
           2.12.1.3 Preferred orientation of the play area is to the south or west, near student
                    entrances at the back of the school away from bake racks and parking lots.
Design Guidelines                                                                                 A2
Calgary Board of Education                                                             Site Planning
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                Page 4 of 5


    2.12.2 Middle / Junior High Schools:
           2.12.2.1 Paved play areas are preferred for Middle / Junior High Schools, sloped for
                     drainage away from the building.
           2.12.2.2 Size play area to accommodate a full size basketball court.
           2.12.2.3 Preferred orientation of the play area is to the south or west, near student
                     entrances at the back of the school.
    2.12.3 General:
           2.12.3.1 Provide paved access from drop-off area to paved play area.
           2.12.3.2 Provide barrier free access to play areas.
           2.12.3.3 Paving to be light duty asphalt.
           2.12.3.4 Slope for drainage to catch basins or soft landscaped areas (rain gardens).
2.13   Transportation & Drop-off Areas
    2.13.1 The site plan to indicate where buses and parent pick-up and drop-off take place. These
           locations must be separate. If only one (1) frontage is available other methods of
           separation must be explored.
           2.13.1.1 On two (2) street frontage sites: Place uninterrupted drop-off zone for buses
                     on one (1) frontage and uninterrupted parent drop-off on another;
           2.13.1.2 On single street frontage sites: Consider locating one (1) uninterrupted
                     drop-off on the street (parents) and the other on-site (buses). When on-site
                     loading is not possible, locations are to be approved by AES project
                     manager and CBE Transportation Services prior to submission to the City.
    2.13.2 For the bus drop-off area, indicate space for a minimum of six (6) buses. Allow 18m
           per bus.
    2.13.3 Where city streets are utilized indicate all fire hydrants, city bus zones, etc. These
           spaces cannot count as drop-off space.
    2.13.4 Bus areas are to be clearly visible from the administration space.
    2.13.5 Location of the drop-off, pick-up areas either on site or utilizing city streets, to be
           coordinated with the City of Calgary Traffic Department. See 2.13.1
2.14   Parking Facilities
    2.14.1 Provide asphalt paved parking area with adequate drainage as per City of Calgary
           standards.
    2.14.2 Paved parking to be light / heavy duty asphalt, as per geotechnical report
           recommendations.
    2.14.3 Staff parking should be separated from student entrances.
    2.14.4 Parking area to be clearly distinguished from adjacent community parking facilities.
    2.14.5 Parking lot design to control pedestrian traffic through parking area using chain link
           fence as required.
    2.14.6 Provide 1200mm high chain link fence around parking area.
    2.14.7 Driveway locations to be coordinated with the City of Calgary Transportation
           Department.
    2.14.8 Provide precast concrete bumpers for each stall with pins having 50mm welded washer
           at top to prevent bumpers from being lifted.
    2.14.9 Parking lot and walkways lighting levels as per City of Calgary requirements.
    2.14.10Parking lot signs and pipe traffic control gates required by City of Calgary regulations to
           be included in contract, other signs to be provided by CBE grounds services.
    2.14.11Parking lot Capacity:
           2.14.11.1 Elementary and Junior High Schools: Provide sufficient number of stalls
                        to meet City Bylaw based on the maximum school capacity.
                       .1 Visitor: Provide three (3) regular stalls.
                       .2 School Staff: Provide car plug-ins for all staff stalls.
                       .3 Facility Maintenance Services: Provide one (1) dedicated stall. CBE
                            will provide signs to indicate for Facility Maintenance Services only.
           2.14.11.2 Senior High Schools: Provide sufficient number of stalls to meet
                        maximum school capacity.
                       .1 Visitor: Provide three (3) regular stalls.
                       .2 School staff: Provide car plug-ins for all staff stalls.
Design Guidelines                                                                              A2
Calgary Board of Education                                                          Site Planning
Capital Planning and Development Services                                             Page 5 of 5


           2.14.11.3 Student parking: Provide stalls for student parking as required. These
                     stalls are to be separated from staff and visitor parking areas.
           2.14.11.4 Facility Maintenance Services: Provide two (2) dedicated stalls. CBE will
                     provide signs to indicate for Facility Maintenance Services only.
2.15   Garbage Bins
    2.15.1 Locate garbage and recycling bins so as to reduce the dumpsters travel on CBE asphalt
           as much as possible but near to an exit from the school for access.
    2.15.2 Provide space for two (2) bins, (one (1) garbage and one (1) recycling) for schools less
           than 600 students in ultimate capacity and three (3) bins for other schools.
    2.15.3 Provide screening to City Development department minimum requirements. Steel
           bollards to be detailed to prevent damage to screening. Mesh design preferred. Gates
           to be constructed using steel framing. Cane bolts to hold in place in both 180º open and
           closed positions.
    2.15.4 Provide reinforced concrete pad extending wide enough and of sufficient length to
           accommodate a 4.6 cubic m (6 cu. yd.) bin and the front wheels of the dumpster truck.
    2.15.5 Lighting, provide lighting for garbage dumpster areas.
Design Guidelines                                                                              A3
Calgary Board of Education                                                General Building Design
Capital Planning and Development Services                                              Page 1 of 8




A3 GENERAL BUILDING DESIGN
3.1 General Building Design
    3.1.1   Building design should reflect function, a simple design is preferred, and shape of
            building should minimize length of perimeter walls and number of roof levels.
    3.1.2   Costs must not exceed Provincial approval as identified by the AES project manager at
            planning stage.
    3.1.3   Student population will be identified at the planning stage and the school is to be
            designed to accommodate the maximum population.
    3.1.4   Gross floor area for a school building is to be measured as per Alberta Infrastructure
            School capital manual, Area Guidelines (A.I. Area Guidelines). Gross approved floor
            area is identified at the planning stage and cannot be exceeded without written approval
            from the AES project manager.
    3.1.5   Floor areas of instructional spaces to conform to the Alberta Infrastructure School capital
            Manual, Space Guidelines.
3.2 General Building Layout
    3.2.1   Administration areas to be located adjacent to, and immediately accessible, to the main
            entrance.
    3.2.2   Gymnasium to be located in an area removed from the library and classrooms to avoid
            noise disruption. Gymnasiums with floor levels below grade to be at an interior location
            or have exit stairwells enclosed. Exterior exit / entrance stairwells are not acceptable.
    3.2.3   Washrooms should be located in close proximity to the instructional areas and located
            back to back and stacked for two (2) storeys to minimize plumbing lines.
    3.2.4   The provision of a portion of the required classrooms by use of relocatables will be
            determined at the planning stage. The building must be laid out to efficiently
            accommodate this future addition, complete with any necessary firewalls, service stub
            outs, etc.
    3.2.5   In Elementary and Junior High Schools, the administration area should be located to
            provide good visual access to the bus drop-off area.
    3.2.6   Provide fire rated storage room with exterior entrance for storing gas powered
            equipment approximately 2400 X 3000mm size, located adjacent to an entrance.
3.3 Community Use of the Building
    3.3.1   The secondary function of the school building is to support community oriented activities
            by allowing certain spaces to be utilized for community use, while ensuring security of
            other areas.
    3.3.2   The following Spaces should be considered for dual use by the community:
            3.3.1.3      Gymnasium
            3.3.1.1      Multi-purpose (Lunch / Study Room)
            3.3.1.2      Associated Kitchen / Food Service Space
            3.3.1.3      Washroom Facilities.
    3.3.3   Where possible above facilities to be grouped together adjacent to main entrance and
            parking lot.
    3.3.4   Design to allow for access to these areas but remainder of the school areas must be
            able to be locked off to prevent access.
3.4 Security & Safety
    3.4.1   Design of the school and selection of materials must provide good resistance to
            misuse and vandalism, and good security against illegal entry to the building interior.
    3.4.2   Design of the exterior of the school and selection of materials must consider
            undesirable access to the roof, canopies, overhangs or other building protrusions. To
            reduce the possibilities of exterior access to roof avoid using metal siding in horizontal
            pattern, projections of brick, low door and window canopies, low roof lines, sun screens,
            overhangs and projections.
    3.4.3   Alcoves, cul-de-sacs, hidden areas or other places where students can "hang-out" or
            escape observation must be eliminated
Design Guidelines                                                                               A3
Calgary Board of Education                                                 General Building Design
Capital Planning and Development Services                                               Page 2 of 8


    3.4.4  Security Alarm System to be provided, reference B4, Electrical Section 16727.
    3.4.5  Rooftop equipment vulnerable to damage, blockage, etc., from vandalism to be
           protected by metal mesh screens, and all access panels to equipment to be provided
           with hasp for padlocks.
    3.4.6 School name lettering to be located high enough out of reach from the ground to reduce
           vandalism from hockey sticks etc
    3.4.7 Exterior doors are not to have thumb latches on the panic sets.
    3.4.8 Glazing to be provided between general office and main entry corridor to provide
           visual control.
    3.4.9 Exterior lighting to be mounted at a height and location on the perimeter walls to avoid
           vandalism, while providing adequate lighting levels for security and visibility. Post-
           mounted lights should be minimum 5000mm above ground level.
    3.4.10 Where downspouts must be utilized for roof drainage they must be constructed of
           heavy gauge material to prevent damage and be installed in a manner which will not
           allow climbing.
    3.4.11 The Facility Operator’s office to be located centrally with good visual and physical
           access to all community use and public spaces.
3.5 Energy Management
    3.5.1   The building design shall conform to at least the mandatory provisions of the Model
            National Energy Code for Buildings (MNECB).
    3.5.2   For buildings over 10,000 sq. m, refer to A.I. Area Guidelines.
    3.5.3   Target minimum overall “R” values for all walls (including block walls for gymnasiums
            and mechanical rooms): 20 and for roofs: 30.
    3.5.4   The overall R-value as described in ASHRAE Fundamentals 2001 Chapter 25, takes
            thermal breaks such as Z-girts, framing materials into account.
    3.5.5   Metal spandrels insulation within curtain walls to have a minimum R rating of 12.
3.6 Access for Operations & Maintenance
    3.6.1   All mechanical and electrical components to be provided with easy access for cleaning,
            changing filters, servicing and replacement. Particular attention is required for access to
            roof top equipment or second level mechanical rooms accessed by ladder or stairs over
            45° incline. Workers must climb these ladders / stairs maintaining three-point contact;
            therefore alternate methods of moving materials up into these spaces would be
            required. Ships ladders or stairs, at 45° or less are preferred. Fall protection is required
            for all roof top equipment which requires servicing. A control zone identified by different
            colour walkway membrane (reference B2, Architectural Section 07500 SBS Modified
            Bitumen Roofing) may be used to identify the 2000mm zone from an unguarded edge of
            a roof edge 3000mm or more in height. Should a worker need to be within 2000mm
            from a roof edge to service equipment, then a guard rail would be required.
3.7 Building Envelope Consultant
    3.7.1   A Building Envelope Consultant to be retained to review drawings, construction details
            and mockups that set standard for quality of work on site
Design Guidelines                                                                              A3
Calgary Board of Education                                                General Building Design
Capital Planning and Development Services                                              Page 3 of 8




3.8      School Functional Relationships
         The following bubble diagrams and functional relationship information is provided for use
         by the Consultants to form a basis of design layout for schools. Any deviation from these
         fundamental relationships will be identified during the design phase of the project.
         Detailed information on each space is identified in A7, Interior Space Requirements.




         Diagram 1                   Elementary School Functional Relationships
      3.8.1   General Layout
              3.8.1.1   Locate the administration area so that visual supervision of the bus drop-
                        off area is possible.
              3.8.1.2   Locate the kindergarten entrance adjacent to the parent drop-off area.
              3.8.1.3   Parent drop-off and bus drop-off locations must be separate. If only one
                        (1) frontage is available other methods of separation must be explored.
              3.8.1.4   Anticipate future relocatable / portable additions that require, from finished
                        floor level, a minimum 1.0m grade change to accommodate relocatable /
                        portable foundations.
              3.8.1.5   Develop classrooms in “pods” to encourage neighborhood groupings and
                        to disperse students equally throughout the building.
              3.8.1.6   Washrooms should be adjacent to classroom pods and gathering space.
              3.8.1.7   Provide good sight lines in circulation areas for adequate supervision.
              3.8.1.8   Provide a number of “Entrances” dispersed around the building for access
                        by students.
      3.8.2   Community Use
              3.8.2.1   The Community will often use the school library, gymnasium and
                        gathering space after normal school hours. Configure the library and
                        gymnasium adjacent to the gathering space and administration area so
Design Guidelines                                                                         A3
Calgary Board of Education                                           General Building Design
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 4 of 8


                      that after hours lockdown will limit public access to other areas of the
                      school.
            3.8.2.2   Washroom access is required for community use.
            3.8.2.3   Ensure adequate exiting is provided when the building is in after hours
                      lockdown.
    3.8.3   Administration Area
            3.8.3.1   Locate the administration area adjacent to the primary building entrance.
            3.8.3.2   Consider locating the staff lounge and larger staff workroom remote from
                      the administration area, close but not immediately adjacent to the
                      gathering space.
    3.8.4   Gathering Space
            3.8.4.1   Locate close to primary building entrance.
            3.8.4.2   Consider large operable opening to gymnasium to accommodate flexibility
                      for a school stage.
            3.8.4.3   Locate adjacent to kitchen.
            3.8.4.4   Locate adjacent to Facility Operator’s Office (FOC). FOC requires visual
                      connection to primary entrance and public spaces.
            3.8.4.5   Provide adequate area to accommodate students eating lunch. Table and
                      chair storage for approximately one-half (½) of the students at one time
                      as a minimum.
    3.8.5   Gymnasium
            3.8.5.1   Provide access directly to the exterior, oriented to the playing fields.
            3.8.5.2   Locate adjacent to gymnasium equipment storage.
            3.8.5.3   Locate adjacent to gymnasium staff office / shower faculty.
            3.8.5.4   Provide interconnection with gathering space, refer to above.
            3.8.5.5   Provide at least two (2) access points into the gym from the school.
    3.8.6   Library
            3.8.6.1   Provide natural light, either through clerestory glazing or windows North
                      light is preferred, south light must be mitigated.
            3.8.6.2   Provide clear sight lines for adequate supervision.
Design Guidelines                                                                         A3
Calgary Board of Education                                           General Building Design
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 5 of 8




                  Diagram 2              School Administration Block
    3.8.7   General
            3.8.7.1   Locate the general administration space so that visual supervision of the
                      bus drop-off area and internal circulation area is possible.
            3.8.7.2    Size the principal and assistant principal similarly, locating each with
                      views to the bus drop-off area.
            3.8.7.3   Develop lockdown function vestibule for control of public access to
                      building while class is in session.
           3.8.7.4    Provide a second entry to administration block from internal circulation.
    3.8.8  Infirmary
           3.8.8.1   Locate Infirmary close to staff in the general administration space with
                     direct visual connection for supervision of children in this space.
    3.8.9 Staff Lounge / Workroom
           3.8.9.1   The staff lounge and workroom may be located remote from the
                     administration block. If this occurs ensure a small workroom is located
                     adjacent to the general administration space for use by general
                     administration staff and accessible from both the general administration
                     space and internal circulation.
    3.8.10 Counseling Rooms / Meeting Rooms
           3.8.10.1 Counseling and meeting rooms should be away from the general
                     administration space and easily accessed from circulation.
           3.8.10.2 Counseling rooms should also be dispersed through the school.
Design Guidelines                                                                         A3
Calgary Board of Education                                           General Building Design
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 6 of 8




                      Diagram 3               Junior High School
    3.8.11 General
           3.8.11.1  Locate the administration area so that visual supervision of the bus drop-
                     off area is possible.
           3.8.11.2 Parent drop-off and bus drop-off locations must be separate. If only one
                     (1) frontage is available other methods of separation must be explored.
           3.8.11.3 Anticipate future relocatable / portable additions, which require, from
                     finished floor level, a minimum 1.0m grade change to accommodate
                     relocatable / portable foundations.
           3.8.11.4 Develop classrooms in “academic pods” to encourage “neighborhood”
                     groupings and to encourage the house structure.
           3.8.11.5 Washrooms should be adjacent to academic pods and gathering space.
           3.8.11.6 Provide good sight lines in circulation areas for adequate teacher
                     supervision.
           3.8.11.7 Provide a number of “entrances” dispersed around the building for access
                     by students.
    3.8.12 Community Use
           3.8.12.1  The Community will often use the school library, gymnasium and
                     gathering space after normal school hours. Configure the library and
                     gymnasium adjacent to the gathering space and administration area so
                     that after hours lockdown will limit public access to other areas of the
                     school.
           3.8.12.2 Washroom access is required for community use.
           3.8.12.3 Ensure adequate exiting is provided when the building is in after hour
                     lockdown.
    3.8.13 Administration Area
           3.8.13.1 Locate the administration area adjacent to the primary building entrance.
           3.8.13.2 Consider locating the staff lounge and larger staff workroom remote from
                     the administration area, close but not immediately adjacent to the
                     gathering space.
    3.8.14 Gathering Space
Design Guidelines                                                                       A3
Calgary Board of Education                                         General Building Design
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 7 of 8


           3.8.14.1 Locate close to primary building entrance.
           3.8.14.2 Consider large operable opening to gymnasium to accommodate flexibility
                    for a School Stage.
           3.8.14.3 Locate adjacent to kitchen.
           3.8.14.4 Locate adjacent to the Facility Operator’s office (FOC). FOC requires
                    visual connection to primary entrance and public spaces.
           3.8.14.5 Provide adequate area to accommodate students eating lunch. Table and
                    chair storage for one-half (½) of the students at one time as a minimum.
           3.8.14.6 Provide access to library from gathering space.
    3.8.15 Gymnasium
           3.8.15.1 Provide access directly to the exterior, oriented to the playing fields.
           3.8.15.2 Locate adjacent to gymnasium equipment storage.
           3.8.15.3 Locate adjacent to gymnasium staff office / shower faculty.
           3.8.15.4 Provide interconnection with gathering space, refer to above.
           3.8.15.5 Provide at least two (2) access points into the gym from the school.
    3.8.16 Library
           3.8.16.1 Natural light is desirable, either through clerestory glazing or windows.
                    North light is preferred, south light must be mitigated.
           3.8.16.2 Provide clear sight lines for adequate supervision.
Design Guidelines                                                                          A3
Calgary Board of Education                                            General Building Design
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 8 of 8




                      Diagram 4            Team Teaching Classroom
    3.8.17 General
           3.8.17.1     Group classrooms in pairs.
           3.8.17.2     Provide common breakout space to accommodate 4-6 students at a small
                        table. Provide for visual supervision from both classrooms and the
                        corridor.
           3.8.17.3     Provide a direct opening to join the two (2) classrooms; consider a
                        2400mm wide X 2150mm high barn door.
           3.8.17.4     Design classroom for maximum flexibility in layout to accommodate
                        multiple desk configurations to accommodate between 25 and 28
                        students and for team teaching with adjoined classroom.
           3.8.17.5     Provide natural light through windows, which occupy between 40-60% of
                        the perimeter wall it is located in.
           3.8.17.6     Consider light shelf for daylight harvesting on south facing classrooms.
           3.8.17.7     Classroom door requires a sidelight or vision panel in the door.
           3.8.17.8     In Elementary Schools, coat / boot storage must be facilitated in the
                        classroom.
           3.8.17.9     In Middle / Junior High Schools, coat / boot storage is to be
                        accommodated in lockers in the corridor.
Design Guidelines                                                                               A4
Calgary Board of Education                                                        Building Exterior
Capital Planning and Development Services                                               Page 1 of 2


A4. BUILDING EXTERIOR
4.1 General Exterior Design
    4.1.1 Safety and security of students, staff and the general public: School building exterior
          design and materials must take into consideration typical uses of school buildings and
          sites during school hours and after hours. To this end, the school exterior must offer the
          following characteristics:
          4.1.1.1 Exterior materials must withstand various types of vandalism and mischief,
                     in addition to general high use wear and tear;
          4.1.1.2 Building exterior design must not create nooks, alcoves or hidden spaces
                     that could be used for questionable activities. Designers must employ the
                     principles of CPTED in the building’s exterior design;
          4.1.1.3 Building surfaces must not create ledges, foot or hand holds, small
                     recesses, etc., that can be used for climbing; and
          4.1.1.4 Exterior building design must not facilitate individuals climbing onto the
                     roof. Consideration must be given to access from ‘stepping’ devices (i.e.
                     ladders, cars, etc.).
    4.1.2 Exterior Signage: Building signage must be clearly legible from the major building
          access route and should be located near the main entrance of the building (reference
          B2, Architectural Section 10400 Signage).
4.2 Exterior Finishes
    4.2.1 Brick or concrete block masonry walls with textured finish are preferred, but may be
          minimized to suit budget.
    4.2.2 Stucco over sheathing only is acceptable but should be divided by control joints into
          panels of approximately 10m² with a maximum dimension of 6000mm.
    4.2.3 Metal siding of commercial quality is acceptable. Select colours from standard range
          and use vertical profiles to prevent climbing.
    4.2.4 Wood siding must be avoided except as skirting around relocatable classrooms.
    4.2.5 A game wall for sports may be considered at the paved play area, constructed from a
          durable material such as masonry or pre-cast concrete. This wall cannot be made of any
          split-face or rough materials.
4.3 Exterior Stairs, Ramps & Railings
    4.3.1 The design of all exterior stairs, ramps and railings must ensure that a climbing hazard
          is not created. In addition, the following applies:
          4.3.1.1 Provide concrete for stairs and ramps for all primary exits. All ramp surfaces
                    must be textured.
          4.3.1.2 Metal stairs may be considered for secondary entrances upon approval by
                    AES project manager. Sufficient drainage of metal stair surface is required
          4.3.1.3 Handrails of durable, low to no maintenance finish (e.g. galvanized).
4.4 Painted Exterior Items
    4.4.1 Exterior items required to have a paint finish to receive a three-coat application using all
          based paints in accordance with the Canadian Painting Contractors Association (CPCA)
          Specification Manual (reference B2, Architectural Section 09900 Painting).
    4.4.2 Concrete should not be painted.
4.5 Roofing
    4.5.1 Roof structure design should be kept simple to avoid hips and valleys.
    4.5.2 "Flat" roofs to have positive slopes, minimum 2%, to roof drains. Slope structure to
          create positive drainage.
    4.5.3 Asphalt shingles are acceptable for sloped roofs as per ARCA. Specify 25 year
          interlocking shingles only.
    4.5.4 Mechanically Interlocked Standing Seam Metal Roof Systems are acceptable for sloped
          roofs. Use only colours to be selected from standard range.
    4.5.5 Provide a 2-ply SBS modified bitumen membrane with 250 gram cap sheet with light
          grey granule.
Design Guidelines                                                                              A4
Calgary Board of Education                                                       Building Exterior
Capital Planning and Development Services                                              Page 2 of 2


    4.5.6 Conventional built-up roofing, single ply membrane systems (PVC, EPDM or Hypalon)
          are not acceptable except when patching an existing condition.
    4.5.7 Provide proper screening for all rooftop units for development and aesthetic purposes.
          Design must prevent birds from nesting on the units. Design must be reviewed and
          approved by AES project manager. Painting of the rooftop units is not sufficient except
          where approved by City of Calgary and AES project manager.
    4.5.8 Fall protection is required for all roof top equipment which requires servicing. A control
          zone identified by different colour walkway membrane (reference B2, Architectural
          Section 07500 SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing) may be used to identify the 2000mm
          zone from an unguarded edge of a roof edge 3000mm or more in height. Should a
          worker need to be within 2000mm from a roof edge to service equipment, then a guard
          rail would be required.
4.6 Roof Access Hatches & Ladders
    4.6.1 Access to be provided to all roof areas. Specify at least one (1) access hatch to be
          provided and provide ladders to all other roof levels, where more than 600mm height
          difference exists (reference A3, Section 3.6 Access for Operations & Maintenance, for
          access to service roof top equipment).
    4.6.2 Roof access hatches to be 610mm X 914mm size, equipped for padlock lock on inside
          and Hatch Railing System.
    4.6.3 Access and fall protection to be detailed to OH&S Code requirements. Ladders, ship
          ladders must be appropriate for use.
4.7 Skylights & Clerestory Windows
    4.7.1 The use of skylights is discouraged. Where high level natural light is required, use
          clerestory windows. High level natural light should be avoided in spaces that may need
          to be “blacked out” for video or other presentations.
    4.7.2 When skylights are utilized, the size of skylights to be limited. Maximum diagonal
          dimension to be 3600mm.
    4.7.3 Provisions must be made for cleaning both skylights and clerestory windows.
    4.7.4 Provisions must be made for window coverings to clerestory windows on the east, south
          and west faces of the building.
4.8 Windows
    4.8.1 Provide a minimum of one (1) venting window into classroom, office and common
          areas. Locate at a minimum of 1800mm above grade. Alternate: Kawneer vent row
          instead of venting windows.
4.9 Doors, Frames & Sidelights
    4.9.1 Hollow metal doors with pressed steel frames to be used for all exterior doorways.
          Glazing panels must be carefully designed to ensure vision yet maintain security
          (reference B2, Architectural Section 08100 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames).
    4.9.2 Aluminium entrances and doors are not acceptable.
    4.9.3 Fixed mullions to be used at all except two (2) entrances, which are to have removable
          mullions for deliveries. Removable mullions are also required for corridor doors to all for
          deliveries within the school.
    4.9.4 Glass to be maximum 150mm wide in student entrance doors (except at main entrance)
          and rectangular in shape (no round or odd shapes).
4.10   Exterior Lighting
    4.10.1 Provide adequate exterior lighting on the perimeter of the building to optimize safety and
           to minimize vandalism.
Design Guidelines                                                                            A5
Calgary Board of Education                                            General Mechanical Design
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 1 of 1


A5. GENERAL MECHANICAL DESIGN
5.1 Detailed Procedures to be Followed by Consultants
    5.1.1 At preliminary design stage, a meeting should be held between the consultant and AES
          representatives and a sketch provided showing the manner in which the pipe mains and
          ducts will be run, the ventilation, heating and cooling and control strategy and all
          equipment locations.
    5.1.2 For all new school construction and where warranted in modernizations, heating / cooling
          load calculations (only Carrier E-20 or Trane Trace software output acceptable) as well
          as any other requested design data, including energy calculations, to be submitted at the
          50% design stage for review.
5.2 Energy Management
    5.2.1 The building design shall conform to at least the mandatory provisions of the Model
          National Energy Code for Buildings (MNECB).
    5.2.2 For buildings over 10,000m², reference A.I. Design Guidelines.
5.3 Mechanical Equipment
    5.3.1 Vibration and acoustic characteristics of all mechanical equipment installations (air
          handlers, condensing units, fans, air compressors, etc.) to be considered in order to limit
          acoustic and vibration transfer to occupied spaces. The consultant shall retain an
          acoustic consultant to review drawings and construction details.
5.4 Central System Air Handling Unit
    5.4.1 The preferred central HVAC System is a Constant Volume Air System delivering
          constant temperature air tempered by re-heat coils for the interior spaces and perimeter
          radiation to the perimeter rooms.
    5.4.2 Consideration will be given to displacement ventilation design.
    5.4.3 Provide air conditioning.
    5.4.4 Fresh air intake locations related to exhaust, flues, vents, etc to be considered to avoid
          re-entry and resulting IAQ problems. Complete an extensive site review of existing
          conditions, in particular areas to be renovated. Locate units where not visible from
          building exterior, or from interior through clearstory windows.
5.5 Gas Service
    5.5.1 Gas meter to be located on the outside of the building and must come complete with
          accessible vandal resistant enclosure approved by CBE.
5.6 Emergency Domestic Water Service
    5.6.1 Provide a 60mm DCW line to the exterior wall and accessible to City hydrant c/w
          isolation and swing check valves.
5.7 Fire Protection
    5.7.1 Install complete Sprinkler System to all portions of the building as required by code.
          Gymnasium area should have protected heads.
    5.7.2 Install fire extinguishers to all locations required by code and also in the staff lounge,
          science rooms and home economics room.
    5.7.3 Data wiring closets shall have guards over sprinkler heads or be recessed in ceiling.
5.8 Combustion Air
    5.8.1 Combustion air to be tempered.
5.9 Controls & Energy / Building Management System
    5.9.1 Controls system shall be based on Direct Digital Control (Stand-Alone Controller) with
          capability of being controlled from a central station at the CBE Highfield Security office.
Design Guidelines                                                                            A6
Calgary Board of Education                                            General Electrical Design
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 1 of 3


A6. GENERAL ELECTRICAL DESIGN
6.1 General
    6.1.1 Design to maximize the energy efficiency of Building Systems. Design in accordance with
          the mandatory requirements of the current Model National Energy Code of Canada for
          Buildings.
    6.1.2 Design to all for future expansion as per design brief.
6.2 Site Electrical Services
    6.2.1 Consultant to coordinate with the Electrical and Telephone Utilities for location and
          trenching for these services to the school.
    6.2.2 Avoid crossing of water, sewer and natural gas service lines by the above services
          whenever possible.
    6.2.3 Consultant to contact Electrical Service provider to determine service availability,
          connection costs and date permanent service can be made available.
    6.2.4 Consultant to complete Electrical Service provider contract for supply of main service
          transformer, including all electrical demand calculations required. Forward completed
          service contract to CBE electrical engineer for approval and authorizing signature.
    6.2.5 Install one (1) spare 100mm conduit for future Communications Service provider.
6.3 Service Distribution, Sub distribution & Branch Panel boards
    6.3.1 Size the service and main distribution panel to approximately 20% above the combined
          current and anticipated future expansion design ampacity (addition of portables and
          relocatables).
    6.3.2 Provide for an extra conduit from the exterior pad-mount transformer to the electrical
          room inside the school, sized as per the other service conduits and cap off.
    6.3.3 Panel boards are to be distributed uniformly about the school, sized on the basis of the
          known and anticipated loads in each section of the school.
    6.3.4 Panel boards to be located in storage rooms, mechanical rooms and electrical rooms.
          Where these rooms are not available locate panel boards in corridors and provide with a
          lockable cover.
    6.3.5 At branch panels and / or outlets, provide surge suppression.
    6.3.6 Provide Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Panel
6.4 Conduit & Wiring
    6.4.1 Specify all AC and DC wiring to be installed in conduit or wire tray as per IT and code.
          Network, security and telephone cabling may also be installed in cable tray.
    6.4.2 For panels recessed in a concrete block wall, provide for two (2) 25mm conduits stub
          outs to just above ceiling level for future use.
    6.4.3 Under no circumstances, even in an existing building, shall wiring of power and low
          voltage devices be installed or remain in the same conduit.
6.5 Wiring Devices & Boxes
    6.5.1 Caretaking Equipment: Electrically powered floor polishers and / or auto-scrubbers,
          provide 20A dual purpose receptacles (which all both a 15A plug and a 20A plug to be
          inserted) in the corridors at approximately 30m intervals. Put corridor outlets on
          dedicated circuits.
    6.5.2 Where battery powered floor polishers and / or auto-scrubbers are proposed provide
          connections for charging such appliances (in the storage room where the floor polisher /
          auto-scrubber is stored).
    6.5.3 Provide electrical outlets for a washer and dryer for caretaking use.
    6.5.4 Parking Lot Receptacles: Connect to circuits on dedicated power panel with a control
          contactor which is controlled by the Building Management System (BMS).
    6.5.5 Exterior Receptacles: Provide duplex receptacles around building perimeter on a
          separate circuit for service use.
    6.5.6 Electrical Outlet Location Priority List: When installing power outlets, network
          communication ports for computers, design priority is to be in the following order:
          6.5.6.1 Flush-mounted wall outlet boxes.
          6.5.6.2 Surface-mounted wall outlet boxes.
Design Guidelines                                                                              A6
Calgary Board of Education                                              General Electrical Design
Capital Planning and Development Services                                             Page 2 of 3


          6.5.6.3    Ceilings up to 15 feet: All-metal service pole (or "PAC" pole) (reference B4,
                     Electrical Section 16790 Computer Network System).
          6.5.6.4    Flush-mounted floor box.
6.6 Lighting
    6.6.1 Lighting design levels shall be as defined in A7 Interior Space Requirements.
    6.6.2 Fluorescent fixtures to be the standard in most interior areas except where otherwise
          specified. Use T8 lamp technology and electronic ballasts for these fixtures.
    6.6.3 The apparent colour of the lamp shall be 4100 ºK.
    6.6.4 T-bar Ceiling Fluorescent Fixtures shall be "imperial size", with lay-in lenses.
6.7 Emergency & Exit Lights
    6.7.1 Provide for all areas required by code and for mechanical rooms, locker rooms and
          windowless classrooms and washrooms.
    6.7.2 The emergency lighting shall be powered from wall-mounted rechargeable battery packs.
6.8 Stage & Drama Room Lighting / Power
    6.8.1 Provide the electrical systems rough-in for an 8-12 circuit lighting system for drama
          rooms in Junior / Senior High schools.
    6.8.2 Provide the electrical system rough-ins for a theatre style lighting 48-64 circuit and
          sound system for High school theatre / multi-purpose presentation area.
6.9 Fire Alarm System
    6.9.1 Provide an addressable supervised single stage Fire Alarm System.
    6.9.2 Fire Alarm Verification will be paid for directly by the CBE to verifying engineers. Do not
          include a cash allowance in the Contract for Verification.
    6.9.3 Do not disable existing Fire Alarm Systems while a school is in session.
    6.9.4 Fire Alarm System must be ULC rated and monitored by CBE Highfield Security Office.
6.10   Security System
    6.10.1 Provide intrusion security using infrared technology motion detectors.
    6.10.2 Provide building damage protection using flood detector(s) for water flood detection and
           temperature low limit sensors for heating loss detection.
    6.10.3 Provide for remote monitoring of Security System.
    6.10.4 Provide an Electronic Access System in all schools. The System is By Sielox – Access
           Control.
    6.10.5 Provide for High school, rough in for a CCTV security camera system to cover the
           perimeter of the building, building exits and other specified interior areas.
    6.10.6 Provide rough in for electrical maglock / door strike to limit access to the building or
           sections of the building during a school lockdown.
6.11   Communications System
    6.11.1 Provide a microprocessor-based public address system capable of communicating
           throughout the school for emergency and other purposes. The public address system will
           include a master clock system.
    6.11.2 Provide a telephone system for voice communications for the general office, instructional
           rooms and other areas and provide the future capability for Voice-over Internet Protocol
           (VoIP) to trunk voice traffic to a central exchange.
    6.11.3 Integrate the telephone system with the public address system to perform voice pages.
    6.11.4 The master clock system will control the class change schedule. Class changes will be
           indicated by a tone.
    6.11.5 Provide individual speaker zones to provide all call, corridor only or classroom only
           paging. Provide loud speakers distributed thorough the building system except in small
           rooms with telephone handsets where the handset speaker can be used.
    6.11.6 Provide the electrical systems rough-in for a gymnasium / stage sound system that will
           be connected to public address system.
6.12   Data Network System
    6.12.1 Provide Category 6 communication cabling, termination panels and network outlets
           ready for ITS computer and network systems to install networking equipment.
Design Guidelines                                                                             A6
Calgary Board of Education                                             General Electrical Design
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 3 of 3


    6.12.2 Install sub-communications closets as required. Install 10GIG Fibre Backbone between
           main communications closets and sub-communications closets.
    6.12.3 Wireless Network to provide 100% coverage throughout all instructional areas. Allow
           for cash allowance that will be provided by AES project manager.

6.13   Barrier Free Access Equipment

    6.13.1 Provide power for barrier free equipment including elevators, lifts and handicapped entry
           door openers and pushbuttons.
Design Guidelines                                                                                    A7
Calgary Board of Education                                                  Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                   Page 1 of 35



A7       INTERIOR SPACE REQUIREMENTS
7.1           General Application of Interior Space Requirements
      7.1.1   This Section is applicable to all disciplines and should be reviewed by all Consultants.
              This Section is to be read in conjunction with the Construction Standards portion of this
              document.
      7.1.2   Throughout the consultative process for a project, discussion regarding these space
              requirements is for information only; any and all deviations from this document must be
              pre-approved in writing by the AES project manager.
      7.1.3   Please reference Alberta Infrastructure Area Guidelines for basic room areas in the
              current School Capital Manual.
              For a copy refer to http://www.infras.gov.ab.ca/public/schools.asp
      7.1.4   Many items indicated are minimums and standard details. Increases to the quantities
              or deviations from the details may be considered, however these deviations must be
              pre-approved in writing by the AES project manager.
      7.1.5   Consultants are still responsible for fully investigating the site (facility, grounds, soils, etc.)
              and assessing the needs of the project within reason so as not to compromise CBE
              standards.
      7.1.6   All equipment is listed for design information purposes including equipment that is not
              included in Contract (NIC). Electrical, mechanical and architectural considerations must
              be made in the design and construction for all the equipment listed. Equipment is
              included in contract unless specified as NIC.

7.2           Interior Space Design – New Schools
      7.2.1  The AES project manager will facilitate educational input to the school design through
             the design team consultative process.
      7.2.2 The design of the facility is governed by the Alberta Infrastructure Area Guidelines (A.I.
             Area Guidelines) published and approved by Alberta Infrastructure. The approved
             building area cannot be exceeded without approval in writing from the AES project
             manager. The role of the consultant in this regard is to rationalize all educational input
             into a system facility that will meet the needs of the CBE in the long term. Ultimate plan
             approval and sign off is the responsibility of AES.
      7.2.3 The facility design must incorporate the proper number of teaching spaces as defined in
             the program. Failure to do so will result in a complete redesign at the expense of the
             consultant.
      7.2.4 The facility design must offer flexible spaces that can grow and change with changing
             curriculum and teaching methods.
      7.2.5 The facility design must allow for future expansion as directed by AES. When expansion
             is identified to be relocatable space, proper “termination” must be provided in the final
             design and documentation. This includes, but is not limited to, a two (2) hour firewall,
             service terminations, site grading, etc.
      7.2.6 Space design in new school construction must incorporate all aspects of the enclosed
             interior space requirements unless specifically waived in writing by the AES project
             manager.
      7.2.7 The consultant is responsible for ensuring that quality acoustics are provided in all
             interior spaces and that appropriate materials, which are subject to the limitations of the
             Construction Standards Section, are utilized to achieve this quality.
      7.2.8 Standard millwork details are provided in the constructions standards portion of this
             document.
      7.2.9 Design all K-4 Schools using standards of Elementary schools. Design all Middle
             Schools using standards of Junior High schools.
      7.2.10 All instructional areas will require 100% wireless network coverage. Allow for a cash
             allowance in the tender documents and provision for additional network outlets.
             Contact AES project manager for these costs and design.
Design Guidelines                                                                                  A7
Calgary Board of Education                                                Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                 Page 2 of 35


7.3            Interior Space Design – Renovations
      7.3.1    Renovations will require accurate and comprehensive documentation of all existing
               conditions by all disciplines. This is applicable to interior as well as exterior conditions.
               This work forms part of the scope of work of the consultant team.
      7.3.2    Interior space requirements inherent in this section may be waived in writing by the AES
               project manager as a response to existing facility conditions or budget constraint.
      7.3.3    The AES project manager will facilitate educational input to the project design through
               the design team consultative process.
      7.3.4    Major renovations will be expected to re-rationalize space to meet, as closely as
               possible, the current A.I. Area Guidelines. The facility design must incorporate the
               proper number of teaching spaces as defined in the program. Failure to do so will result
               in a complete redesign at the expense of the consultant.
      7.3.5    The consultant is responsible for ensuring that quality acoustics are provided in all
               interior spaces and that appropriate materials, which are subject to the limitations of the
               Construction Standards Section, are utilized to achieve this quality.
      7.3.6    CBE has an archive of existing building documentation and most renovations for each
               facility. Consultants can review these drawings in the AES archive.
      7.3.7    Building code upgrades are often required. Consultants are responsible for meeting with
               the City to determine acceptable solutions. AES project manager must be notified in
               writing of ruling.
      7.3.8    Special attention should be paid to possible asbestos and other hazardous materials that
               may be existing. The CBE will engage an environmental consultant upon written
               recommendation by the prime consultant.
      7.3.9    Renovations to ‘Sandstone’ or any other Architecturally Significant spaces should be
               sensitive to existing architecture. Details to match or suit existing conditions are strongly
               encouraged. For example millwork detailing of baseboards, blackboards and doorway
               detailing. Items can often be salvaged or restored.
      7.3.10   Patch and paint all existing surfaces to match existing paint.
      7.3.11   All new electrical conduit and mechanical piping must be painted. Painting will typically
               match existing.
      7.3.12   Special attention must be paid to existing systems access to existing mechanical
               systems must be maintained.
      7.3.13   All instructional areas will require 100% Wireless Network Coverage allow for a cash
               allowance in the tender documents. Contact AES project manager for these costs.

7.4            General Interior Finishes
      7.4.1    Colour schemes in new schools should avoid “trends” and use colours and
               textures that are likely to be “in style” for many years.
      7.4.2    Colour schemes in renovations should be compatible with existing colours and
               finishes.
      7.4.3    Reserved colour schemes which utilize behaviour subduing colours are preferred.
      7.4.4    All selections must be approved by the AES project manager.
      7.4.5    Provide venetian blinds to all exterior windows in the contract. Blinds are not to be
               included for interior glazing except where approved by AES project manager.
      7.4.6    Materials and finishes boards must be submitted for review prior to design
               development. Items are to be securely fastened to 8½” X 11” boards and placed in
               clear plastic three (3) whole punched sleeves. Provide a detailed listing of the
               materials on the back of each board complete with (c/w) notation identifying each
               item. Provide two (2) complete sets for CBE use unless requested otherwise.

7.5            Interior Space Requirements – Instructional Spaces
7.5.1          General Classroom Requirements – Elementary
Design:         Classrooms are general teaching spaces that must be designed to accommodate an
                average of 25 students per room.
Design Guidelines                                                                             A7
Calgary Board of Education                                           Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 3 of 35


              The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend 80m2 per classroom. Any reductions to this
              area must be pre-approved, in writing, by the AES project manager.
              The space must be flexible to allow furniture arrangements in many configurations. The
              location of electrical components must reflect this. A rectangular room is preferred.
              Classrooms may be “paired” for team teaching as a result of design team input. The
              pairing must incorporate a closure, as some kinds of these rooms must ultimately be
              able to function as stand-alone acoustically separated classrooms. A skyfold vertical
              door or sliding glass store front doors are preferred. An elementary classroom is
              expected to accommodate all the student boots and coats. Classroom entry doors
              must incorporate glazing either in the door or as a sidelight. Sinks should be provided
              in classrooms as deemed appropriate by the design team. Natural light in all
              classrooms is desirable. Windows must be provided to rooms with exterior exposure.
Flooring:     Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:        Classroom wall materials, especially the entry, should consider damage from wear and
              tear.
Ceilings:     3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred, 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum. AES project manager
              must approve dropping ceiling height.
Millwork:
Required:   Two (2) 1600mm (5’-4”) open shelving units, reference Detail ST-2.Coat storage with
            storage capacity of 32 coats, reference Detail ST-11.Sink, if required, in
            1600mm (5’-4”) counter with storage below, reference detail ST-4.
Optional:   One (1) drawer unit per two (2) classrooms, reference Detail ST-6.
            1600mm (5’-4”) lockable upper cabinets above sink unit, reference Detail ST-7.
Other:      Whiteboard 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”). Locate on minimum of one (1) wall.
            Tack board, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
            Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards and Smartboards.
Mechanical: Sinks shall not be provided with a drinking faucet / bubbler.
Data:       Two (2) 4-port outlets each classroom, including one (1) 4-port outlet beside the future
            integrated Smartboard and one (1) 4-port outlet elsewhere in the room which is suitable
            for four (4) computers. One (1) 2 port outlet mounted 200mm (8”) from ceiling to
            accommodate a potential wireless access point (NIC).
Power:      One (1) dedicated quad receptacle per 4-port data plus two (2) additional duplex
            receptacles distributed throughout the room. Four (4) dedicated circuits per room.
Lighting:   350 - 500 lux, fluorescent. Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing the
            Smartboard.
Telephone: One (1) mounted near the entry door.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Wall Closures: When pairing classrooms, preference is for a partial opening between rooms.
            Preferred closure is a sky fold vertical door, alternate closure sliding glass store front
            door with good acoustic seals.
NIC Equipment: Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector
            arm in between whiteboard and tackboard. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm h or
            66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.2        General Classroom Requirements - Junior / Senior High
Design:       Classrooms are general teaching spaces that must be designed to accommodate an
              average of 25 students per room.
              The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend 80m2 per classroom.
              The space must be flexible to allow furniture arrangements in many configurations. The
              location of electrical components must reflect this.
              Up to half of the classrooms may be “paired” for team teaching as a result of design
              team input. The pairing must incorporate a closure as some kinds of these rooms must
              ultimately be able to function as stand-alone classrooms.
              Classroom entry doors must incorporate glazing either in the door or as a sidelight.
              Sinks should be provided in classrooms as deemed appropriate by the design team.
              Exterior exposure is desirable but not mandatory. Windows must be provided to rooms
              with exterior exposure.
Design Guidelines                                                                           A7
Calgary Board of Education                                         Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 4 of 35


Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Classroom wall materials, especially the entry, should consider damage from wear and
             tear.
Ceilings:    3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred, 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum. AES project manager
             must approve dropping ceiling height.
Millwork:
Required:   Two (2) 1600mm (5’-4”) open shelving units, reference Detail ST-2.
            Sink, if required, in 1600mm (5’-4”) counter with storage below, reference Detail ST-5.
Optional:   1600mm (5’-4”) lockable upper cabinets above sink unit, reference Detail ST-7.
Other:      Whiteboard 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”) units. Locate on maximum of two (2)
            walls. Reference Section 10100 whiteboards & tackboards for mounting heights.
            Tackboard, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
            Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards and Smartboards.
Mechanical: Provide sinks in Middle schools only if deemed appropriate by design team.
Data:       Two (2) 4-port outlets each classroom, including one (1) 4-port outlet beside the future
            integrated Smartboard and one (1) 4-port outlet elsewhere in the room which is suitable
            for four (4) computers. One (1) 2-port outlet mounted 200mm (8”) from ceiling to
            accommodate a potential wireless access point (NIC).
Power:      One (1) dedicated quad receptacle per 4-port data plus two (2) additional duplex
            receptacles distributed throughout the room. Four (4) dedicated circuits per room.
Lighting:   350 - 500 lux, fluorescent. Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing the
            Smartboard.
Telephone: One (1) mounted near the entry door.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Wall Closures: Interconnecting doors with glazing or sidelights to be used where openings between
            classrooms is provided. Preferred closure is a sky fold vertical door, alternate closure
            sliding glass store front door with good acoustic seals.
NIC Equipment: Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector
            arm in between whiteboard and tackboard. Size of Smart board: 166cm w X 126cm h
            or 66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.2.1     General Breakout Space Requirements
Design:   Breakout spaces are smaller rooms adjacent to teaching spaces that must be designed
          to accommodate 4 to 6 students at a small table.
          Breakout spaces must be accessible from the corridor and all adjacent teaching
          spaces.
          Provide sufficient windows to ensure monitoring of the breakout space from the
          classrooms and corridor to maintain supervision of the students working in the
          breakout spaces.
          Space must be obtained from other areas within the school. Any reductions to any area
          to create breakout spaces must be reviewed with the AES project manager.
          The space must be flexible to allow a variety of furniture arrangements and
          configurations. The location of electrical components must reflect this.
Flooring: Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:    Breakout space wall materials, especially the corridor entry, should consider damage
          from wear and tear.
Ceilings: 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Other:    Whiteboard 1220mm X 1220mm (4’-0” X 4’-0”). Reference Section 10100
          Whiteboards & Tackboards for mounting heights. Supply backing for tackboards and
          whiteboards.
Data:     Two (2) 2-port outlets distributed throughout the room.
Power:    One (1) duplex receptacle per 2-port data plus one (1) additional duplex receptacle
          distributed throughout the room. One (1) dedicated circuits per room.
Lighting: 350 - 500 lux, fluorescent.
NIC Equipment: N/A
Design Guidelines                                                                             A7
Calgary Board of Education                                           Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 5 of 35


7.5.3        Science Room - Elementary
Design:    Elementary level science rooms are general teaching spaces.
           The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend 95m2 per elementary science room, including
           storage; however, only standard classroom size is required.
NIC Equipment: Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector
           arm in between whiteboard and tackboard. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm h
           or 66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.4       Science Room - Junior High
Design:       Science classrooms are multi-disciplinary science teaching spaces that must be
              designed to accommodate a minimum of 25 students per room.
              The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend 120m2 per Junior High science room, including
              storage. Any reductions to this area must be pre-approved, in writing, by the AES
              project manager.
              The storage area from several science rooms may be pooled to create a common
              storage or preparation room. Reference Section 7.5.6 below for more information on
              preparation rooms.
              The space must be flexible to allow furniture arrangements in alternate configurations.
              The location of electrical components must reflect this.
              Classroom entry doors must incorporate glazing either in the door or as a sidelight.
              Exterior exposure is desirable but not mandatory. Windows must be provided to
              rooms with exterior exposure.
              Acid and flammable storage cabinets are required in all science suites and could be
              located in a science room if preparation room is not provided.
Flooring:     Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:        Classroom wall materials, especially the entry, should consider damage from wear and
              tear.
Ceilings:     3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred. 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum. AES project manager
              must pre-approve 9’ ceilings.
Millwork:
Required:   Consider chemical and heat resistance in selection of work surface material.
            Provide upper cabinets to perimeter walls, at least half should be lockable.
            Provide 4 – 6 sinks (depending on layout) in counter, reference Details ST-4 & ST-7.
            Provide 32 student workstations c/w one (1) duplex power receptacle on a dedicated
            circuit per four (4) students and storage below. Coordinate with the design team as to
            how power will be provided at portable workstations.
Optional:   Demonstration table c/w sink, one (1) duplex receptacle on a dedicated circuit, one (1)
            2-port data outlet and storage. Gas to be provided to at least one (1) location within the
            room and may be considered in multiple locations. Moveable demonstration table
            without sink or gas, but with power may be preferred.
Other:      Whiteboard 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”) units. Locate on maximum of two (2)
            walls.
            Tackboard, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
            Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards and Smartboards.
Mechanical: Stainless steel sinks c/w gooseneck faucets. Cup sinks are not acceptable.
            Eye wash station to be provided at sink near front of room.
            Gas service turret to instructor’s station only (single location): Provide a manual shut
            off valve in a lockable cabinet, ideally located beneath the instructor’s demonstration
            station.
            Gas service turret to student stations (multiple locations): Provide solenoid valve and
            manual shutoff valve installed within a lockable under counter cabinet. Also provide
            remote emergency pushbutton and key switch near instructor’s demonstration station at
            1400mm above floor level connected to new solenoid valve. Solenoid valve is supplied
            by mechanical and installed by electrical. Reference Drawings M-4 & E-4.
Data:       Two (2) 4-port outlets distributed throughout the room including one (1) 4-port outlet
            beside the future integrated Smartboard and one (1) 4-port outlet elsewhere in the room
Design Guidelines                                                                           A7
Calgary Board of Education                                         Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 6 of 35


            which is suitable for four (4) computers. One (1) 2-port data outlet mounted 200mm (8”)
            from the ceiling to accommodate a potential wireless access point (NIC).
Power:      In addition to receptacles identified above, provide the following:
            One (1) duplex receptacle to support additional 2-port data at front of room. One (1)
            dedicated quad receptacle per 4-port data plus two (2) additional duplex receptacles
            distributed throughout the room.
Lighting:   500 lux, ambient fluorescent. Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing the
            Smartboards
Telephone: One (1) mounted near the entry door.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Fire Alarm: Provide heat detector(s), if there is no sprinkler system.
Equipment In Contract: One (1) emergency eye wash fountain equal to Haws 7611 countertop,
            swing forward to activate type. Supplied with tempered water only. Provide
            thermostatic mixing valve.
NIC Equipment: Up to16 electric hot plates, 750 – 1500 Watt each.
            Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector arm
            in between whiteboard and tackboard. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm h or
            66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.5       Science Room - Senior High
Design:      Senior High science classrooms can be multi-disciplinary science teaching spaces or
             curriculum specific and must be designed to accommodate a minimum of 25 students
             per room. Ultimate direction will be provided by the design team.
             The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend 120m2 per Senior High science room, including
             storage. Any reductions to this area must be pre-approved, in writing, by the AES
             project manager.
             The storage area from several science rooms may be pooled to create a common
             storage or preparation room. Reference Section 7.5.6 below for more information on
             preparation rooms.
             The space must be flexible to allow furniture arrangements in alternate configurations.
             The location of electrical components must reflect this.
             Classroom entry doors must incorporate glazing either in the door or as a sidelight.
             Exterior exposure is desirable but not mandatory. Windows must be provided to
             rooms with exterior exposure.
             Acid and flammable storage cabinets are required in all science suites and could be
             located in a science room if preparation room is not provided.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Classroom wall materials, especially the entry, should consider damage from wear and
             tear.
Ceilings:    3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred. 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Required:    Consider chemical and heat resistance in selection of work surface material.
             Provide upper cabinets, reference Detail ST-7 to perimeter walls, up to half should be
             lockable.
             Provide 4 – 6 sinks (depending on layout) in counter, reference Detail ST-4.
             Provide 32 student workstations c/w one (1) duplex power receptacle on a dedicated
             circuit per four (4) students and storage below. Coordinate with CBE design team as to
             how power will be provided at portable workstation.
Optional:    Demonstration table c/w sink, one (1) duplex receptacle on a dedicated circuit, one (1)
             2-port data outlet and storage. Gas to be provided at one (1) location or multiple
             locations within the room as designated by the design team. Moveable demonstration
             table without sink or gas, but with power may be preferred.
Other:       Whiteboard 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”) units. Locate on maximum of two (2)
             walls.
             Tack board, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
             Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards and Smartboards.
Design Guidelines                                                                             A7
Calgary Board of Education                                           Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 7 of 35


Mechanical: Stainless steel sinks c/w gooseneck faucets. Cup sinks are not acceptable.
            Gas turrets, provide in labs designated by the design team.
            Fume hoods, provide as designated by the design team. Reference B3, Mechanical
            Section 15561 Fume Hoods.
            Gas service to instructor’s station only (single location): provide a manual shut off valve
            in a lockable cabinet, ideally located beneath the Instructor’s demonstration station.
            Gas service to student stations (multiple locations): provide solenoid valve and manual
            shutoff valve installed within a lockable under counter cabinet. Also provide remote
            emergency pushbutton and key switch near instructor’s demonstration station at
            1400mm above floor level connected to new solenoid valve. Solenoid valve is supplied
            by mechanical and installed by electrical, reference Drawings M-4 & E-2.
Data:       In addition to outlets identified above, include one (1) 4-port outlet beside the future
            integrated Smartboard and one (1) 4–port outlet elsewhere in the room which is
            suitable for four (4) computers. One (1) 2-port outlet mounted 8” from ceiling to
            accommodate a potential Wireless Access Point (NIC).
Power:      In addition to receptacles identified above, one (1) duplex quad receptacle per 4-port
            data plus two (2) additional duplex receptacles distributed throughout the room.
            Provide power to support fume hood as required.
Lighting:   500 lux, ambient fluorescent. Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing the
            Smartboard.
Telephone: One (1) mounted near the entry door.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Fire Alarm: Provide heat detectors, if there is no sprinkler system.
Equipment In Contract: One (1) emergency eye wash fountain equal to Haws 7611 countertop,
            swing forward to activate type. Supplied with tempered water only. Provide
            thermostatic mixing valve.
            Fume hood (as required for chemistry classrooms or preparation rooms).
            Major chemistry labs to have a shower in addition to faucet eye wash. Shower station to
            be complete with sloped floor and drain.
NIC Equipment: Up to16 electric hot plates, 750 – 1500 Watt each.
            LCD projector.
            Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector arm
            in between whiteboard and tackboard. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm h or
            66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.6        Science Preparation Room(s) – Junior / Senior High
Design:       Science preparation rooms should be adjacent and easily accessible to the science
              rooms.
              Large high schools may employ a staff member who will require workspace in the
              science preparation room.
              Ultimate direction will be provided by the design team.
Flooring:     Sheet goods preferred.
Ceilings:     3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred. 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Required:   Provide storage base cabinets as directed and consider chemical and heat resistance
            in selection of work surface material.
            Provide upper cabinets over base cabinets, reference Detail ST-7.
            Provide 1 - 2 sinks (depending on layout) in counter, reference Detail ST-4.
Other:      Whiteboard 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”) units. Locate on maximum of two (2)
            walls.
            Tack board, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
Mechanical: Provide exhaust air as per code.
            Provide ducted exhaust from special storage cabinets and fume hoods.
            Stainless steel sinks c/w gooseneck faucets. Cup sinks are not acceptable.
            Provide plumbing to support dishwasher.
Data:       One (1) 2-port outlet at designated staff workspace.
Design Guidelines                                                                           A7
Calgary Board of Education                                         Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 8 of 35


Power:      One (1) duplex receptacle per wall, including support of data.
           Provide power to support fume hood, refrigerator(s) and dishwasher.
Lighting:   500 lux, fluorescent.
Telephone: One (1) mounted at staff workspace.
Equipment In Contract: One (1) emergency eye wash fountain equal to Haws 7611 countertop,
            swing forward to activate type. Supplied with tempered water only. Provide
            thermostatic mixing valve.
            High heat residential dishwasher.
            Fume hood, as directed by design team. Reference B3, Mechanical Section 15561
            Fume Hoods.
            Acid and flammable storage cabinets are required in all science suites and would be
            located in preparation rooms, preferred. Provide proper ventilation, as required,
            reference B3, Mechanical Section 15820 Fans.
NIC Equipment: Carts for chemical distribution.

7.5.7        Ancillary Room – Elementary
Design:    Elementary level ancillary spaces are generally larger than general classrooms;
           however, they will be required to be used as general teaching spaces in high capacity
           schools.
           The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend 130m2 for the first and fifth ancillary rooms, and
           90m2 for all remaining ancillary rooms. These areas include storage for the function.
           Actual areas will be determined during the design team process.
           Elementary level ancillary spaces may be designed as music or art; however, all
           aspects of general classrooms must also be provided. Permanent fixtures, design or
           layout that would impede the use of these rooms as general classrooms will not be
           permitted.
NIC Equipment: Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector
           arm in between whiteboard and tackboard. Size of smart board: 166cm w X 126cm h
           or 66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.8        Ancillary Room – Junior / Senior High
General:   Junior / Senior High level ancillary spaces are generally larger than general
           classrooms; however, they are considered teaching spaces for capacity calculations.
           The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend 130m2 for the first and fifth ancillary rooms, and
           90m2 for all remaining ancillary rooms.
           These areas include storage for the function.
           The determination of the types of ancillary spaces provided for the facility will be
           determined prior to design start by CBE administration or in consultation with the design
           team.
           The space must be flexible to allow furniture arrangements in many configurations. The
           location of electrical components must reflect this.
           Classroom entry doors must incorporate glazing either in the door or as a sidelight.
Equipment NIC: Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector
           arm in between whiteboard and tack board. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm h
           or 66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.8.1      Drama or Dance – Junior High
Design:      Junior High drama spaces are generally open; flexible spaces that offer a wide range of
             “drama or dance” as well as “technical theatre” programs.
             This space may afford an opportunity for small performances.
             Storage for this space may be a room or a series of millwork. Any separate rooms are
             calculated as part of the total area for this ancillary space.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Classroom wall materials, especially the entry, should consider damage from wear and
             tear.
Ceilings:    3660mm (12’-0”) high, preferred, 3050 (10’-0”) minimum.
Design Guidelines                                                                            A7
Calgary Board of Education                                          Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 9 of 35


Millwork:
Required:   Costume, prop storage, dressing room table w/ lights / mirrors as defined by the
            educational specialist and approved as part of the budget by the AES project manager.
Optional:   Consider the installation of mirrors and dance bars so that the space could also be
            used to support a dance program.
Other:      Whiteboard 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”) unit. The location of the whiteboard
            signifies the “front” of the room.
            Tack board, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
            Provide pipe grid for lighting as required. Contact AES project manager for specific
            requirement.
            Drama cyclorama curtain and track.
Data:       Two (2) 4-port outlets distributed throughout the room. Provide box rough in for wiring
            for LCD projector in the centre of the ceiling space.
Power:      One (1) dedicated quad receptacle per 4-port data plus two (2) additional duplex
            receptacles distributed throughout the room. Provide one (1) dedicated duplex
            receptacle for ceiling-mounted LCD projector (NIC).
            Provide one (1) duplex receptacle for dressing room table and power for dressing room
            table lighting.
            Provide double duplex receptacles on four (4) circuits for future dimmer panel,
            reference Drawing E-L1. Coordinate location of the power for the dimmer control panel
            (NIC) with the design team.
Lighting:   350 - 500 lux, fluorescent. Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing the
            Smartboard.
Drama Lighting: Rough-in conduit from junction boxes to ceiling, reference Drawing E-L1 for future
            drama lighting system.
Telephone: One (1) mounted at the door entry.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Equipment NIC: Drama Lighting System and Dimming Control.
            Sound system.
            LCD projector.
            Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector arm
            in between whiteboard and tackboard. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm h or
            66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.8.2      Drama – Senior High
Design:      Drama spaces are generally open; flexible spaces that offer a wide range of “drama or
             dance” as well as “technical theatre” programs.
             This space may afford an opportunity for small performances through the installation of
             a seating area and stage; consider the use of retractable seating for flexibility.
             If the space is laid out for performances, then the following spaces will be required as
             part of the total area for this ancillary space:
              Back of house / Prop area / Tech shop;
              Change rooms, washrooms, makeup areas for performers during performances;
              Sound / light control room; and
              Catwalk.
             Storage for this space may be a room or a series of millwork items. Any separate
             rooms are calculated as part of the total area for this ancillary space.
Flooring:    Consideration should be given to a sprung floor system sheeted in a material such as
             masonite if a dance program is an integral part of the planned curriculum. Dark or black
             in colour.
Walls:       Concrete block walls are preferred, dark or black in colour.
             Classroom wall materials, especially the entry, should consider damage from wear and
             tear.
             Provide operable (sliding) windows from control room to drama performance area, for
             sound and lighting control.
Ceilings:    5450mm (18’-0”) high minimum.
Design Guidelines                                                                            A7
Calgary Board of Education                                          Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 10 of 35


Millwork:
Required:   Costume and prop storage as defined by the educational specialist and approved as
            part of the budget by the AES project manager.
            Makeup tables and mirrors as required by change room layout.
            Counter in control room for lighting and sound control boards.
Optional:   Consider the installation of mirrors and dance bars so that the space could also be
            used to support a dance program.
Other:      Whiteboards 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”), optional.
            Supply backing for whiteboards and Smarboards are required.
            Provide pipe grid for lighting as required.
            Stage proscenium and cyclorama curtain and tracks.
Data:       Two (2) 4-port outlets distributed throughout the room including one (1) 4-port outlet
            beside the future integrated Smartboards and one (1) 4-port outlet elsewhere in the
            room which is suitable for four (4) computers. One (1) 2-port outlet mounted
            appropriately to accommodate a potential Wireless Access Point (NIC).
Power:      One (1) dedicated quad receptacle per 4-port data plus two (2) additional duplex
            receptacles distributed throughout the room. Provide one (1) dedicated duplex
            receptacle for dressing room table and power for dressing room table lighting.
            Provide double duplex on four (4) circuits for future dimmer panel, reference Drawing
            E-L1.
Electrical: Specific design requirements appropriate to the level of design required will be provided
            by AES project manager.
Lighting:   350 - 500 lux, fluorescent, (do not include house lights in the luminance calculation).
            Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing the Smartboard.
            200 lux, dimmable (100 -1%) incandescent pot house lights, 3000 K., incandescent
            back stage blue lights.
            Provisions for dimming system will be required. Minimum 96 fixed dimmers. Provide
            electrical infrastructure for future equipment.
Telephone: One (1) mounted at the door entry.
PA:         One (1) or more (depending on space size) loudspeakers mounted appropriately.
Fire Alarm: Multitone / strobe mounted within room.
Sound:      Electrical infrastructure for surround sound system.
Equipment In Contract: Theatre seating system, including retractable platforms (if applicable) and
            basic theatre seats. Floors under the theatre seating system to be level and solid with
            no defections.
Equipment NIC: Theatre lighting system (i.e. ellipsoidal, fresnel luminaries, etc.) and dimming
            controls.
            Surround sound system.
            Provide space at a location to be confirmed by the design team for a Smartboard c/w
            integrated LCD projector arm. Size of smart board: 166cm w X 126cm h or 66”w X
            50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.8.3      Music Room – Junior / Senior High
Design:      This room may be required to accommodate the band as well as the choral program,
             and therefore must be flexible in layout.
             Special attention must be paid to the design of these spaces. Acoustic considerations
             must be made, both within room and between adjoining rooms. Configuration and
             shape of the room and material selection are important factors.
             The following spaces may be required as part of the total area for this ancillary space:
              Packaged practice rooms, provide space for a minimum of two (2) “rooms”;
              Instrument storage, designed to receive standard packaged units;
              A staff office area may be required and will be confirmed by the educational
                curriculum specialist; and
              Music scores storage room / area.
             All separate rooms must have glazing in the door and / or wall.
             Entry to the space to be provided with a double door complete with sound seals.
Design Guidelines                                                                              A7
Calgary Board of Education                                            Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 11 of 35


              Provide a double, exterior door, with loading access, for the transfer of large band
              instruments and pianos.
              Consultant to provide an acoustic review of the space, including all interior finishes, to
              confirm sufficient levels within the space and between spaces are achieved as per A.I.
              Area Guidelines.
Flooring:     Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:        Concrete block walls are preferred.
              Classroom wall materials, especially the entry, should consider damage from wear and
              tear.
              Acoustic wall panels as required to ensure acoustic quality of space.
Ceilings:     3660mm (12’-0”) high minimum, acoustic materials recommended.
Millwork:
Required:   Counter with sink similar to Detail ST-4, but with large sink, coordinate with mechanical.
Other:      Whiteboards 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”), the location of the whiteboard signifies
            the “front” of the room.
            Tack board, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
            Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards and Smartboards as required.
Mechanical: Air throws from grilles and diffusers to be directed away from student playing area.
            Noise levels to be kept below NC25.
            Minimum 300mm deep X 1500mm wide sink c/w two (2) gooseneck faucet trims to
            allow for two (2) simultaneous users.
Data:       Two (2) 4-port outlets distributed throughout the student playing area including one (1)
            4-port outlet elsewhere in the room which is suitable for four (4) computers.
            One (1) 2-port outlet in the office (when applicable).
            One (1) 2-port outlet mounted appropriately to accommodate a potential Wireless
            Access Point (NIC).
            One (1) 2-port outlet in each practice room and the office, if applicable.
Power:      One (1) dedicated quad receptacle per 4-port data plus two (2) additional duplex
            receptacles distributed throughout the room.
            A total of eight (8) duplex receptacles distributed on the walls of the student playing
            area, including the supporting power for the data.
            Provide power for packaged practice rooms.
            Provide one (1) duplex receptacle in the office.
Lighting:   600 - 700 lux, fluorescent. Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing the
            Smartboard.
Telephone: One (1) mounted at near the door entry.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker or more (depending on space size) mounted appropriately.
Fire Alarm: Mulitone / strobe mounted within room.
Equipment in Contract: One (1) packaged practice room.
Equipment NIC: Relocatable choir or band risers.
            LCD projector.
            Provide space at a location to be determined by the design team in the room for a
            Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector arm. Size of smart board: 166cm w X 126cm
            h or 66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.8.4       Fine Art Room – Junior / Senior High
Design:       The space must be flexible to allow furniture arrangements in alternate configurations.
              The location of electrical components must reflect this.
              The following spaces may be required as part of the total area for this ancillary space:
               Kiln area / room, to house number of kilns identified by design team;
               General storage; and
               Student storage may be a room or millwork item.
              All separate spaces must have glazing in the door and / or wall.
Flooring:     Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:        Classroom wall materials, especially the entry, should consider damage from wear and
              tear.
Design Guidelines                                                                               A7
Calgary Board of Education                                             Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                             Page 12 of 35


Ceilings:     3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred. 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Required:   Art shelving to accommodate paper and storage. Detail as approved by AES project
            manager.
            Open shelving in kiln area.
            Stainless steel art sink in counter, reference Detail ST-5. Adjust millwork to suit sink,
            coordinate with mechanical.
Optional:   One (1) art drawer unit, reference Detail ST-6.
            Enclosed, lockable, display area, preferably in a corridor or public space.
Other:      Whiteboard 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”). Locate on minimum of one (1) wall.
            Tack board, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
            Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards and Smartboards as required.
Mechanical: Stainless steel sink c/w clay trap.
            Provide exhaust hood and fan for kiln if not located in a separate ventilated room, as
            part of contract.
            Provide required ventilation for silk screening, if identified as a program item.
Data:       Two (2) 4-port outlets distributed throughout the room including one (1) 4-port outlet
            beside the future integrated Smartboard and one (1) 4-port outlet elsewhere in the room
            which is suitable for four (4) computers.
            One (1) 2-port outlet mounted 200mm (8”) from ceiling to accommodate a potential
            Wireless Access Point (NIC).
Power:      One (1) dedicated quad receptacle per 4-port data plus four (4) additional duplex
            receptacles on two dedicated circuits distributed throughout the room. One (1)
            dedicated duplex receptacle for ceiling mounted LCD projector (NIC).
            Power to support kiln(s) and ventilation equipment.
Lighting:   500 lux, direct / indirect, preferred. Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing
            the Smartboard.
Telephone: One (1) mounted near the entry door.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Fire Alarm: Provide a 58C fixed temperature thermal detector on the ceiling near the kiln if the
            room is not sprinklered.
Equipment NIC: Kiln, Skutt (Model KM-1027-3) 208V, single phase 48A 9980 Watts.
            Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector arm
            in between whiteboard and tack board. Size of smart board: 166cm w X 126cm h or
            66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.9        Gymnasium – Elementary
Design:       The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend the following sizes for Elementary school
              gymnasium / physical activity rooms. In addition to this area, an additional 10% of the
              space size is recommended for gymnasium storage:
                              School Capacity        Recommended Area
                              0 - 150 students                150 m²
                             151-300 students                 250 m²
                             301-625 students                 430 m²
                             626-940 students                 595 m²
              If a stage is required in the facility, the space for this must be deducted from the overall
              available gymnasium / physical activity space or be part of school “flexible space”,
              reference Section 7.6.1. When the stage is “flexible space”, it should be located and
              designed to accommodate multiple uses such as lunch room, congregation, etc.
              Reference Section 7.5.11 for additional stage requirements.
              Locate the gymnasium to encourage after hours community use. After hours use must
              be possible while the rest of the facility is secured.
              Acoustical considerations must be made to ensure the quality of the space.
              All doors shall swing outward except for storage room doors.
              Any exits below grade must be enclosed.
Flooring:     Sprung hardwood strip flooring, DIN rating 18032.
Design Guidelines                                                                               A7
Calgary Board of Education                                             Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                             Page 13 of 35


             Composite flooring may be considered as an alternate, DIN rating 18032.
Floor Inserts: Volleyball and badminton, reference gymnasium floor drawing A-5.
Walls:       Concrete block preferred, only durable finishes and materials will be accepted.
Acoustics: Acoustical considerations are required.
             Acoustic block above 2400mm height preferred.
             Acoustic wall panel and acoustic deck may be required, as recommended by an
             acoustic consultant.
Ceilings:    Prefer 5400mm (18’-0”) high minimum.
             Suspended ceilings not acceptable.
Other:       Whiteboards 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”) without pen tray.
             Provide divider curtains for gymnasiums over 250m2.
Mechanical: Air conditioning and humidification not permitted.
             Make up air unit should be dedicated to provide full ventilation for assembly conditions
             c/w an over–ride switch.
             All exposed ducts to be round and located between joists.
             Provide ceiling fans in gymnasiums c/w guards and safety suspension hooks.
Data:        Two (2) 2-port recessed outlets located on opposite walls and in middle of each
             partitionable space of the gymnasium, for multimedia presentations.
             One (1) 2-port outlet mounted appropriately to accommodate a potential Wireless
             Access Point (NIC). Include a protective grille to cover both the equipment and the data
             port.
Power:       Provide duplex receptacles for support of data outlets connected to two (2) dedicated
             circuits, including power support of data outlets.
             Power for gymnasium sound system.
             Power for projection screen.
             Power for the ceiling mounted fans.
             Do not provide power for scoreboard or shot clock.
Lighting:    350 lux T5HO or T8 bi-level light switching; 60% down-light / 40% up-light. Provide for
             switching of lights for ease of viewing the projection screen.
             Dimmer panel: Electrical services for future dimmer panel and controls. Locate here if
             there is no stage.
Telephone: Not required.
PA:          PA loudspeakers suitable for the gym (associated with school general PA system).
             Gymnasium sound system: rough-in (conduit) for provision for separate sound system
             in gymnasium and stage.
Fire Alarm: Multitone / strobe on each side of divider wall (if present). All signalling and initiating
             devices to be protected from impact with applicable guards. Rate of rise thermal
             detectors in all storage areas including under stage storage if building is not sprinklered.
Electrical: All exit lights, emergency lighting remote heads and clocks shall have wire guards.
             Below 2100mm from floor, all electrical switches and other devices must be recessed
             into wall.
Gymnasium Storage: When a raised stage area is provided, provide under stage storage trucks
             to accommodate 600 steel folding chairs and ten (10) folding banquet tables (2438mm
             long), 20 mats (1219mm X 1829mm). Reference Drawings A-1 & A-2 for storage and
             reference Drawings ST-13, ST-14, ST-15 & ST-16 for millwork.
Equipment in Contract: Gymnasium divider: vertical style, fabric to be vinyl coated matte finish.
             Basketball backstops, one (1) main court and 2 (two) cross courts on either side of
             divider curtain. Adjustable height basketball backstop preferred.
Equipment NIC: 3050mm high X 290mm wide clear wall space for two (2) climbers.
             Sound system in gymnasium and / or stage.
             Projection screen.

7.5.9.1       Elementary Dressing Area
Design:       The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend sizes for Elementary school dressing areas.
              The provision of dressing rooms in CBE Elementary schools is discretionary and will be
              determined by the design team.
Design Guidelines                                                                               A7
Calgary Board of Education                                             Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                             Page 14 of 35


7.5.9.2       Elementary School Physical Education Staff Office / Change Area
Design:     The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend 10m2 for schools with less than 625 students in
            capacity, and 20m2 for larger schools.
            Locate the physical education staff office / change rooms adjacent and accessible to
            main gymnasium for supervision.
            At least 1 (one) shower is required in all schools for assisted needs students, reference
            Section 7.6.6.2. The physical education office shower can be utilized for this purpose.
Flooring:   Dry Areas: sheet goods preferred.
            Wet Areas: sheet flooring appropriate for wet applications.
            Showers to be Barrier Free Accessible.
            Provide sufficient floor drains.
Walls:      Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
            Provide ceramic tiles, only as required by the Health Code, in wet areas.
Ceilings:   Painted gypsum board.
Mechanical: Exhaust to be provided.
Lighting:   200 lux, fluorescent.
Data:       One (1) 2-port outlet.
Power:      Two (2)) duplex receptacles appropriately located, connected to a common dedicated
            circuit.
            Power for the exhaust fan.
Telephone: One (1) desk-mounted.
Equipment in Contract: Provide minimum two (2) single tier lockers for staff use.

7.5.10        Gymnasium – Junior / Senior High
Design:       The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend the following sizes for Junior / Senior High school
              gymnasium / physical activity rooms. In addition to this area, an additional 10% of the
              space size is recommended for gymnasium storage:
                              School Capacity        Recommended Area
                              0 - 150 students                250 m²
                             151-300 students                 430 m²
                             301-625 students                 595 m²
                             626-940 students                 815 m²
                           941-1250 students                 1060 m²
             The recommended area identified above is total physical activity space. The first priority
             is to create a full size, adult basketball court; this is referred to as the main gymnasium
             space. To meet this priority additional space may be added to this main gymnasium or
             space may be divided appropriately into a variety of spaces including, but not limited to
             ancillary gymnasium, wrestling, weight training, aerobics, etc.
             If a stage is required in the facility, the space for this must be deducted from the overall
             available gymnasium / physical activity space or be part of school “flexible space”,
             reference Section 7.6.1. When the stage is “flexible space”, it should be located and
             designed to accommodate multiple uses such as lunch room, congregation, etc.
             Reference Section 7.5.11 for additional stage requirements.
             Locate the gymnasium to encourage after hours community use. After hours use must
             be possible while the rest of the facility is secured.
             Acoustical considerations must be made to ensure the quality of the space.
             All doors shall swing outward except for storage room doors.
             Any exits below grade must be enclosed.
Flooring:    Sprung hardwood strip flooring DIN rating 18032-2.
Floor Inserts: Volleyball and badminton, reference gymnasium floor drawing A-5.
Walls:       Concrete block preferred, only durable finishes and materials will be accepted.
Acoustics: Acoustical considerations are required.
             Acoustic block above 2400mm height preferred.
             Acoustic wall panel and acoustic deck may be required, as recommended by an
             acoustic consultant.
Design Guidelines                                                                              A7
Calgary Board of Education                                            Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 15 of 35


Ceilings:   6100mm (20’-0”) high minimum to underside of structure.
            Suspended ceilings not acceptable.
Other:      Whiteboards 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”) without pen tray.
            Provide divider curtains for gymnasiums over 250m2.
Mechanical: Air conditioning and humidification not permitted.
            Make up air unit should be dedicated to provide full ventilation for assembly conditions
            c/w an over-ride switch.
            All exposed ducts to be round and located between joists.
Data:       Two (2) 2-port recessed outlets located on opposite walls and in middle of each
            partitionable space of the gymnasium, for multimedia presentations.
            One (1) 2-port outlet mounted appropriately to accommodate a potential Wireless
            Access Point (NIC). Include a protective grille to cover both the equipment and the data
            port.
Power:      Provide duplex receptacles for support connected to two (2) dedicated circuits
            Power for gymnasium sound system.
            Power for projection screen.
            Power for scoreboard and shot clock (equipment NIC).
Lighting:   350 lux, T5HO bi-level light switching; 60% down-light / 40% up-light.
            Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing the projection screen.
            Dimmer panel: Electrical services for future dimmer panel and controls. Locate here if
            there is no stage (reference Details for stage).
Telephone: Not required.
PA:         PA loudspeakers suitable for a gym (associated with school general PA system).
            Gymnasium sound system; rough-in (conduit) for provision for separate sound system
            in gymnasium and stage.
Fire Alarm: Multitone / strobe on each side of divider wall (if present). All signalling and initiating
            devices to be protected from impact with applicable guards.
            Rate of rise thermal detectors in all storage areas including under stage storage is
            space is not sprinklered.
Electrical: All exit lights, emergency lighting remote heads and clocks shall have wire guards.
            Below 2100mm from floor, all electrical switches and other devices must be recessed
            into wall.
Gymnasium Storage: When a raised stage area exists, provide under stage storage trucks to
            accommodate 600 steel folding chairs and ten (10) folding banquet tables (2438mm
            long), 20 mats (1219mm X 1829mm). Reference Drawings A-1 & A-2, ST-13, ST-14,
            ST-15, & ST-16 for typical millwork and storage hooks, and reference Drawings ST-13,
            ST-14, ST-15 & ST-16 for millwork.
Equipment in Contract: Gymnasium divider: vertical style, fabric to be vinyl coated matte finish.
            Basketball backstops to adjustable height type, one (1) main court and 2 (two) cross
            courts on either side of divider curtain.
Equipment NIC: Score boards for Junior / Senior High.
            Shot clock for Junior / Senior High.
            Sound system in gymnasium and / or stage.
            Projection screen.

7.5.10.1      Junior / Senior High Dressing / Shower Area
Design:       Locate the dressing rooms so that they are accessible from main gymnasium,
              preferred to be immediately adjacent to gymnasium.
              Dressing / shower areas should be designed to allow clear supervision, and not
              provide any “Hidden Areas”.
              Junior High Dressing Areas
              The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend the following sizes for Junior High dressing areas:
Design Guidelines                                                                            A7
Calgary Board of Education                                          Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 16 of 35


                            School Capacity          Recommended Area
                            0 - 300 students               90 m²
                           301-625 students               110 m²
                           626-940 students               130 m²
                          941-1250 students               170 m²
            Typically, the CBE does not provide showers in Middle / Junior High schools.
            Senior High Dressing / Shower Areas
            The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend the following sizes for Senior High dressing /
            shower areas:
                               School Capacity         Recommended Area
                                0 - 300 students                 100 m²
                               301-625 students                  125 m²
                             626 - 940 students                  150 m²
                            941 - 1250 students                  200 m²
                          1251 - 1575 students                   250 m²
            In addition to the general Senior High dressing / shower areas, team areas are
            required. These change rooms can be separate portions of the general change areas
            or separate and distinct rooms.
Flooring:   Dry areas: sheet goods preferred.
            Wet areas: quarry / porcelain tile (non-slip) c/w coved tile base to match or sheet
            flooring appropriate for wet applications.
            Showers to be Barrier Free Accessible.
            Provide sufficient floor drains.
Walls:      Concrete block preferred, only durable finishes and materials will be accepted.
            Provide ceramic tiles as required by the Health Code in wet area.
Ceilings:   Painted gypsum board.
Mechanical: All exposed ducts to be round and located between joists.
            Exhaust to be provided.
Lighting:   200 lux, fluorescent.
            All lights are to be in wire cages.
            Lights are to be key switched.
            Emergency lighting fixtures as required.
Telephone: Not required.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Fire Alarm: One (1) rate-of-rise thermal detector with protective grill (if no sprinklers).
            One (1) combination multitone / strobe.
Equipment in Contract: Provide six (6) tier lockers, number as determined by design team, tote
            boxes are not acceptable.

7.5.10.2     Junior / Senior High Physical Education Staff Office / Change Area
Design:     The A.I. Area Guidelines vary depending on the size of the school. The AES project
            manager will provide direction in this regard.
            Locate the physical education staff office / change rooms adjacent and accessible to
            main gymnasium and student dressing rooms.
            Provide glazing from office space to allow supervision of gymnasium activities.
            At least 1 (one) shower is required in all schools for assisted needs students, reference
            Section 7.6.6.2. The physical education office shower can be utilized for this purpose.
Flooring:   Dry Areas: sheet goods preferred.
            Wet Areas: sheet flooring appropriate for wet applications.
            Showers to be Barrier Free Accessible.
            Provide sufficient floor drains.
Walls:      Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
            Provide ceramic tiles, as required by the Health Code, in wet area.
Ceilings:   Painted gypsum board.
Mechanical: Exhaust to be provided.
Design Guidelines                                                                            A7
Calgary Board of Education                                          Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 17 of 35


Lighting:   200 lux, fluorescent.
Data:       One (1) 2-port outlet per two (2) workstations.
Power:      One (1) duplex receptacle per wall connected to a common dedicated circuit.
            Two (2) duplex receptacles per four (4) workstations connected to a dedicated circuit.
Telephone: One (1) desk-mounted.
Equipment in Contract: Provide minimum four (4) single tier lockers for staff use.

7.5.11       Gymnasium Stage / Auxiliary Gymnasium Space – If Applicable
Design:     Locate the stage adjacent to the main gymnasium.
            Provide a flexible space that can be utilized for a number of activities in addition to a
            performance stage. Provide mirrors if space is used for dance or fitness.
            Acoustical considerations must be made to ensure the quality of the space.
            All doors shall swing outward except for storage room doors.
            Any exits below grade must be enclosed.
Flooring:   Sprung hardwood strip flooring DIN rating 18032.
            Composite flooring may be considered as an alternate, DIN rating 18032.
Walls:      Concrete block preferred, only durable finishes and materials will be accepted.
Wall Closures: Consider the use of commercial grade overhead doors to separate the stage /
            auxiliary space from the gymnasium.
Ceilings:   6100mm (20’-0”) high minimum.
            Suspended ceilings not acceptable.
Other:      Whiteboards 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”) without pen tray.
Mechanical: Make up air unit should be dedicated to provide full ventilation for assembly conditions
            c/w an over-ride switch.
            All exposed ducts to be round and located between joists.
Data:       Two (2) 2-port recessed outlets located at front and back of the space.
            One (1) 2-port outlet mounted appropriately to accommodate a potential Wireless
            Access Point (NIC). Include a protective grille to cover both the equipment and the data
            port.
Power:      Four (4) duplex receptacles, connected to two (2) dedicated circuits, including power
            support of data outlets.
            Power for gymnasium sound system.
            For Senior High schools, provide a 120 / 240V, 30A receptacle on the stage area. For
            Junior High and Elementary schools, Provide two (2) 120V, 15A receptacles on the
            stage area.
Lighting:   350 - 500 lux, fluorescent.
Telephone: One (1) mounted at front of the room.
PA:         PA loudspeakers (associated with school general PA system).
Gymnasium Sound System: Rough-in (conduit) for provision for future separate sound system in
            gymnasium and stage.
Electrical: All exit lights, emergency lighting remote heads and clocks shall have wire guards (if
            auxiliary gymnasium space).
            All electrical switches and other devices should be recessed (if auxiliary gymnasium
            space).
Equipment NIC: Gymnasium sound system.

7.5.12       Library – Elementary
Design:      The A.I. Area Guidelines vary depending on the size of the school. The AES project
             manager will provide direction in this regard.
             Library must be laid out to provide clear site lines from staff areas to all parts of the
             library. Hidden spaces must be properly resolved by designer.
             Provide natural light through windows or clerestory, north and / or east exposure
             preferred. When south exposure, mitigate heat gain and glare from windows.
             Accommodate all networked computer stations as established by the design team
             discussions.
Design Guidelines                                                                               A7
Calgary Board of Education                                             Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                             Page 18 of 35


              Open, flexible design of the library, staff work area and circulation desk is preferable to
              separate rooms / offices. Careful and clear design of the circulation desk and
              workspaces will negate the need for separate rooms.
              Acoustical considerations must be made to ensure the quality of the space.
              Staff resource area for professional materials is often required. This may be an integral
              part of the library or in a distinct space.
              Room entry doors must incorporate glazing either in the door or as a sidelight.
              AV storage: AV equipment is often stored in the library; consideration should be made
              to accommodate this need.
              File servers: file servers are often located centrally in or near the library; consideration
              should be made to accommodate this in a secure location.
Flooring:     Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:        Wall materials, especially at the entry, should consider damage from wear and tear.
              Acoustic wall panels as required to ensure acoustic quality of space.
Ceilings:     3660mm (12’-0”) high minimum, 4570mm (15’-0”) high preferred.
Millwork:
Required:   Circulation desk complete with book deposit and adequate staff work areas. Include
            layout space, sink and storage units.
            Book shelving, combination of wall and free-standing units, approximately 150m of
            linear shelving, reference Details ST-10 & ST-19. Maximum height of 1500mm.
            Alternate metal library shelving may be considered, coordinate with AES project
            manager.
            One (1) drawer unit, reference Detail ST-6.
Other:      Whiteboards, 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”).
            Tack board, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
            Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards and Smartboards as required.
Mechanical: Provide air circulation for high ceilings spaces (> 4570mm), e.g. casablanca fans.
            Noise level of ventilation system must not exceed NC 25.
            Provide sink at circulation desk.
Data:       Provide sufficient outlets at circulation desk to support number of workstations and
            peripherals; two (2) 2-port outlets at circulation desk; one (1) 2-port data outlet, as well
            as the future integrated Smartboard / projector.
            A total of 32 ports for a media centre.
            One (1) 2-port outlet for photocopier, if required.
            One (1) 2-port outlet mounted at an appropriate location to accommodate a potential
            Wireless Access Point (NIC).
Power:      General: four (4) duplex receptacles maximum, distributed throughout the room. One
            (1) dedicated power outlet on the wall close to the ceiling for future Smartboard /
            projector. Power to support the media centre, rule of thumb one (1) dedicated circuit for
            every four (4) computers.
            Data: one (1) duplex receptacle for each 2-port data outlet. One (1) dedicated circuit for
            every two (2) duplex receptacles.
            One (1) 20A T-slot duplex receptacle for the photocopier.
Lighting:   300 - 500 lux, general ambient, fluorescent. Provide separate switches for separate
            lighting areas. Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing the Smartboard.
Telephone: One (1) mounted at circulation desk.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Equipment NIC: Individual computer tables.
            Computers, network printer and scanners.
            Photocopier.
            Provide space at a location to be determined by the design team for Smartboard. Size
            of Smart board: 166cm w X 126cm h or 66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for
            further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.13        Library – Junior / Senior High
Design:       The A.I. Area Guidelines vary depending on the size of the School. The AES project
              manager will provide direction in this regard.
Design Guidelines                                                                               A7
Calgary Board of Education                                             Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                             Page 19 of 35


              Library must be laid out to provide clear site lines from staff areas to all parts of the
              library. Hidden spaces must be properly resolved.
              Provide natural light through windows or clerestory, north and / or east exposure
              preferred. When south exposure, mitigate heat gain and glare from windows.
              Open, flexible design of the library, staff work area and circulation desk is preferable to
              separate rooms / offices. Careful and clear design of the circulation desk and
              workspaces will negate the need for separate rooms.
              Accommodate all networked computer stations as established by the design team
              discussions.
              Acoustical considerations must be made to ensure the quality of the space.
              Staff resource area for professional materials is often required. This may be an integral
              part of the library or in a distinct space.
              Consideration should be made for the location of the library adjacent to the information
              technology spaces to create an “Information Commons”.
              Room entry doors must incorporate glazing either in the door or as a sidelight.
              AV Storage: AV equipment is often stored in the library; consideration should be made
              to accommodate this need.
              File Servers: file servers are often located centrally in or near the library; consideration
              should be made to accommodate this in a secure location.
Flooring:     Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:        Wall materials, especially at the entry, should consider damage from wear and tear.
              Acoustic wall panels as required to ensure acoustic quality of space.
Ceilings:     3660mm (12’-0”) high minimum, 4570mm (15’-0”) high preferred.
Millwork:
Required:   Circulation desk complete with book deposit and adequate staff work areas. Include
            layout space, sink and storage units.
            Book shelving, combination of wall and free-standing units, approximately 200m of
            linear shelving, reference Detail ST-10. Alternate metal library shelving may be
            considered, coordinate with AES Project Manager.
Other:      Whiteboards, 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”).
            Tack board, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
            Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards and Smartboards as required.
Mechanical: Provide air circulation for high ceilings spaces (> 4570mm), e.g. casablanca fans.
            Noise level of ventilation system must not exceed NC 25.
            Provide sink at circulation desk.
Data:       Provide sufficient outlets at circulation desk to support number of workstations and
            peripherals; one (1) 2-port data outlet, as well as the future integrated Smartboard /
            projector.
            Two (2) 2-port outlets at circulation desk.
            A total of 32 ports for a media centre.
            One (1) 2-port outlet for photocopier, if required.
            One (1) 2-port outlet mounted at an appropriate location to accommodate a potential
            Wireless Access Point (NIC).
Power:      General: four (4) duplex receptacles maximum, distributed throughout the room. One
            (1) dedicated power outlet on the wall close to the ceiling for future Smartboard /
            projector. Power to support the media centre, rule of thumb one (1) dedicated circuit for
            every four (4) computers.
            Data: one (1) duplex receptacle for each 2-port data outlet. One (1) dedicated circuit for
            every two (2) duplex receptacles.
            One (1) 20A T-slot duplex receptacle for the photocopier.
            Library Security: one (1) floor-mounted duplex receptacle from dedicated circuit.
Lighting:   300 - 500 lux, general ambient, fluorescent; provide separate switch for task lighting.
            Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing the Smartboard.
Telephone: One (1) at circulation desk.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Equipment NIC: Library security system, 3M Detection System 2300 Series.
            Individual computer tables.
Design Guidelines                                                                            A7
Calgary Board of Education                                          Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 20 of 35


             Computers, network printer and scanners.
             Photocopier.
             Provide space at a location to be determined by the design team for Smartboard c/w
             integrated LCD projector arm. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm h or 66”w X
             50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.14       Media Centre Spaces
Design:      Media centre spaces are multi-disciplinary computer teaching spaces that must be
             designed to accommodate a minimum of 32 students per room.
             The A.I. Area Guidelines recommend 115m2 per media centre space.
             The space must be flexible to allow furniture arrangements in many configurations. The
             location of electrical components must reflect this.
             Room entry doors must incorporate glazing either in the door or as a sidelight.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Wall materials, especially at the entry, should consider damage from wear and tear.
Ceilings:    3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred. 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Required:   To be determined during design by AES project manager.
Other:      Whiteboard 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”) units. Locate on maximum of two (2)
            walls.
            Tack board, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
            Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards and Smartboards are required.
Data:       Each computer station must be networked. Provide one (1) 2-port outlet between each
            pair of computer stations.
            One (1) 4-port outlet for peripheral equipment.
Power:      General: two (2) duplex receptacles, distributed throughout the room.
            Data: one (1) duplex receptacle per one (1) 2-port data, maximum four (4) computers
            per dedicated circuit. All outlets to be 15 / 20A T-type.
Electrical: Motion sensors mandatory (in all spaces with ten (10) or more computers).
Lighting:   350 lux, fluorescent, use fixtures specially designed for computer areas.
            Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing the Smartboard.
Telephone: One (1) mounted near the entry door.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Equipment NIC: Individual computer tables.
            Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector arm
            in between whiteboard and tack board. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm h or
            66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.15      Career & Technology Studies (CTS) – Junior / Senior High
General:     Junior / Senior High level career and technology studies (CTS) spaces are generally
             larger than general classrooms; however, they are considered teaching spaces for
             capacity calculations.
             The A.I. Area Guidelines for the spaces to be provided will be provided from A.I. upon
             approval of CBE request for funding. This information will be furnished by the AES
             project manager.
             The determination of the types of CTS spaces provided for the facility will be
             determined prior to design start by CBE administration or in consultation with the design
             team.
             Requirements and equipment needs for each CTS program space is very specific and
             different. Design lab, classroom or shop to suit individual program as identified by AES
             project manager.
             The space must be flexible to allow furniture arrangements in many configurations. The
             location of electrical components must reflect this.
             Classroom entry doors must incorporate glazing either in the door or as a sidelight.
Design Guidelines                                                                              A7
Calgary Board of Education                                            Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 21 of 35


           Following is design information on some of the CTS spaces that could be part of the
           school. Information for spaces not listed below must be obtained from the AES project
           manager.
NIC Equipment: Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector
           arm in between whiteboard and tack board. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm h
           or 66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.15.1      CTS Shop – Construction Technology
Design:       The design of this space must include the layout of all equipment to ensure safety of
              equipment use.
              The exact requirements of this space will be determined during the design process.
              Provide a separate office for the teacher’s workspace.
              A small computer room that is separate from the shop area in order to minimize dust
              may be required if shop is isolated from other computer teaching spaces. Ventilation to
              each of these spaces is to be isolated from one another.
              Storage for this space may be a room or a series of millwork items.
              Any separate rooms are calculated as part of the total area for this CTS space.
Flooring:     Parquet wood flooring is preferred. Sealed concrete is acceptable.
Walls:        Concrete block walls are preferred.
              Wall materials, especially at the entry, should consider damage from wear and tear.
Ceilings:     Main Area: 3660mm (12’-0”) high minimum, 4570mm (15’-0”) high preferred.
              Office and smaller areas: 3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred. 2745mm (9’-0”) high
              minimum, suspended ceiling preferred.
Millwork:
Required:   Tool storage as defined by the educational specialist and approved as part of the
            budget by the AES project manager.
Other:      Whiteboards 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”), located in the shop area and in the
            computer area.
            Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards, and Smartboards as required.
Mechanical: All exposed ductwork to be round in shop areas.
            Dust collectors to be ‘bag’ type not ‘cyclone’ type when required. Install dust collector
            inside in its own dedicated sound insulated room. Exterior installation discouraged.
            Dust collectors to be non-recirculating and dedicated make up air to be provided. Re-
            circulating type will be considered provided a reduced air to cloth ratio (4:1) is utilized
            along with secondary filtration. Secondary filters to have static pressure gauges to alert
            operator of required filter changes.
Data:       Sufficient ports to suit number of computers in the small computer room.
            Provide one (1) 4-port outlet beside the future integrated Smartboard.
Power:      One (1) duplex receptacle for each 2-port data outlet. One (1) dedicated circuit for
            every two (2) duplex receptacle.
            Provide one (1) dedicated quad receptacle per 4-port data.
            Provide power for dust extraction system.
            Provide adequate power for band saw, scroll saw, drill press and belt sander as per
            equipment NIC listed below.
            Provide power for spray booth exhaust system
            Additional power as required for equipment needs.
Lighting:   350 - 400 lux, general ambient, T5HO fluorescent. Provide for switching of lights for
            ease of viewing the Smartboard.
Telephone: One (1) mounted in the teacher’s office.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Fire Alarm: Multitone/ strobe mounted within room.
            One (1) rate of rise thermal detector is space is not sprinklered.
Equipment in Contract: Dust Extraction System for equipment to OH&S standards.
Equipment NIC: Table saw (220V 20A 1 Phase), provide adequate power.
            Band saw (115V 15A),
            Scroll saw (115V 10A)
Design Guidelines                                                                            A7
Calgary Board of Education                                          Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 22 of 35


             Drill press (115V 10A)
             Belt sander (115V 10A)
             Computers.
             Spray booth.
             Storage.
             Shop vac.
             Material storage.
             Work benches.
             Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector
             arm in between whiteboard and tackboard. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm
             h or 66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on
             Smartboards.

7.5.15.2     CTS Lab
Design:      The design of this space must include the layout of all equipment.
             The exact requirements of this space will be determined during the design process.
             Storage for this space may be a room or a series of millwork items.
             Any separate rooms are calculated as part of the total area for this CTS space.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Wall materials, especially at the entry, should consider damage from wear and tear.
Ceilings:    3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred.
Millwork:
Required:   Sink in counter, with storage below, reference Detail St-4.
Optional:   Lockable upper cabinets over lower cupboards, reference Detail St-7.
Other:      Whiteboards, 2440mm X 11219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”).
            Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards and Smartboards as required.
Mechanical: Compressed air supply as required by AES project manager.
            Stainless steel sink with gooseneck faucet.
Data:       Ten (10) 2-port outlets dispersed throughout room to support the layout of the lab
            stations. Provide box rough in for wiring for LCD projector in the centre of the ceiling
            space.
            Power: One (1) duplex receptacle for each 2-port data outlet and one (1) dedicated
            duplex receptacle for each workstation location.
            Lighting: 350 – 500 lux, fluorescent. Provide for switching of lights for ease of viewing
            the Smartboard.
            Telephone: One (1) wall-mounted near entry door.
            PA: One (1) loudspeaker mounted in centre of ceiling.
            Equipment NIC: Workstations are prefabricated, purchased mobile technology
            workstation units and require computers. They come ready to “plug-in”. Details of
            workstations and layout will be provided by AES project manager.
            Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector arm
            in between whiteboard and tack board. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm h or
            66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.
            Other: Attached storage room for mobile workstations is preferred.

7.5.15.3     CTS Lab – Domestic Foods
Design:      The design of this space must include the layout of all equipment to ensure safety of
             equipment use.
             Storage for this space is a series of millwork items.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Wall materials, especially at the entry, should consider damage from wear and tear.
Ceilings:    3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred. 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Required:    Kitchen base and upper storage cabinets, reference Details ST-4, ST-7& ST-8.
Design Guidelines                                                                           A7
Calgary Board of Education                                         Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 23 of 35


            Each student “kitchen” to house sink, range, microwave. Locate ranges on perimeter
            walls, not on peninsula islands. Microwave to be located on microwave shelf in upper
            cupboards.
Other:      Whiteboards, 2440mm X 11219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”).
            Tack board, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
            Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards and Smartboards as required.
            Provide dishwasher(s), clothes washer / dryer and refrigerator(s) in common area of
            space.
Mechanical: Individual, residential type stainless steel vented hoods are required.
            Installation of dishwasher, clothes washer and dryer, including dryer venting.
            Stainless steel, double compartment sinks. Reference B3, Mechanical Section 15440
            Plumbing Fixtures & Trim.
Data:       Two (2) 4-port outlets distributed throughout the room.
            Sufficient ports to suit number of computers for the program.
Power:      General: Two (2) duplex receptacles distributed in room.
            Data: One (1) dedicated quad receptacle for each 4-port data outlet. One (1) dedicated
            circuit for every four (4) duplex receptacles.
            Range, washer, dryer and fridge receptacle(s) as required by room layout.
            Two (2) 15 / 20A T-type duplex split receptacles plus microwave duplex receptacle per
            student “kitchen”.
            One (1) dedicated duplex receptacle for ceiling-mounted LCD projector (NIC).
            Commercial-dishwasher connection, 208V, 50A breaker.
Lighting:   350 - 500 lux, general ambient, fluorescent. Provide for switching of lights for ease of
            viewing the Smartboard.
Telephone: One (1) mounted in the front of the room.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Fire Alarm: One (1) rate of rise thermal detector is space is not sprinklered.
Equipment in Contract: Commercial grade dishwasher: Moyer Diebel Model #501 HT.
Equipment NIC: One (1) range and one (1) microwave per teaching kitchen.
            Two (2) refrigerators.
            Washing machine and dryer.
            Relocatable demonstration table.
            Work tables.
            LCD projector
            Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector arm
            in between whiteboard and tackboard. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm h or
            66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.5.15.4     CTS Lab – Fashion Studies
Design:      The design of this space must include the layout of all equipment to ensure safety of
             equipment use.
             Provide a changing room.
             Storage for this space is a series of millwork items.
             Any separate rooms are calculated as part of the total area for this CTS space.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Wall materials, especially at the entry, should consider damage from wear and tear.
Ceilings:    3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred. 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Required:  Student storage lockers as approved by AES project manager.
           Storage units, reference Detail ST-9.
Optional:  Sewing tables as approved by AES Project Manager.
Other:     Whiteboards, 2440mm X 11219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”).
           Tack board, standard sizes / colours, distributed as appropriate.
           Supply backing for tackboards, whiteboards and Smartboards as required.
           Provide clothes washer / dryer in common area of space.
Mechanical Installation of clothes washer and dryer, including venting for dryer.
Design Guidelines                                                                            A7
Calgary Board of Education                                          Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 24 of 35


Data:      Two (2) 4-port outlets distributed throughout the room. Provide box rough in for wiring
           for LCD projector in the centre of the ceiling space.
           Sufficient ports to suit number of computers for the program.
Power:     Two general (2) duplex receptacles distributed in room.
           Data: One (1) dedicated circuit per quad receptacle for each 4-port data outlet. One (1)
           dedicated circuit for every two (2) duplex receptacle.
           Washer and dryer receptacle(s) as required by room layout.
           Sewing machine and ironing stations one (1) per dedicated circuit) receptacle(s) as
           required by room layout.
           One (1) dedicated duplex receptacle for ceiling-mounted LCD projector (NIC).
Lighting:  350 - 500 lux, general ambient, fluorescent. Provide for switching of lights for ease of
           viewing the Smartboard.
Telephone: One (1) mounted near the entry door.
PA:        One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
           Equipment in contract: 3-way mirror.
Equipment NIC: Washing machine / dryer.
           Sewing machines.
           Irons and ironing boards.
           Provide space at front of classroom for Smartboard c/w/ integrated LCD projector arm
           in between whiteboard and tackboard. Size of Smartboard: 166cm w X 126cm h or
           66”w X 50”h. Consult CBE design team for further recent details on Smartboards.

7.6          Interior Space Requirements – Non-Instructional Spaces
7.6.1        Flexible Space – Elementary
Design:      The flexible space allotted by the A.I. Area Guidelines is typically used for lunch room
             space in Elementary schools. The area allotted is 0.24m2 per student, based on the
             established capacity of the facility. The area will be confirmed by the AES project
             manager.
             Space to be adjacent to kitchen area.
             The space must be flexible to allow furniture arrangements in many configurations. The
             space must be located and configured to allow as much multi-use flexibility as possible.
             This space may be situated adjacent to the gymnasium in order to facilitate a “stage”. If
             this is done, a sturdy, damage resistant, wall enclosure must be provided between this
             space and the gymnasium.
             The storage of lunchroom tables must be addressed in the design of the storage
             component of the building. Provide a room immediately adjacent to the flex space for
             this purpose.
             Control natural light without expensive window coverings.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Concrete block walls preferred.
             Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
Ceilings:    3660mm (12’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Optional:   Display cases designed as approved by AES project manager.
Mechanical: Drinking fountain should be within or immediately adjacent to this space.
            For exposed ceilings all ducts to be tight to underside of deck.
Electrical: Where space is designed to facilitate a stage, reference gymnasium stage / auxiliary
            gymnasium space for additional requirements.
Data:       Two (2) 2-port outlets distributed throughout the space.
Power:      Four (4) 15/20A T-slot type duplex receptacles including support for data.
Lighting:   300 lux / 500 lux, bi-level switching, fluorescent.
Telephone: Not required.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Wall Closures: Commercial grade overhead doors to separate the flex space from the gymnasium
            are preferred.
Equipment NIC: Folding lunchroom tables, confirm table size with CBE purchasing department.
Design Guidelines                                                                            A7
Calgary Board of Education                                          Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 25 of 35


7.6.2        Flexible Space – Junior / Senior High
Design:      The flexible space allotted by the A.I. Area Guidelines is typically used for cafeteria
             seating space in Junior / Senior High schools. The area allotted is 0.24m2 per student,
             based on the established capacity of the facility. The area will be confirmed by the AES
             project manager.
             Space to be adjacent to kitchen area.
             The space must be flexible to allow furniture arrangements in many configurations. The
             space must be located and configured to allow as much multi-use flexibility as possible.
             This space may be situated adjacent to the gymnasium in order to facilitate a “stage”. If
             this is done, a sturdy, damage resistant, wall enclosure must be provided between this
             space and the gymnasium.
             Control natural light without expensive window coverings.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
             Provide chair rails in student areas to protect walls.
Ceilings:    4575mm (15’-0”) high preferred, 3660mm (12’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Optional:   Display cases designed as approved by AES project manager.
Mechanical: Two (2) drinking fountains, mount one (1) at standard height and one (1) at Barrier Free
            height.
            For exposed ceilings all ducts to be tight to underside of deck.
Electrical: Where space is designed to facilitate a stage, reference gymnasium stage / auxiliary
            gymnasium space for additional requirements.
Data:       Two (2) 2-port outlets distributed throughout the space.
Power:      Four (4) 15/20A T-slot duplex receptacles including support for data.
Lighting:   300 / 500 lux, bi-level switching, fluorescent.
Telephone: Not required.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Wall Closures: Commercial grade overhead doors to separate the flex space from the gymnasium
            are preferred.
Equipment NIC: Chairs and tables.

7.6.3        Kitchen Servery– Elementary
Design:      The A.I. Area Guidelines vary depending on the size of the school. The AES project
             manager will provide direction in this regard.
             Space to be adjacent to flex / lunchroom area and near to gymnasium.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
Wall Closures: Provide rolling grill or shutter.
Ceilings:    2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Required: Base and upper cabinets as required by layout.
             Space for sink as noted below.
             Space for appliances, final list and dimensional allowances as determined by AES
             project manager.
Refrigerators: Allow 815mm width and 1753mm height.
Mechanical: Provide a large two (2) compartment sink with 510 X 460 X 350 deep compartments
             for dishwashing and a separate hand washing sink.
Data:        One (1) 2-port outlet for each identified cashier computer.
Power:       Provide adequate duplex receptacles on sufficient circuits above the counter.
             15 / 20A T-slot Duplex receptacle(s) and other power connections to suit proposed
             equipment.
             Provide range receptacle (as required).
Lighting:    400 lux, general ambient, fluorescent.
Telephone: One (1) mounted near door to the room.
Design Guidelines                                                                              A7
Calgary Board of Education                                            Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 26 of 35


Equipment NIC: Specific equipment will vary with project, confirm with AES project manager, and
           design to suit.
           Range.
           Refrigerators, two (2).
           Microwaves, two (2).

7.6.4        Cafeteria Kitchen – Junior / Senior High
Design:      The A.I. Area Guidelines vary depending on the size of the school. The AES project
             manager will provide direction in this regard.
             Space to be adjacent to flex / lunchroom area.
Flooring:    Quarry / porcelain tile (non-slip) c/w coved tile base to match, 100mm high or sheet
             goods.
             Provide floor drains as required.
Walls:       Concrete block or gypsum board c/w ceramic tiles.
Wall Closures: Provide rolling grill or shutter.
Ceilings:    2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Required: Base and upper cabinets as required by layout.
             Space for large sink, coordinate with Mechanical.
             Space for appliances, final list and dimensional allowances as determined by AES
             project manager.
Refrigerators: Allow 815mm width and 1753mm height.
Range: Allow 762mm width.
Mechanical: Provide a large two (2) compartment sink with 510 X 460 X 350 deep compartments
             for dishwashing and a separate hand washing sink.
             Residential type stainless steel vented hoods are required.
Data:        One (1) 2-port outlet for each identified cashier computer.
Power:       Provide adequate duplex receptacles on sufficient circuits above the counter.
             15 / 20A T-slot Duplex receptacle(s) and other power connections to suit proposed
             equipment.
             Provide range receptacle (as required).
Lighting:    400 lux, general ambient, fluorescent.
             Use enclosed fixtures in cooking areas.
Telephone: One (1) mounted adjacent to cashier station.
Equipment in Contract: Residential type stainless steel vented hoods.
Equipment NIC: Specific equipment will vary with project, confirm with AES project manager, and
             design to suit.
             Range.
             Convection oven and stand 208V (1 or 3 phase).
             2-door commercial refrigerator (115V).
             Ice cream freezer (115V).
             Milk storage fridge (115V).
             Chest freezer (115V).
             Microwave (1 or 2) (Provide separate circuit).
             Warming drawer (115Vor 208V).
             Hot plate (115V).
             Soup warmer (115V).
             Cash register (115V).

7.6.5        Administration Spaces
Design:      The A.I. Area Guidelines vary depending on the size of the school. The AES project
             manager will provide direction in this regard.
             Locate administration areas in location that is easily identifiable and accessible from the
             main entrance to the building and the visitor parking area.
             The space must be flexible to allow furniture arrangements in many configurations.
Design Guidelines                                                                            A7
Calgary Board of Education                                          Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 27 of 35


             This space should be situated to provide for passive supervision over public and other
             gathering spaces.

7.6.5.1      General Office Space
Design:      Locate general office such that visitors entering the main entrance to the school must
             pass through the general office space in order to enter the building when the rest of the
             building doors are locked during class time.
             Provide visibility from inside the general office to front entrance, bus drop-off and
             bicycle rack areas.
             Provide as much direct natural light as possible.
             Provide glazing to exterior and interior for supervision.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
             Provide chair rails in high traffic areas to protect walls.
Ceilings:    2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Optional:   Staff mail boxes for 125% of actual staff number (custom design to suit), reference
            Detail ST-17. Location to consider traffic patterns and accessibility.
Mechanical: Provide air conditioning.
            Office area should have a dedicated temperature control (thermostat).
Data:       One (1) 2-port outlet at each secretarial workstation.
            One (1) 4-port outlet at identified network printer / photocopier location (if not at
            secretarial workstation).
Power:      One (1) duplex receptacle per 2-port data outlet.
            Two (2) general use duplex receptacles in space.
            Power for fax, answering machine, photocopier (T-slot 15/20A receptacle).
Lighting:   350 - 500 lux, fluorescent, low glare.
Telephone: As required for the number of workstations
            Provide separate outlets for fax and answering machines.
            One (1) student use phone, wall-mounted, within the general office.
            One (1) emergency telephone, securely wall-mounted.
PA:         Locate Main PA (Meridian Telephone) in this space.
Equipment NIC: Fax machine.
            Answering machine.
            Photocopier.

7.6.5.2      Administrative Offices
Design:     Locate principal’s office adjacent to the workstation that will be used by his / her
            assistant.
            Provide glazing panels in doors or adjacent sidelights to all offices.
Flooring:   Resilient flooring preferred.
Walls:      Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear. Provide chair rails to
            protect walls.
Ceilings:   2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Mechanical: Each Office should have a dedicated temperature control (thermostat).
Data:       One (1) 2-port outlet (at each Office Workstation).
Power:      One (1) duplex receptacle per wall, connected to a common dedicated circuit.
Lighting:   350 - 500 lux, fluorescent.
Telephone: One (1) desktop type (at each office workstation).

7.6.5.3      Administrative Workroom & Storage Area
Design:      Workroom may be located adjacent to or distant from, the general office depending on
             the philosophy developed for the school and its staff. If the main staff workroom is
             situated distantly from the general office, then a small workroom must be provided in or
             adjacent to, the general office space as well. This must be accomplished within the
             total space designated for the workroom space.
Design Guidelines                                                                           A7
Calgary Board of Education                                         Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 28 of 35


             Provide glazing panels in doors or adjacent sidelights.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
Ceilings:    2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Required:   Work counter, reference Details ST-4, ST-7 & ST-8 for typical cabinet drawings.
Optional:   Staff mail boxes for 125% of actual staff number (custom design to suit), reference
            Detail ST-17. Location to consider traffic patterns and accessibility.
Other:      Tack boards, standard size / colour.
Mechanical: Provide air conditioning to suit loads, even if rest of building is not air conditioned.
            Provide ventilation and exhaust.
Data:       Two (2) 2-port outlets in Elementary. Three (3) 2-port outlets in a Middle school. Four
            (4) 2-port outlets in Senior High school.
Power:      One (1) duplex receptacle (general purpose).
            One (1) duplex receptacle (for each photocopier and / or laminator) on dedicated circuit
            15 / 20A T-type.
            Increase power outlets to support number of data outlets being installed.
            Provide two (2) above counter outlets per counter.
Lighting:   400 - 500 lux, fluorescent.
Telephone: One (1) wall-mounted handset (in work area).
            One (1) telephone outlet for fax machine mounted above millwork countertop.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Equipment NIC: Photocopier(s).
            Laminator.
            Fax machine.

7.6.5.4      Counselling Offices
Design:     Counselling offices may be used as administrative offices or resource rooms. They may
            be located adjacent to, or dispersed from, the general office, depending on the
            philosophy developed for the school.
            Provide glazing panels in doors or adjacent sidelights.
Flooring:   Resilient flooring preferred.
Walls:      Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
            Provide chair rails to protect walls.
Ceilings:   2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Other:      Whiteboards or tack boards, 1219mm X 1219mm (4’-0” X 4’-0”), may be required in
            resource rooms.
Mechanical: Each office should have a dedicated temperature control (thermostat).
Data:       One (1) 2-port outlet (at each office workstation).
Power:      One (1) duplex receptacle per wall, connected to a common dedicated circuit.
Lighting:   350 - 500 lux, fluorescent.
Telephone: One (1) desktop or wall-mounted type (at each office workstation), depending on use of
            space.

7.6.5.5      Conference Room(s)
Design:      The total allotted conference room space may be broken down as required to facilitate
             the philosophy developed for the school.
             Typically one (1) conference room is located within the administrative space, easily
             accessible to the general office.
             Provide glazing panels in doors or adjacent sidelights to all offices.
Flooring:    Carpet may be provided in conference rooms. Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
             Provide chair rails to protect walls.
Ceilings:    2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Data:        One (1) 2-port outlet per conference room (larger rooms may require two (2) 2-port
             outlets) as well as for the future Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector arm
Design Guidelines                                                                            A7
Calgary Board of Education                                          Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 29 of 35


Power:     One (1) duplex receptacle per wall, connected to a common dedicated circuit, including
           support of data. One (1) dedicated power receptacle on the wall close to the ceiling for
           future Smartboard c/w integrated LCD projector arm. Total of two (2) dedicated circuits.
Lighting:  350 - 500 lux, fluorescent.
Telephone: One wall-mounted type near door to room.


7.6.5.6      Infirmary
Design:      Infirmary for Elementary and Junior High schools must be located adjacent to and
             visually connected to the general office.
             Often the A.I. Area Guidelines for the Infirmary are excessive; therefore, space may be
             diverted to other uses.
             As a minimum, provide area for two (2) cots, either fixed or fold-away.
             Provide a 2-piece washroom, Barrier Free Accessible, as part of this space or locate
             adjacent to special needs washroom.
             Provide a small work area for a staff desk and space for small freezer.
             A separate sink may also be provided.
             Provide glazing panels in doors or adjacent sidelights.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
             Provide chair rails to protect walls.
Ceilings:    2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Required: Counter: Reference Details ST-4 & ST-7.
Other:     Tack boards, 1219mm X 1219mm (4’-0” X 4’-0”).
Data:      One (1) 2-port outlet at work area.
Power:     Two (2) duplex receptacles, including support of data.
Lighting:  350 - 500 lux, fluorescent.
Telephone: One (1) desktop type.
PA:        One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Equipment NIC: Cots (915 X 1829 mm), folding cots may be considered.
           Bar fridge or freezer.
           Staff desk.

7.6.5.7      Staff Room & Staff Kitchen
Design:      Staff area may be located adjacent to or distant from, the general office depending on
             the philosophy developed for the school and its staff. Locate adjacent to staff
             washrooms. If staff area is located distantly from general office, then a separate staff
             washroom maybe required to serve the general office.
             Provide a small, common staff work area in the staff room.
             Provide glazing panels in doors or adjacent sidelights.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Wall materials, especially at the entry, should consider damage from wear and tear.
Ceilings:    2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Required:   Standard kitchen millwork, reference Details ST-4, ST-7 & ST-8.
            Space for sink as noted below.
            Space for appliances, final list and dimensional allowances as determined by AES
            project manager.
            Refrigerators: Allow 815mm width and 1753mm height.
            Ranges: Allow 762mm width.
            Allow space for two (2) microwaves.
            Provide coat shelf and rod.
Other:      Whiteboard, 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”).
            Tack boards, 2440mm X 1219mm (8’-0” X 4’-0”).
Mechanical: Provide a two (2) compartment sink.
Design Guidelines                                                                            A7
Calgary Board of Education                                          Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 30 of 35


            Residential type stainless steel vented hoods are required.
            Installation of dishwasher.
Data:       One (1) 4-port at common teacher workstation.
Power:      Two (2) 15 / 20A T-type duplex general receptacles in common teacher workstation on
            dedicated circuit.
            Provide power for all required appliances.
            Provide two (2) 15 /20A T-slot duplex receptacles above counter outlets, on separate
            circuits, per counter.
Lighting:   350 - 500 lux, fluorescent.
Telephone: One (1), location to match proposed furniture layout.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Equipment in Contract: Residential style stainless steel vented range hood.
            High heat residential dishwasher, c/w heating element.
Equipment NIC: Range.
            Refrigerator(s).
            Microwaves: Two (2).

7.6.6       Washroom Facilities
Design:      Irrespective of the A.I. Area Guidelines, the number of washrooms must be sufficient to
             meet the current Alberta Building Code requirements based on the full build out
             expectation of the facility. The AES project manager can provide information on the full
             build out requirements.

7.6.6.1      Student Washrooms
Design:     Student washrooms should be well dispersed throughout the building.
            Locate one (1) set of washrooms accessible during community use lock down.
            For Elementary schools, consider placement of sinks to be visible from the corridor in
            order to discourage vandalism and mischief.
            For Junior / Senior High schools consider door-less design.
            Full height sight screens rather than closed vestibules preferred.
            All washrooms must be Barrier Free Accessible.
Flooring:   Sheet goods preferred.
            Provide floor drains as required.
Walls:      Concrete block or gypsum board c/w ceramic tiles.
            Ceramic tiles on walls to dado height, as required by Alberta Building Code.
Ceilings:   3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred.
Mechanical: For exposed ceilings all ductwork must be tight to the underside of deck.
            Urinals: Wall-mounted.
            Toilets: Floor-mounted with open front seats.
            Sinks: Use in counter sinks or express lavatory type systems.
Lighting:   200 lux, fluorescent.
            Flush-mounted fixtures with unbreakable lenses or wire guards.
            Lights are to be key switched.
            Emergency lighting fixtures (if no windows in Washroom).
Electrical: Provide rough-in for electrical hand dryers; reference B2, Architectural Section 10800
            Washroom Accessories.
PA:         One (1) loudspeaker mounted in center of ceiling.
Equipment in Contract: Toilet partitions, grab bars and mirrors.
Equipment NIC: All Washroom accessories including toilet paper holders, paper towel dispensers,
            soap dispensers and sanitary napkin disposals. Contract documents to include for
            installation by the Contractor of these owner supplied accessories.

7.6.6.2      Special Needs Barrier Free Accessible Washroom
Design:      At least one (1) facility like this must be provided in every CBE facility.
             Locate this facility as centrally as possible to be easily reached from any part of the
             building.
Design Guidelines                                                                             A7
Calgary Board of Education                                           Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 31 of 35


            Washroom must be directly accessible from a circulation space through a keyed,
            lockable door.
            This space may be paired with the Infirmary to reduce number of washrooms.
            Reference Detail Plan A-4.
            At least 1 (one) shower is required in all schools for assisted needs students. The
            physical education office shower can be utilized for this purpose. Reference Sections
            7.5.9.2 and 7.5.10.2.
Flooring:   Sheet goods preferred.
            Provide floor drains as required.
Walls:      Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
Ceilings:   3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred. 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Mechanical: Sinks: Provide vanity-mounted accessible lavatories.
Lighting:   200 lux, fluorescent.
            Emergency lighting fixtures (if no windows in washroom). Light switch mounting height
            requirement as per Barrier Free standards.
Telephone: One (1) wall-mounted (CBE to program for access to general office only, no outside
            line) if it is not adjacent to the office. Mounting height requirement as per Barrier Free
            standards.
Equipment in Contract: Grab bars and mirrors.
Equipment NIC: All washroom accessories including toilet paper holders, paper towel dispensers,
            and soap dispensers. Contract documents to include for installation by the contractor of
            these owner supplied accessories.

7.6.6.3      Staff Washrooms
Design:     Staff washrooms should be well dispersed throughout the building.
            Full height sight screens rather than closed vestibules preferred.
            All washrooms must be Barrier Free Accessible.
Flooring:   Sheet goods preferred.
            Provide floor drains as required.
Walls:      Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
Ceilings:   3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred. 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Mechanical: Urinals: Wall-mounted.
            Toilets: Floor-mounted with open front seats.
            Sinks: Use in counter sinks or express lavatory type systems.
Lighting:   200 lux, fluorescent.
Equipment in Contract: Toilet partitions, grab bars and mirrors.
Equipment NIC: All washroom accessories including toilet paper holders, paper towel dispensers,
            and soap dispensers. Contract documents to include for installation by the contractor of
            these owner supplied accessories.

7.6.7        Circulation
Design:       Circulation should be designed clearly to allow easy flow of traffic.
              In addition to the main entrance, provide sufficient building access to the building.
              Provide at least one (1) entry directly to the staff parking lot and one (1) to the
              playfields.

7.6.7.1      Corridors
Design:       Minimum Corridor widths:
              No lockers             2135mm (7’-0”) clear
              Lockers (1 side)       2440mm (8’-0”) clear
              Lockers (2 sides)      2590mm (8’-6”) clear.
              For Elementary schools, coats cannot be stored in the corridors unless special, area-
              consuming recesses are created.
              For Junior / Senior High schools, sufficient lockers must be provided to support the
              final build out expectation for the facility.
Flooring:     Sheet goods preferred.
Design Guidelines                                                                              A7
Calgary Board of Education                                            Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 32 of 35


            Provide floor drains as required.
Walls:      Concrete block walls c/w bull nosed block at external corners preferred.
            Gypsum board, c/w wood material dado to 4’ minimum, on corridor side, acceptable.
Ceilings:   3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred. 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Doors:      Doors shall have windows or vision panels.
            Doors must swing open 180˚ preferably (90˚ minimum).
Mechanical: Minimum, two (2) wall-mounted drinking fountains, per floor, within a Barrier Free
            Accessible alcove, when possible, mount one (1) at standard height and one (1) at
            Barrier Free Height. Additional installations may be required in larger facilities. Do not
            locate fountains in locations that will inhibit high traffic areas or in concealed spaces.
Lighting:   200 lux, fluorescent.
            Lights are to be key switched.
Power:      20A duplex receptacle(s) (CSA conf. 5-20RA) for floor polishers / auto-scrubbers
            (dedicated circuit(s)) spaced no less than 24m apart; provide coverage for entire
            Corridor floor surface.
Electrical: All devices are to be flush-mounted behind wire cages. 15/20A T-slot duplex
            receptacles required.
PA:         Provide sufficient loudspeakers mounted in ceiling to provide coverage.
Equipment in Contract: Lockers: 2-tier acceptable, standard colours required. Provide bulkhead
            above or prefinished metal sloped tops. Use plywood curb c/w rubber base. Number of
            lockers to be based on capacity of the school.

7.6.7.2      Stairs & Stairways
Design:     Stair widths 1880mm (6’-0”), clear preferred.
            Provide vision panels to Stairway doors and glazing to Landings as practical.
            Top and bottom nosing of all stairs to have yellow vision strip (2” wide) for the visually
            impaired.
            Clearly identify landings that are used as areas of refuge under the Alberta Building
            Code.
            All Stairwells exiting below grade must be enclosed.
Flooring:   Stair Treads: Heavy duty moulded rubber treads, diamond pattern c/w reinforced
            nosing. Provide visual strips at nosings at the top and bottom of a run for the visually
            impaired.
Landings: Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:      Concrete block walls c/w bull nosed block at external corners preferred.
            Gypsum board, c/w wood material dado to 4’ minimum, on corridor side, acceptable.
Railing:    Prefer stainless steel railings in all highly visible and high use areas. Use painted steel
            railings in service and low use areas.
Doors:      Doors shall have windows or vision panels.
            Doors must swing open 180˚ preferably (90˚ minimum).
Lighting:   200 lux, fluorescent mounted over landing, not stairs. Ensure location provides ease of
            service.
            Lights are to be key switched.
Electrical: All devices are to be flush-mounted behind wire cages.
PA:         Provide sufficient loudspeakers mounted in ceiling to provide coverage.
Fire Alarm: Smoke detector at top of stairwell mounted over landing, not stairs. Ensure location
            provides ease of service.

7.6.7.3      Elevators
Design:       The primary purpose of elevators in schools is to provide Barrier Free Access.
              Barrier Free Lifts not acceptable in new schools, however, they may be accepted in
              renovations where approved by AES project manager.
              The secondary use of elevators in schools is to assist staff (Teaching and Caretaking)
              in carrying heavy loads upstairs.
              Locate elevator machine rooms as close to shaft as possible on the main floor.
Flooring:     To match corridor.
Design Guidelines                                                                              A7
Calgary Board of Education                                            Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 33 of 35


Walls:     Plastic laminate.
Doors:     Key switched, instead of call buttons, required to operate elevator, reference B2,
           Architectural Section 14200 Elevators.
Power:     Duplex receptacle(s) in lift shaft for maintenance technician use.
           Power for elevator.
Lighting:  200 lux, fluorescent, in elevator.
           As required in shaft for service work.
Telephone: One (1) emergency telephone, reference B2, Architectural Section 14200 Elevators.

7.6.7.4      Vestibules
Design:     Provide vestibules at all building, non-service, entrances.
            Provide sufficient vestibule spaces at exterior doorways where possible.
Flooring:   Prefer quarry / porcelain tile (non-slip) c/w cove base to match 100mm high or sheet
            flooring.
            Consideration should be made regarding anti-slip and cleaning.
Walls:      Concrete block walls c/w bull nosed block at external corners preferred.
            Gypsum board, c/w wood material dado to 4’ minimum, on corridor side, acceptable.
Ceilings:   3050mm (10’-0”) high preferred. 2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Doors:      Doors shall have windows or vision panels;
            Doors must swing open 180˚ preferably (90˚ minimum).
Mechanical: Provide recessed force flow, preferably wall-mounted type.
Lighting:   200 lux, fluorescent.
            Lights are to be key switched with corridor lights.
Power:      Required for unit heater fan.
Security:   Provide access / security panel (in parking lot entrance vestibule only).

7.6.8        Facility Operations & Storage
Design:      Each building must be provided with an office for the facility operator. This office should
             be centrally located with direct access to the spaces that would be available for after
             hours community use.
             The “space allocation” for the facility operator may be from the storage area allotment
             for the facility.

7.6.8.1      Facility Operator’s Office
Design:      In Elementary or Junior High schools, office workspace is required for one (1) full-time
             individual. Seating and lunch space may be required for one (1) or two (2) additional
             persons.
             In Senior High schools, a separate office is provided as a workspace for the senior
             operator. Seating and lunch space is provided for the rest of the operations staff.
             Provide glazing panels in doors or adjacent sidelights.
Flooring:    Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:       Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear
Ceilings:    2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Millwork:
Required: Counter, reference Detail ST-18.
Mechanical: Provide stainless steel, double basin sink.
Lighting:   350-500 lux, fluorescent.
Data, Power & Telephone: Outlets for Senior High schools to be provided in both the senior
            operator’s office and also in the seating and lunch space provided for the rest of the
            operations staff.
Data:       One (1) 4-port outlet (at computer workstation), desk height.
Power:      One (1) dedicated duplex receptacle per 4-port data.
            Two (2) duplex receptacles each on a dedicated circuit at counter (kettle / coffee maker
            and microwave).
Telephone: One (1) desk-mounted outlet, no separate outside line.
Equipment NIC: Key box.
Design Guidelines                                                                           A7
Calgary Board of Education                                         Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 34 of 35


              Coffee maker.
              Microwave.
              File cabinet.

7.6.8.2       Caretaking Rooms / Closets & Storage Rooms
Design:     Provide one (1) combination caretaking closet / storage room for each 2500m² of
            school floor area.
Flooring:   Sheet goods preferred.
Walls:      Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
            Provide protection of wall around mop sink.
Ceilings:   2745mm (9’-0”) high minimum.
Mechanical: Provide floor-mount moulded stone type mop sink.
            Provide connections (Electrical and Mechanical) for a washer and dryer in the
            Mechanical room.
Lighting:   200-350 lux, fluorescent.
Power:      Where battery powered floor polishers and / or auto-scrubbers are proposed. Provide
            power connections for charging such appliances.
Equipment NIC: Washer and dryer. (One (1) pair per building for caretaking purposes.)
            Mop hooks above sink.
            Wet / dry vac.
            Special equipment may be used, coordinate requirements with AES (auto scrubber,
            vacuum cleaners, burnishers, etc.).

7.6.8.3       General Storage Rooms
Design:       Disperse storage rooms throughout the school.
Flooring:     Sealed concrete.
Walls:        Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear
Ceilings:     No ceiling unless required by code.
Lighting:     200 - 350 lux, fluorescent.
Power:        Provide a duplex receptacle beside or close to the door.

7.6.9         Facility Service Rooms
7.6.9.1       Mechanical Service Rooms
Design:       Locate where appropriate for mechanical design.
Flooring:     Sealed concrete.
Walls:        Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
Ceilings:     No ceiling unless required by code.
Mechanical:   Network adaptor device that serves the DCMS is to be located in the mechanical room.
Lighting:     350 lux, fluorescent.
Power:        One (1) duplex receptacle (general purpose).
              Provide power connections for a washer and dryer at a location to be determined.
Data:         One (1) 2-port outlet located within same box enclosure as the network adaptor device
              that serves the DCMS. Mechanical and electrical trades must coordinate the exact
              location of the 2-port outlet.

7.6.9.2       Electrical Service Rooms
Design:     Locate as close as practical to major electrical loads.
            Provide floor-mounted equipment with a housekeeping pad, except for roll-out style
            switchgear.
            Provide clear access to equipment from floor level.
Flooring:   Sealed concrete.
Walls:      Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
Ceilings:   No ceiling unless required by code.
Mechanical: Room to be adequately ventilated to offset any heat gains.
Design Guidelines                                                                           A7
Calgary Board of Education                                         Interior Space Requirements
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 35 of 35


Lighting:    350 lux, fluorescent.
             Provide emergency lighting fixtures.
Power:       One (1) duplex receptacle (general purpose).

7.6.9.3      Communications
Design:     Includes Low Voltage Systems & Wiring: Fire Alarm Panel, Security Panel, KSU and
            Telephone wiring, PA Terminations and Cabinet, Data Terminations and Rack System.
            Locate so as to minimize number of communications rooms / closets required to
            provide data service to entire building. Maximum total length of runs to be 90m (or
            approximately 75m horizontal distance) to any computer in the school.
Space Required: Each building will require space to house three (3) floor standing racks with one
            (1) m clearance on all low-voltage equipment plus one (1) floor standing rack for each
            sub room / closet required. Reference Electrical Standard Drawing E-D4.
Flooring:   Sealed concrete.
Walls:      Wall materials should consider damage from wear and tear.
            Provide painted (20mm) ¾” plywood backboard (8’ high) to all locations used for
            communications equipment.
Ceiling:    Open to building cable tray system.
Mechanical: Provide air conditioning if possible, or sufficient ventilation to dissipate heat.
Data:       Floor-standing racks, reference Electrical Standard Drawings E-D6 & E-D7.
Power:      Data Racks: Install two (2) 15A/20A T-slot 120V isolated ground surge suppressed
            duplex receptacles on two (2) dedicated 15 /20A T-slot circuits in the back of each rack
            for equipment (NIC). Provide lockable breakers.
            All Other Low Voltage Systems: Provide isolated ground duplex receptacles on
            dedicated 15A circuits for each Electrical System. Provide lockable breakers.
Lighting:   350 lux, fluorescent.
Equipment NIC: Network switches.
            Reference: Reference Electrical Standard Drawings E-D4 through E-D8.

7.6.9.4      Exterior Storage Rooms
Design:     Provide one (1) storage room with access from exterior only for storage of gasoline
            and lawn mower / snow blower. Provide double doors. Provide hard surface access
            from exterior storage room to front entry.
Flooring:   Sealed concrete.
Walls:      Concrete block to underside of deck.
Ceiling:    No ceiling unless required by code.
Mechanical: Exhaust directly to exterior, no transfer or return air.
Lighting:   200 - 350 lux, fluorescent.
Power:      One (1) duplex receptacle (general purpose).
Design Guidelines                                                                            B1
Calgary Board of Education                                     General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 1 of 2


SECTION B1                       GENERAL SPECIFICATION GUIDELINES
Section 00200                    Instructions to Bidders
1. CBE Standard “Instructions to Bidders”: to be used, reference Appendix 1. This section is
   available electronically from AES. Any modifications must be approved by the AES project
   manager.

Section 00410                    Stipulated Price Bid Form
1. CBE Standard “Stipulated Price Bid Form” and Appendices “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E” and “F” to
   be used, reference Appendix 2. This section is available electronically from AES. Any
   modifications must be approved by the AES project manager.

Section 00700                    General Conditions of Contract
1. CBE Standard “General Conditions of Contract”: to be used, reference Appendix 3 Insert
   completion Date in 3.b. This Section is available electronically from AES. Any modifications
   must be approved by the AES project manager.

Section 00800                    Supplementary Conditions
1. CBE Standard “Supplementary Conditions” to be used that are applicable to the type of
   project. This Section is not to be modified. This Section is available electronically from the
   AES project manager.

Section 01000                    General Instructions
1. Consultant to record and distribute bi-weekly Site Meeting Minutes within three (3) working
    days.
2. General contractor is responsible for security of the building outside of normal school hours.
3. General contractor must have a supervisor on site whenever any work is in progress, to
    supervise the subtrades and coordinate the work.
4. The general contractor may sign out only one (1) set of keys from CBE Security.
5. Identification badges are also to be signed out by the general contractor and distributed to all
    subtrades daily. All workers on site must wear these badges at all times, persons not wearing
    badges may be asked to leave site. (Charges will apply for lost keys or badges.)
6. Safety on site is the responsibility of the general contractor. He is to ensure all workers and
    visitors are wearing safety shoes, hard hats, safety glasses, etc., as conditions require.
    Reference B1, Section 00800, G.C.3.7.3. No visitors permitted unless scheduled by AES.
7. Contractors must submit a copy of their company safety manual to be kept on file by AES
    and / or updated as required to keep manual current.
8. A valid Certificate of Recognition (COR) as issued by the Alberta Construction Safety
    Association or other certifying organization authorized by Alberta Human Resources and
    Employment must be specified as a requirement for all projects.
9. The prime contractor for renovation projects must conduct and document a Hazard
    Assessment of the site and develop a Safe Work Plan that details how occupants of the
    school will be protected from any health and safety issues that may arise as a result of the
    work to be completed.
10. Disposal of excess material and debris to be done daily or a separate garbage bin provided
    by the contractor. Use of the school bin is not permitted. (Charges will apply if school bin
    used.)
11. All CBE properties are “Non-Smoking”, there is no smoking allowed either inside or outside of
    the schools. This applies to all additional / renovation projects.
12. Renovation work during the school term must be coordinated with the school principal and
    AES project manager to minimize the disruption. Noisy activities to be scheduled outside of
    normal school hours.
13. In areas where dust or fumes will be generated, seal all grilles and openings with 6 mil poly to
    prevent dust contaminating the ductwork.
14. The Consultant will obtain the Development Permit on behalf of the owner. The consultant on
    behalf of the owner will obtain the Building Permit. All other permits required plumbing,
Design Guidelines                                                                              B1
Calgary Board of Education                                       General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                             Page 2 of 2


    electrical, etc., to be obtained and paid for by the contractor. The contractor is also to obtain
    the Occupancy Permit, prior to Substantial Completion.
15. As-built drawings and O&M manuals to be submitted as a requirement for Substantial
    Completion. (Information for work issued on Change Orders near the end of the project may
    be submitted later to be added to the drawings / manuals.)
16. Substantial Completion inspection to be scheduled when requested by the general
    contractor. The deficiency list to be evaluated and retention will then be held until all items
    are complete (Total Performance), including items identified to be corrected under warranty
    during the one (1) year warranty period. Time frame for completion of the deficiencies to be
    established. Reference B1, Section 00800, G.C.5.4.3, 5.4.4 and 5.7.1. No progress payments
    will be processed between Substantial Performance and Total Performance.
17. Specify chain link site fencing be installed to restrict the area of the site to be utilized by the
    contractor. Restrict to the area between school and street and approximately 15m beyond
    building and paved areas (also indicate on site plan). Include for rehab of site upon
    completion. Should site work not be complete upon occupancy, chain link fencing to be
    relocated to separate walkways and exits from the unfinished area. Plastic snow fencing not
    permitted.

Section 01020                     Allowances
1. A Contingency Sum will be carried by the owner, within the Project Budget, but will not be
   included in the contract or the amount identified.
2. Cash Allowances for work to be done by the owner’s forces will be carried by the owner,
   within the Project Budget, but will not be included in the contract or the amount identified.
3. Cash Allowances for work to be done by the Contractor, to be listed in this section (curb cuts,
   utility connections, etc.).
4. Ensure the mechanical and electrical or other sub-consultants do not specify any allowances
   in Divisions 15 or 16 or elsewhere. All cash allowances must be specified in this section only.
5. A Building Envelope Consultant to be retained to review drawings, construction details and
   mockups that set standard for quality of work on site. Repairs to correct any defects to be the
   responsibility of the contractor. (Reference this in the Air Barrier / Insulation Sections of the
   Specification.)

Section 01100                     Project, Separate, Breakout & Unit Prices
1. The number of project or separate prices requested to be kept to a minimum (a few additions
   and a few deletions).
2. Clearly indicate for “Project” prices what is to be included in the Base Bid and what is the
   project.
3. Clearly indicate “Separate” Prices are not in Base Bid but are “Add on” Prices.
4. Clearly indicate “Breakout or Itemized” Prices are included in the Base Bid and are identified
   for information only.
5. Specify “Unit” Prices only where total work can not be confirmed, then make sure a specified
   quantity is included in Base Bid with one (1) “Unit” Price to be used both to add or subtract
   from that number.
6. Ensure mechanical and electrical or other sub-consultants do not specify any project,
   Separate Breakout or Unit Prices in Division 15 or 16 or elsewhere. Any required area to be
   included in this Section.
Design Guidelines                                                                              B2
Calgary Board of Education                                       General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 1 of 14


SECTION B2                       ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION GUIDELINES
Section 02070                    Selective Demolition
1. General
   1.1 The salvage of materials and equipment to be reviewed with AES project manager prior
       to tendering. All items to be removed and turned over to the AES project manager
       should be listed in this section, balance to be disposed of by contractor
   1.2 Existing systems, fire alarm, security, telephone, power, etc., must remain active at all
       times. If any of these systems do need to be disrupted for a period of time, this must be
       scheduled with the AES project manager.
   1.3 Include a warning in this section and on the drawings referring the contractor to B2,
       Architectural section 13280 Asbestos control for asbestos containing materials.

Section 02441                    Irrigation
1. General
   1.1 Protect existing City of Calgary Parks irrigation systems from damage. Ensure systems
       are fully operational upon completion of project.
   1.2 Contractor to arrange a meeting with City Parks area foreman to review impact of
       construction on existing systems, obtain as-built drawings and information, and to have
       City salvage components, cut and cap off lines as required.
   1.3 Underground irrigation systems will not be provided for school portion of site, hose bibs
       to be provided under mechanical scope.

Section 02485                    Sodding
1. General
   1.1 Grass Sod: Certified No. 1 grade cultivated turf grass sod, grown and sold in accordance
       with LANTA classifications shall be used. Sod that has dried out or rotted (moulded) due
       to delays in transportation or installation will be rejected.
   1.2 Maintain Sodded Areas from the time of installation for a period of six (6) weeks of
       growing season (May 15 to Oct. 15), include mowings, watering and weed control.
   1.3 Make good any erosion that results from faulty workmanship and / or materials.
   1.4 Replace with new sod any deteriorated or bare spots.
   1.5 Sod that is not established and accepted by owner prior to start of school year must be
       protected by chain link fencing or construction hoarding (plastic snow fence not
       acceptable). Similar for seed.
   1.6 Lawn areas will not be accepted until the end of the maintenance period. Areas sodded
       in autumn will be accepted in following growing season at end of maintenance period.
   1.7 Recommended location of sod installation all front and side yards and all high traffic
       areas (between parking lot and school, along compound sidewalks and pathways,
       around catch basins and along drainage swales).

Section 02495                    Hydro-Seeding
1. General
   1.1 Approval of the finished topsoil preparation required before proceeding with hydro-
        seeding.
   1.2 Grass Seed:
       1.2.1 Seed for play fields, Joint Use Sites, residential boulevards and other non-irrigated but
             high use areas to be certified Canada No. 1, a medium mix (Urban B) composed of:
             1.2.1.1 Kentucky Blue Grass 40%
             1.2.1.2 Creeping Red Fescue 45%
             1.2.1.3 Perennial Rye Grass          15%.
       1.2.2 Grass seed to be applied at a rate of not less than 30 g/m2 or 300 kg/ha.
       1.2.3 Hydro seed to current City of Calgary Parks Department’s standard specifications for
             Landscape Construction, Part III Subgrade / Topsoil / Sodding / Seeding.
Design Guidelines                                                                             B2
Calgary Board of Education                                      General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 2 of 14


    1.3 Upon completion of hydro-seeding add site fencing to allow full access to the building,
        yet provide full protection to all Hydro-seeded areas.
    1.4 Remedy all damages, washouts and eroded areas resulting from weather, improper
        protection or other causes.
    1.5 Maintain seeded areas from time of hydro-seeding for a period of six (6) weeks of
        growing season (May 15 to Oct.15) include mowings, watering and weed control.
    1.6 Maintain fencing in good condition and keep in place until Hydro-seeded areas are fully
        established and accepted.
    1.7 Hydro-seed that is not established and accepted by owner prior to start of school year
        must be protected by chain link fencing or construction hoarding (plastic snow fence not
        acceptable).
    1.8 Seeded areas will be accepted provided they are uniformly established and turf is free of
        rutted, eroded, and bare or dead spots and free of weeds.

Section 02950                    Trees, Shrubs & Plants
1. General
   1.1 Plant material must be in accordance with LANTA with a preference for the use of
       indigenous trees where possible.
   1.2 Plant materials are to meet or exceed minimum City of Calgary requirements.
   1.3 Do not use “Poplar” species.

Section 06400                    Architectural Woodwork
1. General
   1.1 Cabinet work to conform to the Architectural Wood Manufacturers Association of
        Canada (AWMAC) custom grade.
   1.2 All millwork to be fabricated from 19mm birch multi-core plywood (unit backs 10mm) and
        solid material. Edge band visible edges with PVC edging. Specify veneers for millwork
        units within a room to be colour matched.
   1.3 Particleboard is not acceptable for use in cabinets or countertops.
   1.4 Finish to be natural birch clear finish, all exposed sides and edges of millwork units to be
        prefinished. Specify one (1) coat sanding sealer, (sand lightly) and two (2) coats
        catalyzed lacquer.
   1.5 Countertops to be 19mm plywood covered with plastic laminate conforming to CAN3-
        A172 general-purpose type 1.15mm thick. Caulk between countertop and backsplash
        and between backsplash and wall with coloured caulking to match plastic laminate (do
        not use clear or white caulking).
   1.6 Science chemistry laboratory countertops in Junior / Senior High chemistry labs only to
        be 19mm monolithic tops.
   1.7 Cabinet hardware to be as follows:
       1.10.1 Cabinet locks: keyed alike within each room.
       1.10.2 Hinges: Hettich Selekta 2000 series.
       1.10.3 Door pulls: stainless steel ‘D’ style wire pull.
       1.10.4 Door catches: on pairs of locked cabinet doors, magnetic not acceptable.
   1.8 Standard millwork units and typical details to be used. Reference Drawings ST-1 to ST-
        20 in B6, may be modified slightly to suit site conditions.
   1.9 Millwork along exterior walls which will cover radiation to be detailed to have grilles at
        kick space and at countertop, to allow air flow through fins. The existing metal cabinets
        must be removed prior to installation. Access panels to be provided at each valve
        location.
   1.10 Millwork at mechanical univent locations to be fabricated to allow complete removal of
        the top section over the univent for servicing, as well as the front panel for filter access.
        Grilles are required in top and in front to match univent grille size.
Design Guidelines                                                                           B2
Calgary Board of Education                                    General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 3 of 14


Section 07500                   SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing
1. General
   1.1 Specify a two-ply fully adhered SBS modified bitumen membrane Roofing System, 180
        base sheet hot mopped in asphalt, 250 granulated cap sheet and membrane flashings
        torch applied. Colour of cap sheet not to be black or other dark colour.
   1.2 Materials and their application must conform to the minimum requirements of ARCA
        Warranty limited’s 5 year warranty as outlined in the Manual of Good Roofing Practice
        and Accepted Roofing Systems.
   1.3 Specify either a 4 year (2+2) Maintenance bond or the ARCA 5 year warranty be
        provided.
   1.4 High traffic areas to be protected with an extra layer of walkway cap sheet of a different
        colour or shade than the field cap sheet.
   1.5 Sloped EPS insulation to be installed below the primary insulation.
   1.6 Provide curbs at all roof penetrations except drains and as support for roof-mounted
        equipment, do not specify pedestals. Curbs and parapet walls to extend a minimum of
        200mm above height of finished membrane as per A.I.
   1.7 Tops of parapet walls to include 19mm plywood blocking with a minimum 1:12 slope to
        roof.
   1.8 Metal flashings to be 0.455mm (26 gauge) prefinished sheet steel with a maximum
        length of 2400mm hem exposed edges. Wall flashings with an exposed height greater
        than 400mm to be cross-broken and have a maximum length of 1200mm. All joints to
        have S-locks or standing seams.
   1.9 Specify that gum cups be filled with rubberized asphalt compound. Protrusions through
        the gum cup to be pipe or EMT with a minimum 50mm clearance on all sides, and
        extend a minimum of 75mm above the top of the gum cup.
   1.10 1Down spouts to be 100mm X 100mm commercial grade prefinished sheet steel and
        drain onto concrete splash pads at ground level and onto 1m X 1m walkway cap sheet
        at roof level.
   1.11 Sleepers shall be engineered. Wood sleepers will not be accepted.
   1.12 The Prime Contractor shall notify AES project manager and the appointed roofing
        Inspector 48 hours prior to:
       1.12.1 Delivery of roofing materials to site.
       1.12.2 Disruption of an existing roofing system.
       1.12.3 Start or restart of installation of new roofing system.
       1.12.4 Application of changes in the scope of work.
       1.12.5 Roof system being ready for final inspection.
   1.13 Insulation to be “Polyisocyanurate” 4’ X 4’ sheets, 5.4” thickness – 2 layers of 2.7”
        thickness, reference A3, Section 3.5 Energy Management.
   1.14 Expanded or extruded polystyrene will be considered as an Alternative for Mechanically
        Fastened Systems, but thickness to be increased to maintain equivalent ‘R’ value.
       Firestone        ISO 95+
       Atlas            AC Foam
       Celotex          HY-Therm A.P.
       or preapproved equivalent.
   1.15 Sealant to be one (1) part urethane Sonneborm N.P.I., Sternson R.C.I. or preapproved
        equivalent.
Design Guidelines                                                                             B2
Calgary Board of Education                                      General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 4 of 14


Section 08100                    Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
1. General
   1.1 Pressed steel frames to be specified as “fully welded”, 1.52mm metal core thickness
       (16ga), zinc coated. All welds to be prime painted. Knock down frames not acceptable.
   1.2 All steel frames with Automatic door operators specified for them must have additional
       reinforcement installed in the header to prevent sagging of the header due to the
       additional weight and pressure exerted by the operator.
   1.3 Pressed steel frames to be used for all doorframes, sidelights and for interior glazing
       frames.
   1.4 Fixed mullions to be used at all exterior entrances except two (2) used for deliveries.
       One of the following - Von Duprin KR4954, KR4854 OR KR9854 - mullions are to be
       installed for these entrances. One (1) of these entrances is to be the gymnasium exit
       door. Reference B2, Architectural Section 08700 Finish Hardware.
   1.5 Hollow metal doors to be used for interior locations requiring ¾ or 1½ hour ULC labels
       only are specified as 16 gauge steel stiffened (the reinforcing ribs to be glued in with
       epoxy), full seam welded with a welded top cap. All doors shall be reinforced for full
       mortise continuous hinges (Hager 780-112HD), LCN 4041 Series Door Closers or LCN
       4631 Door Operators and for a Von Duprin 98 Series Exit Device or such other latching
       hardware as specified. All doors to be a minimum of 3’0” X 7’0” X 1¾”.
   1.6 Hollow metal doors to be used for exterior entrances are to be specified as 16 gauge
       steel stiffened (the reinforcing ribs to be glued in with epoxy), full seam welded with a
       welded top cap, insulated with fibreglass insulation. All doors shall be reinforced for full
       mortise continuous hinges LCN 4041 series door closers or LCN 4642 door operators
       and for a Von Duprin 98 series exit device or such other latching hardware as specified.
       All doors to be a minimum of 3’0” X 7’0” X 1¾”.

Section 08200                    Wood Doors & Frames
1. General
   1.1 Interior wood doors to be flush type, laminated strand cores and single, three-ply skins,
       birch face veneer for clear finish.
   1.2 Provide half lite glazing to doors for offices, conference rooms or classrooms which do
       not have glazed sidelights.
   1.3 Wood doors to be used at all interior locations not requiring a ULC label over 20
       minutes. (Hollow metal doors to be used at locations requiring ¾ or 1½ hour ULC labels;
       reference B2, Architectural Section 08100 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames.)
   1.4 Particleboard, mineral or gypsum core doors are not acceptable.
   1.5 All doors to be 900mm wide X 2150mm high X 45mm thick standard size for new
       construction.

Section 08500                    Windows
1. General
   1.1 Aluminum windows with continuous thermal break to be specified.
   1.2 Glazing to be factory double glazed sealed units 6mm float glass, both panes with 13mm
       air space, 25mm overall thickness. For solar heat gain control, tint, argon filled, low e
       glass may be used.
   1.3 Venting windows (top hung projecting out type).
   1.4 As an Alternative to venting windows, “Kawneer 512 Ventrow” sections may be
       considered.
   1.5 Provide in O&M Manuals an as-built window schedule listing all glass sizes and tints for
       each windowpane.
Design Guidelines                                                                              B2
Calgary Board of Education                                       General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 5 of 14


Section 08600                     Skylights
1. General
   1.1 Aluminum framed skylights with continuous thermal break to be specified.
   1.2 Glazing to be insulating tinted units with outer pane fully tempered and inner pane
       laminated.
   1.3 Size of skylights to be limited for maintenance access, maximum diagonal run of
       3600mm.
   1.4 Curved glass in skylights is not acceptable.

Section 08700                     Finish Hardware
1. General
   1.1 Only one (1) exterior entrance door is to be keyed. The street entrance where the Fire
        Alarm Annunciator Panel is located is the only door to have mechanical (keyed cylinder)
        means of access. This door is to be keyed to a Schlage 20-057WUSQ cylinder. The
        CBE lock shop will replace this with a Fire Department access cylinder, supplied by the
        CBE, after turn over of the building.
   1.2 Avoid the use of Vertical Rod Exit Devices. Specify Von Duprin KR4954, KR4854 or
        KR9854 keyed removable mullions for use on pairs of doors requiring exit hardware,
        where a fixed mullion cannot be used, to allow for deliveries at two (2) entrances, one
        (1) being the gymnasium exit These mullions are to be keyed to a Schlage
        interchangeable core cylinder (usually a 26-091WUSQ).
   1.3 All interior locks and outside storage / service room locks to be specified with cylinders
        keyed to Schlage QUAD key system (either WUSQ, WUSR or WUTS keyways), 6 pin,
        "0" pinned with at least one (1) #2 Top pin. Cylinders for panic hardware, removable
        mullions, key switches, dead bolt locks, security grilles, etc., to be Schlage
        interchangeable core cylinders. Cylinders to be delivered to CBE lock shop, for keying
        prior to installation. Keyed cylinders will be returned to site for installation by contractor.
        Two (2) keys are to be supplied with each cylinder.
   1.4 The hardware supplier must provide a copy of the final hardware schedule to CBE lock
        shop, specifying type of lock cylinder required for each door for cylinder keying
        purposes.
   1.5 All elevator call switches to be controlled by the SIELOX Electronic Access Control
        System. All keyed electric switches that control security grilles, basketball backstops,
        computer power shut down switches, industrial arts power emergency shut down
        switches, etc., are to be either Allan Bradley or Locknetics 653 series switches. Refer to
        B2, Architectural Section 08700 Finish Hardware.
   1.6 Mortise locksets to be used for renovations and for new construction in Junior / Senior
        High schools, Schlage 'L” series, 626 finish, with 06N trim (Schlage “ND” series
        acceptable for Elementary schools only) as follows:
       L9040S        Privacy function (use on washrooms (in areas without public access such as
                     within staffrooms, medical rooms, etc.).
       L9070P        Use on storage closets. When used for gymnasium storage rooms, specify
                     L9070L X 06B X 626 inside trim only and SMX-PH401x 26D drop ring pull.
       L9080P        Storage room function (use on all classrooms, mechanical and electrical rooms,
                     facility operator offices, stations, and storage rooms, entrance doors, etc. When
                     using for gymnasium storage specify L9080L X 06B X 626 inside trim only and
                     SMX-PH401 X 26D drop ring pull.
       L9456P        Office function (use on offices staff rooms, conference rooms, etc.).
       L9466P        Store / utility function (use on connecting doors between classrooms).
       L9486P        Hotel function (use on all staff washrooms and corridor entrances).
       L9486P X L583-375            Privacy function (use on staff washrooms with access from
                     corridor, barrier free washrooms).
Design Guidelines                                                                           B2
Calgary Board of Education                                    General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 6 of 14


   1.7 Outside gymnasium storage room / service room lockset to be Schlage B66OR X 626 X
        2¾” B.S. with a standard metal H415/H416 pull plate on both sides.
   1.8 Panic hardware to be either Von Duprin 98 series or Sargent 8800 series hardware with
        Hex key dogging at non-fire rated doors, US26D brushed chrome finish or preapproved
        equal.
       1.8.1 Von Duprin
               Add the “EL” prefix to the exit devices specified for the exterior to main entrance
               vestibule and main entrance vestibule to corridor doors. Each of these devices is
               to be controlled by a Von Duprin momentary contact switch installed on a Von
               Duprin DC2004 Console located on the administrative secretary’s desk. The exit
               device installed on the barrier free access door must have the prefix “EL LX”.
               This door is to be controlled by the maintain switch on the console located on the
               administrative secretary’s desk and by the barrier free door operator. The inside
               actuator switches when activated will activate the EL solenoid on the exit device
               and the door operator to allow egress from the building.
               Von Duprin 996L R&V trim is an acceptable alternative to Von Duprin 994L R&V
               trim.
               Add the “LX” prefix to the appropriate exit device function (e.g. LX98NL-OP X
               110MD-RHR) when used to control the Barrier Free door operator’s exterior
               actuator.
           1.8.1.1 98EO Exit only function (no trim).
           1.8.1.2 98NL X OP (SM 3215-3 X 32D) Night latch function with offset pull.
           1.8.1.3 98L X 994L-R (Thumb Pull Function) with standard function break-away
                     lever trim.
           1.8.1.4 9875L X 994L-M Mortised set with break-away lever "NOT FOR
                     EXTERIOR EXITS".
           1.8.1.5 CX98EO-RCM Controlled exit device (use on exit doors from library,
                     shops, computer rooms, some double egress doors, etc.).
       Appropriate Power Supply such as PS873-KL to be supplied with each Chex-it Device.
       **Vertical Rod Exit Devices are not to be used unless absolutely necessary.**
           1.8.1.6 9827EO Vertical Rod Exit Only.
           1.8.1.7 9827L X 994L-V Vertical Rod Exit Device with break-away lever standard
                     function trim.
           1.8.1.8 9827L – LBR X 994L-V Vertical Rod Exit Device Less Bottom Rod –
                     Preferred Device where Security is not a priority.
           1.8.1.9 KR4854 X SP28 Keyed Removable Mullion, prepped for a Von Duprin
                     6111 electric strike and one Von Duprin 299 strike (indicate handing for the
                     electric strike, RHR whenever possible). When used on the security
                     entrance doors, the electric strike and pull handle should be located on the
                     RHR door. When used on the barrier free access entrance, the electric
                     strike must be specified for the same leaf as the door operator was
                     specified for. The electric strike is powered by the door operator.
           1.8.1.10 KR4954 X SP28 Keyed Removable Mullion (Used on non-rated sets of
                     double doors where Removable Mullions are required).
           1.8.1.11 KR9854 X SP28 Keyed Removable Mullion (For Rated sets of double
                     doors where Removable Mullions are required).
           1.8.1.12 KR9854 (LH/RH) X SP28 Keyed Removable Mullion: Prepped for a Von
                     Duprin 6111 Electric Strike and one (1) 499-F Strike (indicate Handing for
                     Electric Strike). When used on the security entrance doors, the Strike,
                     keyed cylinder and pull handle should be located on the RHR door. This
                     mullion should also be installed on sets of double doors where barrier free
                     access is required. The electric strike would be located on the same leaf
                     that the door operator would control and the strike shall be powered by the
                     door operator.
           1.8.1.13 Von Duprin's 'RG-27' Guard shall be installed to protect the bottom rod of
                     all Vertical Rod Exit Devices.
Design Guidelines                                                                             B2
Calgary Board of Education                                      General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 7 of 14


             1.8.1.14 Add suffix “F” for fire rated panic hardware. The suffix "LBR" (Less Bottom
                        Rod) to be added to all fire rated Vertical Rod Exit Devices.
    1.9 The KR9854 Keyed removable mullion, prepped to accept the appropriate electric strike
         on one (1) side and the appropriate standard strike on the other side, is to be used on
         sets of double doors where the electronic access has been specified.
    1.10 Barrier free doors at vestibules to operate by actuator from either side of door. The
         exterior barrier free doors are to operate by actuator from either side of the door, when
         the panic bar is dogged down. When the exterior door is locked the exterior actuator is
         to be inoperable, but the interior actuator is to be tied into an electric strike to operate
         the door allowing exiting.
        1.10.1 Barrier Free Access Entrance Door Operators
             1.10.1.1 LCN4642 X 120V Series Auto Equalizer Door Operator is used for the
                        exterior entrance door.
             1.10.1.2 LCN4631 X 120v series Auto-Equalizer Door Operator is used for the
                        interior vestibule entrance door.
        Note: Operators must work sequentially with
             1.10.1.3 LCN7910-956 Actuator and the LCN7910-972-4 Escutcheon, two (2)
                        Actuators for each operator).
             1.10.1.4 A Folger Adams 310-4-24V strike or a Von Duprin 6111-24V strike is to be
                        used to allow the door operator to bypass the latch when the doors are
                        secured and the inside actuator is activated. The electric strikes are wired
                        through the LX / RX exit device to allow the inside buttons only to activate
                        the electric strike.
        Note A LCN931 RF receiver with 2-903 transmitters should be considered for use to
        actuate exterior doors that have to be secured because they are not easily supervised
        by office staff.
    1.11 Door Closers are to be LCN 4041 X Alum Super Smoothee Series or preapproved
         equal.
        1.11.1 4041 REG            Used in locations where a 4041 EDA would be inappropriate
        1.11.2 4041 EDA            Parallel Arm (Extra Duty Arm)
        1.11.3 P4041H EDA Parallel Arm with Hold Open function
        1.11.4 4041DA EDA Parallel Arm with Delayed Action (for Barrier Free Washrooms)
        1.11.5 4041SCUSH Parallel Arm Spring Cushion Stop
        1.11.6 4041H-CUSH Parallel Arm Hold Open Cushion Stop
        1.11.7 4041S-HCUSH Parallel Arm Hold Open
    1.12 Electronic hold open / closers: 4314ME-SF X 24V.
        1.12.1 Opens 180º and holds open from 90º to 160º.
    1.13 Magnetic hold open devices to be Rixson 993 high-hold wall magnetic.
    1.14 Door Stops: Wall-mounted preferred, overhead type can be used where wall mounting
         not possible. (Avoid floor-mounted type.)
    1.15 WB33 Wall-mounted (near top of door).
    1.16 G90 Series Surface-Mounted Heavy Duty Overhead.
    1.17 SMX209P Pipe Stop for Exterior Doors. (Note: should also be indicated on drawings.)
    1.18 Flush Bolts to be Manual Flush Bolts for wood and metal doors. (Avoid automatic flush
         bolts.)
    1.19 Fire Department key lock boxes are to be supplied and installed by the CBE lock shop.

Section 08740                    Electronic Access
1. General
   1.1 SIELOX Electronic Access System is to be included for new school construction and any
       major construction renovation. One (1) entrance, the staff entrance / security entrance,
       where the security alarm panel is located to be provided with an access control system
       that utilizes a proximity / smart card reader and an electric strike (24V), except as
       specified in Section 08700.7, wired to a terminal controller that is to be located in the
       data Room. Rough-in of the conduit and boxes is to be included in the electrical scope.
       A second door for access to and from the playfields is also required to be electronically
Design Guidelines                                                                             B2
Calgary Board of Education                                      General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 8 of 14


          accessed using the SIELOX Electronic Access System. Confirm with the AES project
          manager.
    1.2   This controlled exit / entrance door shall be secured using a panic device, (reference B2,
          Architectural Section 08700 Finish Hardware) and an electric strike (either Von Duprin or
          Folger Adams 12V, Fail Secure), with quick connect / disconnect wiring blocks. Handle
          shall be installed on the active door (door using electric strike).
    1.3   Each site will be controlled from the main electrical / data room.
    1.4   The electronic locking system on the vestibule to main office door is separate from the
          electric access system. This door is to have an electric strike that is powered by its own
          power supply and is to be controlled by a maintain switch that is located on a Von Duprin
          DC2004 console to be located on the administrative secretary’s desk.
    1.5   All other exterior doors would be manually locked / unlocked.

Section 08800                    Glass & Glazing
1. General
   1.1 Glass for doors, sidelights and transoms, at exterior entrances to be 6mm wired or
       laminated glass, double-glazed sealed units.
   1.2 Glass for interior glazing in high student traffic areas to be 6mm wired or tempered
       glass.
   1.3 Sidelights and door glazing should not extend below 400mm above floor level.

Section 09510                    Acoustic Unit Ceilings
1. General
   1.1 Specify 610mm X 1220mm (Imperial size 24” X 48”) T-bar Grid Suspension system.
   1.2 T-bar grid suspension components to be 25mm (1”) width. 12mm (½”) width grid is not
       acceptable.
   1.3 Acoustic lay-in tiles to be non-directional fissured, non-asbestos, white in colour for
       maximum reflectance.
   1.4 Tile to be square edge. “Tegular” edge tile is not acceptable.
   1.5 Layout of Grid System to be coordinated closely with mechanical and electrical
       consultants. Ensure that cut tiles at wall are minimum 300mm (12”) width; small pieces
       are not acceptable.
   1.6 Do not use acoustic tile vertically in bulkheads.
   1.7 For lunchroom or cafeteria kitchens, specify vinyl faced gypsum board panels be utilized
       in place of acoustic tile in the grid system.

Section 09640                    Wood Flooring
1. General
   1.1 Wood strip flooring for gymnasium to be used over concrete slab, provide floor drain
        near exit doors if gymnasium is below grade. “Robbins Bio-Star Wood Floor System”
        DIN 18032-2 Performance Certified System to be specified for Senior High schools.
        “Robbins Bio-Cushion Classic Wood Floor System to be specified for Elementary and
        Junior High schools.
   1.2 Alternate Wood Floor Systems may be considered provided they are fully DIN 18032-2
        Performance Certified for Elementary, Junior / Senior High schools and meet or exceed
        DIN 18032-2 criteria for ball bounce, shock absorption, deflection and surface friction.
       1.2.1 Cover concrete slab with polyethylene membrane, lapping joints 100mm, and
               seal with mastic. Turn edges up 50mm. Slab depression 63mm (21/2”).
       1.2.2 Strip Flooring: 25/32" thick X 57mm face widths, second and better grade in
               accordance with MFMA or CLA standards, random lengths, T&G and EM, KD,
               MFMA or CLA Northern Hard Maple species, kiln dried to a maximum moisture
               content of 7%; each bundle stamped by manufacturer and bearing the MFMA or
               CLA mill grading mark.
       1.2.3 Maintain 25mm expansion void at end walls and 40mm expansion void at side
               walls of gymnasium.
Design Guidelines                                                                             B2
Calgary Board of Education                                      General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 9 of 14


        1.2.4    Sand and apply finish "School Board Gymnasium Floor Finish ". (Bowling Alley
                 supplied by Paint Direct or Bona Kemi supplied by Goodfellow.) Allow two (2)
                 days minimum curing time.
        1.2.5 Install 50mm X 100mm X 6mm hard rubber vented base. Ventcore or equal
                 mechanically fastened.
    1.3 For Elementary school gymnasium or Junior / Senior High school auxiliary gymnasium
         only, composite floorings (equal to Robbins Pulastic DG, DIN 18032 Performance
         Certified, distributed by Centaur Products Inc.) will be considered as an alternate for the
         wood strip flooring in gymnasiums.

Section 09650                    Resilient Flooring
1. General
   1.1 PVC sheet flooring 2.0mm thickness is preferred for high traffic areas. Specify “Factory”
        polyurethane sealed and contractor to apply three (3) coats of floor finish using products
        in accordance with manufactures specifications.
   1.2 Linoleum, 2000mm sheet width, 2.0mm thickness hot welded seam installation can be
        considered. Adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. Contractor to apply one (1)
        coat sealer and three (3) coats of floor finish using products in accordance with
        manufacturer’s specifications.
   1.3 Specify VCT to be 305mm X 305mm X 3mm thick to CSA A126.1 – M1984. Adhesive to
        be ”Roberts 3057 Floor Tile Adhesive” (Clear Thin-Spread).
   1.4 Vinyl composite tile is also acceptable as flooring on concrete slabs for classrooms,
        storage areas, offices and washrooms.
   1.5 Vinyl corlon may be used as an alternate to VCT and is preferred on wood floor
        systems.
   1.6 Rubber base to be black molded rubber cove base, 100mm high X 3.2mm thick to CSA
        A126.5 – 87. Coloured base is not acceptable.
   1.7 Stair treads to have heavy-duty molded rubber treads, diamond pattern, reinforced
        nosing. Treads to be full width of stair in one (1) piece.
   1.8 Ramp surfaces to have rubber flooring.
   1.9 Ensure specification adequately describes “floor preparation” for type of subfloor, both
        for concrete or wood, new and existing.
   1.10 Existing flooring to be removed prior to installation of new (do not install over existing),
        glue removal, patching and preparation will be required. Reference B2, Architectural
        Section 13280 Asbestos Control for removal of asbestos containing material flooring.
   1.11 Specify a minimum of an extra ten (10) m2 of each colour and type of flooring be
        provided for future maintenance use.

Section 09680                    Carpeting
1. General
   1.1 Carpet to be specified as 900 g/m2 (28 oz/sq. yd.), 100% nylon, solution dyed, level
       loop, woven polypropylene backing, direct glue down installation.
   1.2 Specify a minimum of an extra ten (10) m2 of each colour of carpet to be provided for
       future maintenance use.
   1.3 Ensure specification adequately describes “floor preparation” for type of subfloor, both
       for concrete or wood, new and existing.
   1.4 Existing flooring to be removed prior to installation of new (do not install over existing),
       glue removal, patching and preparation will be required. Reference B2, Architectural
       Section 13280 Asbestos Control for removal of asbestos containing material flooring.

Section 09900                    Painting
1. General
   1.1 All painting to be in accordance with the “Master Painters Institute” (MPI) Specification
       Manual “Premium Grade” finish.
   1.2 Concrete block and gypsum board to have paint finish using oil base paint, primer and
       two (2) coat application for new construction or a two (2) coat application over existing
       painted surfaces in renovations (when painting is completed at times School is closed).
Design Guidelines                                                                           B2
Calgary Board of Education                                    General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 10 of 14


    1.3 During School term, painting to be done using acrylic latex paint, approved
         manufacturers:
        1.3.1 General Paints             “Envirogard”
        1.3.2 Colours Unlimited          "Sico"
        1.3.3 Cloverdale                 “Ecologic”.
    1.4 Finish:
        1.4.1 Ceilings                   Flat
        1.4.2 Walls                      Semi-gloss
        1.4.3 Doors, Frames, Trim        Semi-gloss.
    1.5 Exterior Metal Siding:
        1.5.1 The following is the procedure for painting new or existing prefinished exterior
                metal siding:
            1.5.1.1 Sand prefinished siding to remove gloss finish;
            1.5.1.2 Clean with TSP solution and rinse;
            1.5.1.3 Apply one (1) coat of Cloverdale 70413 Ecologic DTM Enamel (“Direct to
                   Metal”) latex as per manufacturer’s recommendations; and
            1.5.1.4 Light sand and apply finish coats.
    1.6 Existing exterior paint may contain lead and should be investigated as part of the
         Hazardous Materials Assessment.

Section 10100                   Whiteboards & Tackboards
1. General
   1.1 Tack boards to be 12.7mm thick fibreboard with 464g/m2 vinyl fabric, pressure
        laminated. Pattern and colour from manufacturer’s standard range. Frame and trim clear
        anodized aluminum finish. (No coloured trim.)
   1.2 Whiteboards to be 11mm fibreboard core with 0.1mm thick aluminum foil backing and
        fired vitreous porcelain two (2) coat enamel on 0.6mm thick sheet steel writing surface,
        pressure bonded to form a composite laminated panel. Frame and trim clear anodized
        aluminum finish. Penrails single thickness profile, end corners rounded and smooth (no
        penrail in gymnasiums or activity rooms), map rails with cork inset and one (1) metal
        map hook per 400mm length.
   1.3 Reference B2, Architectural Section 13280 Asbestos Control for requirements for
        removal of existing chalkboards containing asbestos, when replacing with new
        whiteboards.
   1.4 Initial cleaning of whiteboards to be specified to ensure proper erasure as follows:
       1.4.1 Clean with any liquid ammonia added cleaner and rinse with clear water, then
                 dry.
       1.4.2 Washing of boards to be done similar to window washing with a sponge and
                 squeegee.
   1.5 Whiteboard and tack board mounting heights above finished floor level to bottom of
        board as follows:
       1.5.1 Elementary          800mm
       1.5.2 Junior High         850mm
       1.5.3 Senior High         900mm.

Section 10162                   Metal Toilet Partitions
1. General
   1.1 Toilet partitions to be overhead braced models.
   1.2 Side panels and doors, two (2) sheets 0.7mm thick (22ga) steel bonded to honeycomb
       core, panel thickness 32mm.
   1.3 Boy’s washrooms in Junior / Senior High schools only, core material to be plywood at
       doors and side panels around perimeter (not required between cubicles).
   1.4 Hardware: Adjustable door hinges, door latch heavy-duty surface slide model latch, all
       hardware fastened with tamperproof screws and bolts.
   1.5 A stainless steel splashguard to be laminated to side of panels adjacent to urinals.
   1.6 Ensure solid backing is provided where partitions mount to walls and ceilings.
Design Guidelines                                                                           B2
Calgary Board of Education                                    General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 11 of 14




Section 10350                   Flagpoles
1. General
   1.1 Flagpole: One (1) aluminum, 10m height, cone-tapered, tilting flagpole to be provided.
       Satin brush finish. Internal stainless steel Cable Halyard System. Plastic links not
       acceptable.
   1.2 Designed so that it can be lowered for maintenance by one (1) person.

Section 10400                   Signage
1. General
   1.1 Interior signage, as required by code and as listed to be provided in the contract.
   1.2 Signs to be reverse engraved or reverse painted, 3mm thick plastic signs.
   1.3 Signs to be fastened to wall or door with tamperproof screws.
   1.4 Provide all Washroom Signs, incorporating both symbols and names for
       1.4.1 Girls,
       1.4.2 Boys,
       1.4.3 Staff M / F Washrooms, and
       1.4.4 Wheelchair Symbol at Barrier Free Washrooms.
   1.5 Provide all Service Room Signs including,
       1.5.1 Mechanical,
       1.5.2 Electrical,
       1.5.3 Communications,
       1.5.4 Storage, and
       1.5.5 Facility Operations.
   1.6 Balance of interior signs for instructional spaces, administrative spaces, etc., to be
        provided separately under furniture and equipment following turn over of the project.
   1.7 For modernization projects, review and indicate in contract documents if existing
        signage is to be salvaged for reinstallation.
   1.8 Exterior signage to be provided in the contract, cast aluminium, lettering, mounted on
        the front of the school near the main entrance. Exterior signage to read:
       1.8.1      “Name of School”: 300mm high, upper case, Helvetica Medium Font
       1.8.2 “Calgary Board of Education”: 250mm high, upper and lower case, Times Roman
                 Font.
       1.8.3 Clear finish preferred, colour to contrast with exterior building finishes.
       1.8.4 The Calgary Board of Education Logo may also be provided as determined by
                 the AES project manager.
       1.8.5 School name lettering to be located high enough (minimum 3000mm) to be out of
                 reach from the ground to reduce vandalism from hockey sticks, etc.
   1.9 Parking lot and traffic signs as required by regulations are to be provided in the contract
        including: Barrier Free Parking Stall Signs, Visitor Parking Stall Signs, No Parking Sign
        in front of Garbage Enclosure and Traffic Control Signage if required by Development
        Permit.
       1.9.1 Balance of parking stall names or numbers to be provided separately under
                 furniture and equipment following turn over of the project.

Section 10500                   Metal Lockers
1. General
   1.1 All lockers to be 381mm wide X 380mm deep X 1830mm high, vented type.
   1.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Shanahans Ltd., Hadrian, Hovik, general storage systems or
       preapproved equal.
   1.3 Single tier lockers to have two (2) 1.52mm thick steel shelves at the top, spaced 355mm
       apart, fastened to locker on both sides and back.
   1.4 Single and double tier lockers to have three (3) garment hooks pop riveted, one (1) per
       side each compartment.
   1.5 Six (6) tier lockers to be used in change rooms (instead of tote boxes).
Design Guidelines                                                                            B2
Calgary Board of Education                                     General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 12 of 14


    1.6 High School “Team Room” lockers to be 450mm wide X 530mm deep X 1830mm high.
    1.7 Locker doors to be 1.52mm thick metal outer sheet, 0.7mm inner sheet, with laminated
         honeycomb core. Doors flush to 1.52mm thick locker frame and must have continuous
         built-in doorstop.
    1.8 Handle / pull box to be chrome plated steel or aluminum. Plastic not acceptable.
    1.9 Hinges to be 1.52mm thick (16 gauge) steel continuous hinges or 5 knuckle 2.0mm thick
         (14 gauge) hinges with non-removable pins, three (3) per door for single tier and two (2)
         per door for double and six (6) tier lockers.
    1.10 Use plywood curb and rubber base, not metal bases. (Change Room curbs to be
         preservative treated plywood or concrete.)
    1.11 Lockers to be recessed or be provided with sloped tops and finished end panels.

Section 10800                   Washroom Accessories
1. General
   1.1 Consultant to provide a schedule of all accessories required (includes soap and paper
        towels at classroom / staff room sinks as well).
   1.2 CBE will supply washroom accessories, installation to be included in the contract;
        coordinate locations with the AES project manager. The following surface-mounted
        accessories will be supplied:
       1.2.1 Paper Towel Dispenser: One (1) per washroom and one (1) for each sink in
                classroom, staff rooms, etc.
       1.2.2 Electric hand dryers may be purchased for student washrooms; include electrical
                rough-in in the contract.
       1.2.3 Soap Dispenser: One (1) per two (2) sinks
       1.2.4 Toilet Paper Dispenser: One (1) per toilet
       1.2.5 Sanitary Napkin Dispenser: One (1) per female washroom
       1.2.6 Sanitary Napkin Disposal: One (1) per female toilet stall.
   1.3 Specify grab bars to barrier free toilets and urinals as required to suit accessible
        standards.
   1.4 Specify 450mm X 750mm stainless steel framed mirrors, minimum one (1) per
        washroom, two (2) if barrier free stall provided, one (1) mounted lower to suit accessible
        standards. Not tilting type.
   1.5 Ensure solid backing is provided where accessories are mounted on gypsum board
        partitions.

Section 11060                   Stage Curtains
1. General
   1.1 Products noted in this Section are based on Quality Stage Draperies Track Systems and
        Fabrics, other manufacturer’s equivalent products are acceptable with approval of AES
        Project Manager.
   1.2 Cyclorama Drapery
       1.2.1 Track System to be Quality Stage Drapery “SWITCHIT” #403, hand walk
               operation or equivalent. Check installation height limit.
       1.2.2 Rollers are to be steel wheel rollers.
       1.2.3 Curtains to be “Provost” Black Non-reflective / light absorbing finish. Flame
               resistance to NFPA 701.
   1.3 Proscenium Curtains:
       1.3.1 Track System to be Quality Stage Drapery Model 700 or equivalent, with pulley
               and cord operation. Model 700 operates in straight run.
       1.3.2 Rollers to be Quality Stage Drapery #706 Ball Bearing Carriers. Master Carrier to
               be #711 Ball Bearing Master Carrier.
       1.3.3 Curtain to be 100% Trevira Polyester IFR (Quality Stage Drapery Model
               “CAMBRIDGE”). Flame resistance to NFPA 701.
   1.4 Curtain tracks to be suspended from structure, blocking or deck, not fastened to
        suspended ceilings or drywall.
Design Guidelines                                                                             B2
Calgary Board of Education                                      General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 13 of 14




Section 11480                    Gymnasium Equipment
1. General
   1.1 Products noted in this Section on based on Royal Stewart Ltd. Products, other
       manufacturer’s equivalent products are acceptable with prior approval of AES project
       manager.
   1.2 Gymnasium divider, vertical style, fabric to be vinyl coated, matte finish with all electrical
       spring loaded key switch controls, keyed to Allan Bradley 800T limits and safeties.
   1.3 Basketball backstops, 25mm plywood backboard, or 38mm high-density particleboard
       with inserts, rectangular shaped complete with hoops.
   1.4 Main Court: One (1) ceiling-mounted (Stage end if applicable), plus one (1) wall-
       mounted. Ceiling-mounted unit electrically operated with an Allan Bradley 800T series
       key switch, with adjustable frame No. C-866 in elementary schools.
   1.5 Cross Courts: Four (4) wall-mounted. Wall-mounted units, side fold manually operated
       No. 859HD with C-866 manually adjustable frame in elementary schools.
   1.6 Gymnasium Floor Inserts for volleyball and badminton for floating floors, Royal Steward
       Ltd. RS-108 sockets or equal. Locate as per CBE Gymnasium Floor Gameline Layout,
       contact AES.

Section 11600                    Laboratory Equipment
1. General
   1.1 Acids Storage Cabinet
       1.1.1 Metal Acids / Corrosives Storage Cabinets to be specified for Junior / Middle /
             Senior High science preparation rooms to be included in contract.
       1.1.2 Cabinets to be 1120mm high X 1090mm wide X 460mm deep, with upper and
             lower baffled vent connections 50mm (2”) standard pipe fittings. Prefinished blue
             epoxy paint.
   1.2 Flammables Storage Cabinet
       1.2.1 Flammable Material Storage Cabinets to be specified for Junior / Middle / Senior
             High science preparation rooms to be included in contract.
       1.2.2 Cabinets to be 1120mm high X 1090 wide X 460 deep, with upper and lower
             baffled vent connections 50mm (2”) pipe fittings. Prefinished yellow enamel.

Section 12490                    Blinds
1. General
   1.1 Blinds to be provided for all exterior windows only. Blinds on interior glazing are the
       responsibility of the school from their furniture and equipment budget (do not include in
       contract).
   1.2 25mm horizontal blinds with braided ladder and tilt rods to be used in office areas.
   1.3 50mm blinds with 50mm cotton twill tape and tilt cords to be used in classrooms and
       other student areas.
   1.4 High clerestory window blinds (such as in libraries) to have electric switch control, if
       applicable.
   1.5 Roller shades are an option. Consult with the AES project manager.

Section 13280                    Asbestos Control
1. General
   1.1 The renovation or additions to existing schools may be impacted by the presence of
       asbestos. Contact AES project manager or safety services for information from the
       Asbestos database reports on file.
   1.2 A copy of the “Safety Services Project Checklist” Form (Appendix 5) to be submitted
       during design development.
   1.3 Additional bulk sampling and analysis to be conducted by an Asbestos consultant for all
       projects where asbestos may be encountered to identify all asbestos materials.
   1.4 In all cases removal or management of asbestos is to be included in the scope of work
       for all projects.
Design Guidelines                                                                           B2
Calgary Board of Education                                    General Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 14 of 14


   1.5 Asbestos contractor to submit a copy of all Alberta Human Resources and Employment
        Asbestos Project Notification Forms and corresponding Acknowledgments for all
        projects prior to the start of any asbestos work. Asbestos Project Notification Forms
        should list as contact for owner of work site: Supervisor, Indoor Environmental Quality,
        Central Facility Services, phone: 403-214-1174, fax: 403-777-6003.
   1.6 The Asbestos Contractor is to ensure all employees working on this project have
        successfully completed an Asbestos Course of Instruction approved by a Director of
        Occupational Hygiene. Proof of successful completion of this course for each employee
        is to be sent to AES and Safety Services.
   1.7 The Asbestos Consultant to complete and submit a “Safety Services Asbestos Database
        Update Report” Form (Appendix 5) upon completion of the work.
   1.8 The Asbestos contractor will ensure that all acts, codes, regulations and guidelines
        regarding Asbestos abatement in the province of Alberta are strictly adhered to, as well
        as any CBE policies and procedures.
   1.9 Architects to provide a letter certifying that no asbestos containing materials were
        utilized in the project.
   1.10 Provide a note on Demolition Drawings (including Mechanical and Electrical) to read:
        "Demolition of any asbestos containing material can be hazardous to health.” Should
        material suspected of containing asbestos be encountered in the course of the work,
        stop work and notify the owner's representative immediately. Do not proceed until written
        instructions have been issued.
   1.11 Include in the specifications that the prime contractor shall develop a written “Hazardous
        Materials Information” plan to ensure that all persons at the work site are made aware of
        the existence of any hazardous materials such as asbestos lead-based products, and
        PCB’s and precautions to be taken. The prime contractor shall implement the written
        plan. The prime contractor shall also develop a written “Hazardous Materials Emergency
        Plan” for unplanned / uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials. The prime
        contractor shall educate all persons that may be at the work site of the presence of
        hazardous materials, precautions to take and the emergency plan.
   1.12 The prime contractor shall supply a copy of the Hazardous Material Information and
        Hazardous Materials Emergency Plan to the AES project manager prior to commencing
        with work.

Section 14200                  Elevators
1. General
   1.1 Elevators to be provided for two (2) storey schools to provide barrier free access.
   1.2 Elevators to be electro-hydraulic type, 1160 kg rated load capacity, minimum 2135mm
       wide X 1575mm deep platform size, 2260mm (Cab height, dropped ceiling) clear ceiling
       height. Cab entrance 1065mm wide, single leaf automatic side opening door. Cab to
       return to main floor and door to open upon power failure.
   1.3 Elevators to be provided with a “hands free” telephone (supplied and installed) in a
       recessed cabinet, size to suit. Telephone to be a push button auto dial type programmed
       to dial out only to CBE Security 403-777-8903. Phone is not to receive incoming calls.
   1.4 Elevators to be key operated from hall, push button from Cab. Key switches to allow for
       Schlage cylinders, supplied and installed by the contractor, keying by CBE.
   1.5 Control panel and face plate: Single stainless steel with non-illuminating raised call
       buttons, raised brail chicklets, mount at barrier free height.
   1.6 Barrier Free Lifts may be considered as an alternative only when approved by AES
       project manager for partial floor level changes. Lifts must have automatic door opener.
   1.7 Garavanta stair railing type lifts are not acceptable for new buildings. Use in
       modernizations must be preapproved by AES project manager.
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 1 of 33


SECTION B3              MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION GUIDELINES
Section 15010                    Mechanical General Requirements
1. GENERAL
   1.1 Accessibility. Supply access doors to concealed mechanical equipment for operating,
       inspecting adjusting, and servicing. Locate so all concealed items are accessible and so
       that body or hand entry as applicable is achieved.
   1.2 Coordination of equipment. Coordinate with architectural, structural, and electrical
       consultants in setting out locations for ductwork, equipment, and piping so conflicts are
       avoided. Ensure adequate clearances are maintained for servicing of all equipment.
   1.3 Mechanical alternatives. Where mechanical alternatives are specified, place them in
       the general conditions section of the specifications along with the other architectural,
       structural, and electrical alternatives include a reference in the mechanical specifications
       pointing to the mechanical alternatives in the general conditions section.
   1.4 Asbestos containing materials. At existing CBE sites, be aware of possible asbestos
       surfaces and follow regulatory requirements.
   1.5 All equipment, systems, and associated design shall meet the mandatory provisions of
       the current Model National Energy Code of Canada for Builders (MNCEB).
2. RELATED SECTIONS
   1.1 Refer to the previous sections for additional mechanical information. Special attention
       given to B4, Electrical Section 16110 Wiring Materials & Methods, Clause 2.2, and A7
       Interior Spaces.
   1.2 Reference B6 for Typical Drawings.
3. CODES AND STANDARDS
   1.1 Follow the latest edition of all applicable national, provincial and municipal codes. If
       required, obtain a ruling from the authority having jurisdiction for special installations.
       The current applicable codes and standards shall include, but are not limited to, Alberta
       Building Code, Alberta Fire Code, National Plumbing Code, Model National Energy
       Code of Canada for Buildings 1997 Mandatory Requirements, Canadian Gas Code
       B149.1, Canadian Code, National Fire Protection Association, American Society of
       Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers, Underwriters Laboratories of
       Canada, Canadian Standards Association, National Electrical Manufacturers
       Association, Refrigeration Code and CSA Codes governing refrigeration plants.
4. CASH ALLOWANCES
   1.1 Where mechanical cash allowances are required, place them in the cash allowances
       section of the specifications along with the other Architectural, Electrical and Structural
       cash allowances, if any. Include a reference in the mechanical specifications pointing to
       the mechanical cash allowances in the cash allowances section. No cash allowances to
       appear in the mechanical specifications.
5. PROFESSIONAL OBLIGATION
   1.1 Receipt of information or documentation from CBE employees in no way relieves the
       Consultant from the professional obligation to meet all applicable codes and standards.

Section 15015                    Outside Services - Sanitary & Storm Drainage
1. GENERAL
   1.1 Cast iron grate covers to be specified as round type; rectangular catch basin grate
       covers are not permitted. Grate covers to be rigidly secured to the rim frame of the
       catch basin or manhole.
   1.2 Provide weeping tile as required by geotechnical reports.

Section 15060                    Pipe & Pipe Fittings
1. PIPE & PIPE FITTINGS
   1.1 Hydronic heating, steam and gas piping to be designed for temperature change.
       Grooved mechanical joints are not permitted.
   1.2 Exterior gas lines to be painted with two (2) coats of exterior grade paint by Architect;
       reference B2, Architectural Section 09900 Painting.
   1.3 Domestic water joint and fitting solder shall be lead free.
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 2 of 33


    1.4 Hot and cold domestic water piping shall be type L copper.
    1.5 No rubber gaskets permitted. “Garlok” or “Durlon” gaskets or approved equal permitted.
    1.6 No dielectric fittings permitted.
    1.7 No ABS, PVC, nor galvanised steel allowed for plumbing piping above grade including
        domestic hot and cold water, sanitary and vent lines.
    1.8 All domestic water lines to be flushed out of all debris; disinfected and rinsed to the
        requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction.
    1.9 Exterior gas and refrigerant lines shall be supported by “R Sleeper” or “C Port” product.

Section 15100                       Valves
1. VALVES
   1.1 When replacing radiation valves ensure tailpieces are of the same make as the valve. If
       not, replace the tailpiece as well; mismatched tailpieces are not to be torqued on.
   1.2 Provide 19mm non-freeze key operated hose bibs c/w isolating valve. Locate at
       maximum 60m spacing.
   1.3 No butterfly valves shall be allowed. Specification documents shall specifically state that
       butterfly valves are not permitted on all piping systems except for Fire Protection
       Systems.

Section 15160                       Pumps
1. REFER TO A.I. DESIGN GUIDELINES.

Section 15175                       Tanks
1. TANKS
   1.1 Hydro-pneumatic compression type. Coordinate with Architectural to allow space in
       mechanical room to accommodate installation. Diaphragm or bladder type will not be
       permitted.

Section 15190                       Mechanical Identification
1. PIPE & DUCTING IDENTIFICATION COLOURS SCHEDULE
                 Classification                         Pipe/Duct Colour       Symbol

                 Heating Water Supply Pipe              Yellow                 HWS

                 Heating Water Return Pipe              Yellow                 HWR

                 Domestic Cold Water Pipe               Dark Green             DCW

                 Chilled Water                          Light Green            CW

                 Domestic Hot Water Supply Pipe          Light Grey            DHWS

                 Domestic Hot Water Return Pipe          Dark Grey             DHWR

                 Drain Pipe                             Black

                 Glycol Supply Pipe                     Orange                 GLY.S

                 Glycol Return Pipe                     Orange                 GLY.R

                 Low Pressure Steam                     White                  STM-LP

                 Gas Pipe (Low Pressure)                 Dark Blue             NAT.GAS

                 Gas Pipe (Medium Pressure)             Yellow                 NAT.GAS

                 Sprinkler Pipe                         Red                    SPR.

                 Fire Standpipe                         Red                    STANDPIPE

                 Refrigerant Pipe                       Silver                 FREON
Design Guidelines                                                                            B3
Calgary Board of Education                                  Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 3 of 33



                  Supply Air Duct                                                S/A

                  Return Air Duct                                                R/A

                  Exhaust Air Duct                                               E/A

    1.1 Identify piping with labels, colour bands, and flow arrows. Provide identification at 15m
        maximum intervals, as well as, before and after pipes passing through walls, at all sides
        of trees, behind access doors and in mechanical rooms as required.
    1.2 All bands shall be neatly arranged and in a straight line across groups of pipes.
    1.3 All bands, symbols, etc., are to be put in readily visible locations to be seen from floor
        level.

Section 15210                       Cleaning & Treatment General Requirements
1. GENERAL
   1.1 GE Water Technologies Product preferred.
   1.2 The services of a qualified Contractor specializing in system cleaning, chemical
        treatment, chemical feed equipment, and professional services, and who has been
        active in the water treatment business for a minimum of five (5) years shall be utilized to:
       1.2.1 Supervise all cleaning procedures and chemical additives.
       1.2.2 Draw samples from each particular system and submit samples to consultant /
                owner for final approval at the following stages:
                1.2.2.1 Cleaner in
                1.2.2.2 Final flush
                1.2.2.3 Treated water final.
       1.2.3 Instruct the owner in the application and control of all phases of the water
                treatment programs including testing procedures and interpretation.
       1.2.4 Provide periodic written reports indicating the status of each system before final
                acceptance.
       1.2.5 Provide all necessary documentation of products and equipment to comply with
                all relevant WHMIS and OHAS Regulations.
   1.3 All MSDS must clearly state all components of the products supplied. MSDS showing
        only hazardous materials shall be considered as incomplete.
   1.4 One (1) year supply of chemical for each system and softener salt (as required) shall be
        provided. Contractor to monitor chemical treatment for one (1) year during warranty with
        a minimum of four (4) site visits.

Section 15211                       Hydronic Systems Water Treatment
1. CLOSED WATER SYSTEM CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT:
   1.1 Chilled water, hot water heating, and glycol systems to have a bypass pot feeder
       installed across the circulation pump. Feeder shall have a minimum capacity of 7.6 litres
       (2 Imp. Gallons) and be of steel construction with a working pressure of 1035 kPa (150
       psig). Feeder shall be c/w valve kit containing isolating valves, drain valve, air venting
       valve and funnel.
   1.2 Chilled water, hot water heating, and glycol systems to have an "in-line" filter for removal
       of particulate matter. Filter cartridges are to be of the 10 micron rating, 30 of which are to
       be supplied. A petcock shall be installed for pressure relief of the canister for filter
       replacement. A sight flow indicator shall be installed to determine filter condition. Flow
       indicator shall be a ¾” Rhodes or Kadant Model 150F.
   1.3 The filter canister shall be a 2” Weir 5D3C, Catalogue # 44254-03.
   1.4 Filter and flow indicator shall be installed in an accessible location and not more than
       1.5m (60") above floor level.
2. CLOSED WATER SYSTEM CHEMICALS:
   1.1 Provide sufficient molybate-azol based corrosion inhibitor to achieve an inhibitor level of
       100 ppm (as molybdenum).

Section 15212                       Steam Boiler Systems Water Treatment
1. STEAM BOILER CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT:
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 4 of 33


   1.1 Provide a cation-exchange water softener with automatic regeneration controls for
        boiler water supply. The control head shall be Petwa or Kinetico product.
   1.2 Provide unions for control head removal.
   1.3 Provide a test cock downstream of softener.
   1.4 Provide a feed water heating system that is capable of raising the temperature of the
        feed water to 82ºC (180ºF) on a continuous basis.
   1.5 Provide a packaged chemical feed system to feed oxygen scavenger, sludge
        conditioner and scale control agents to the de-aerator (if used) or to the feed water
        piping.
   1.6 Provide one (1) diaphragm-type chemical feed pump and one (1) 135 litres (30 IG)
        polyethylene chemical batch tank for each chemical used.
   1.7 A contact head water meter on the makeup line to the steam boiler shall register the
        number of litres (gallons) of water passing through it. When a preset gallonage passes
        through the meter, a signal shall be sent to two (2) timers in the control panel. The first
        timer shall control the operation of the solenoid valve on the bleed off-line, while the
        second timer shall control the operation of the chemical pump. Each timer shall be
        adjustable as required.
   1.8 The Systems to be supplied with chemical feed and bleed equipment and chemicals are:
       1.8.1 Condensate Water System; and
       1.8.2 Steam Boiler Feed Water System.
2. STEAM BOILER CHEMICALS
   2.1 Provide the following chemicals:
       2.1.1 Liquid molybdate based inhibitor.
       2.1.2 Liquid phosphate based scale control agent.
       2.1.3 Liquid sludge conditioner.
       2.1.4 Condensate corrosion inhibitor (when steam is used for humidification purposes,
                inhibitor must conform to Health & Welfare Canada, Bureau of Chemical Safety,
                Food Directorate Guidelines).

Section 15214                    Glycol Systems Water Treatment
1. GLYCOL WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT:
   1.1 Provide 135 litres (30 IG) polyethylene reservoir tank on each glycol system.
   1.2 Provide 110V, 1/2 HP gear pump for each glycol system to facilitate the transfer of
       glycol from the reservoir tank to the system.
   1.3 Propylene glycol used shall be a premixed blend, uninhibited.
   1.4 PH to be maintained between 9- 9.5 range.
   1.5 Relief valve(s) to be piped to glycol reservoir tank.

Section 15215                    Spray-Type Humidification Systems Water Treatment
1. SPRAY-TYPE HUMIDIFICATION CHEMICALS:
   1.1 Provide chemicals in sufficient quantity to prevent corrosion, scale deposit, fouling and
       microbiological growth.
   1.2 All biocides provided for control of algae, slime or other microbiological growth must be
       registered under the Pesticides Control Products Act, 1969. No non-registered biocides
       will be acceptable.
   1.3 All chemicals used must conform to Health & Welfare Canada, Bureau of Chemical
       Safety, Food Directorate Guidelines.

Section 15250                    Piping & Equipment Insulation
1. GENERAL
   1.1 Insulate all domestic water, heating and cooling pipe lines to the minimum required by
       MNECB Tables 6.2.3.1 and 5.2.4.3.
   1.2 Insulate storm sewer piping for 3m from roof drain.

Section 15260           Duct Insulation
1. INSULATE HVAC DUCTS AND PLENUMS AS PER MNECB 1997 CLAUSE 5.2.2.5.
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 5 of 33


Section 15430                    Plumbing Specialties
1. GENERAL
   1.1 Provide a minimum of two (2) gas-fired hot water heaters. Recommended sizes of
        water tanks shall be as follows:
       1.1.1 Elementary: Two (2) @ 40 Gallon capacity
       1.1.2 Junior High: Two (2) @ 60 Gallon capacity
       1.1.3 Senior High: As determined by Design.
   1.2 Provide heavy duty vandal proof roof drains compatible with roofing system.
   1.3 Trap primers c/w isolation valves to be used where required by authority having
        jurisdiction and must be accessible.
   1.4 Premise isolation; provide two (2) sets of the following: isolation valve, strainer, union,
        double check valve, union, isolation valve downstream from water meter for all schools.
        Reference drawing M-5 in B6. Install drain beneath back flow prevention assembly and
        pipe to nearby floor drain.
   1.5 Provide approved backflow protection on all City water connections that feed treated
        systems. Backflow prevention devices shall be installed in an accessible location and
        not more than 1.5m (60") above floor level.
   1.6 Back flow preventers to be Watts, Wilkens or Ames.

Section 15440                    Plumbing Fixtures & Trim
1. WATER CLOSETS
   1.1 Water closets for student washrooms (regular and Barrier Free Stalls) and special needs
        washrooms to be American Standard or Crane 6L, or equal, floor-mounted siphon jet
        vitreous china closet bowl with elongated rim, 355mm to 381mm from finished floor to
        top of rim, 40mm spud china bolt caps. Flush valve to be Zurn, Sloan or equal.
   1.2 Toilet seat for regular stall water closets in student washrooms to be solid plastic, same
        colour as fixture, open front, less cover, stainless steel concealed check hinge, self-
        sustaining, without spring actuation.
   1.3 Toilet seat for barrier free stall water closets in student washrooms to be solid plastic,
        same colour as fixture, open front, less cover, stainless steel concealed check hinge,
        self-sustaining, without spring actuation, 50mm lift seat so that top of toilet seat is
        between 400mm and 460mm above finished floor.
   1.4 Toilet seat for water closet in special needs washrooms to be solid plastic, same colour
        as fixture, closed front, with cover, stainless steel concealed check hinge, self-
        sustaining, without spring actuation.
   1.5 Staff and infirmary water closet to be tank type. Floor-mount vitreous china, 6L, 355mm
        to 381mm from finished floor to top of rim, siphon jet close coupled water closet
        combination with elongated rim, close coupled lined vitreous china tank, American
        Standard, Crane or equal.
   1.6 Toilet seat for water closet in staff washroom to be solid plastic, same colour as fixture,
        open front, less cover, stainless steel concealed check hinge, self-sustaining, without
        spring actuation.
   1.7 Toilet seat for water closet in infirmary washrooms to be solid plastic, same colour as
        fixture, closed front, with cover, stainless steel concealed check hinge, self-sustaining,
        without spring actuation.
   1.8 All water closets should be max 6L/flush and have a minimum score of 500MaP as per
        the Maximum Performance (MaP) Testing of popular toilet models report published by
        the Canadian Water and Wastewater Association.
   1.9 http://www.cwwa.ca/pdf_files/MaP%208th%20Edition%20with%20Appendices.pdf
   1.10 No “baby bowl” toilets allowed.
   1.11 No wall-mount water closets allowed for new schools; only allowed for retrofit situations
        where wall-hung water closets already exist.
2. URINALS
   2.1 Urinals to be wall-hung with integral traps, 3.8L,vitreous china, SS Strainer, integral
        flushing rim, 20mm top spud, c/w steel supporting hangers. American Standard, Crane
        or equal. Flush valve to be exposed Zurn, Sloan or equal.
Design Guidelines                                                                              B3
Calgary Board of Education                                    Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 6 of 33


     2.2 For retrofit situations, urinals with flush tanks may be used but must be located in the
          ceiling space with shut off valve. Access hatch required if drywall ceiling. Piping to be
          concealed within wall. Provide solenoid valve tied into light switch to control flushing
          during unoccupied times.
     2.3 In Elementary schools, student washroom urinals shall be mounted 375mm from floor to
          bowl rim.
     2.4 In Middle schools, install urinals at 500mm from floor to bowl rim except one (1) which is
          to be installed at 400mm from floor.
     2.5 For Junior / Senior High Schools, install urinals at 500mm from floor to bowl rim.
3.   LAVATORIES
     3.1 Countertop Lavatories to be stainless steel oval vanity sink c/w 3 hole 100mm centerset
          drillings, overflow and open grid strainer. Trim shall be single push button handle mixed
          metering type, restricted flow (1.9L/min max. flow) outlet, chrome plate.
     3.2 Wall-mount lavatories trim shall be two (2) handle mixed metering type, 100mm centers,
          restricted flow (1.9L/min max. flow) control non-aerating spray outlet.
     3.3 Lavatories to have open grid strainers.
     3.4 Countertop lavatories within dedicated special needs washrooms to be equal to
          stainless steel oval vanity sink c/w 1 hole center drilling, overflow and open grid strainer.
          Trim shall be single handle restricted flow (1.9L/min max. flow) control non-aerating
          spray outlet, equal to Chicago Faucet 349.
     3.5 Confirm height of barrier free lavatories with CBE. Offset drain assembly. Insulate drain
          and exposed domestic hot water lines with true-bro lavatory guard product.
4.   SINKS
     4.1 Sinks shall be stainless steel with 200mm center faucets and basket strainer. Trim shall
          be cast brass body deck mount faucet 200mm centers with flow restricted faucet to a
          maximum flow of 7.6 L/minimum, ceramic cartridges.
     4.2 Classroom shall be provided with a single compartment 56cmwide x 64cmfront x
          20cmdeep sinks with faucet ledge.
     4.3 Lunchroom kitchen shall be provided with a two (2) compartment 64cm wide X 99cm
          front X 36cm deep sinks with faucet ledge for dishwashing and a separate hand washing
          sink to be single compartment 24cm wide X 37cm front X 18cm deep sink with faucet
          ledge.
     4.4 Staffroom kitchen shall be provided with a two (2) compartment 56cm wide X 84cm front
          X 25cmdeep sinks with faucet ledge.
     4.5 Junior High Science sinks to be single compartment 52cm wide X 41cm front X 20cm
          deep 316 stainless steel sink with faucet ledge. Trim to be gooseneck faucet, 100mm
          centers, nozzle outlet c/w vacuum breaker. Each science sink drain to be c/w bottle trap.
     4.6 Senior High science sinks to be 52cm wide X 41cm front X 20cm deep 316 stainless
          steel sink with faucet ledge. Trim to be gooseneck faucet, nozzle outlet, 100mm centers,
          c/w vacuum breaker. Each Science sink drain to be c/w bottle trap.
     4.7 Allow one (1) sink in Music room to be 43cmwide X 90cmfront X 35cmdeep sink with
          one (1) gooseneck faucet, hose connection spout, 100mm center handles. Trim to be
          centred 30cm from one end of the sink.
     4.8 Allow one (1) sink in Art room to be 43cmwide X 90cmfront X 35cmdeep sink with one
          (1) gooseneck faucet, hose connection spout, 100mm center handles. Trim to be
          centred 30cm from one end of the sink. Assembly c/w clay sediment trap.
     4.9 Sink trim to be Delta, Chicago Faucet or equal.
     4.10 Bubblers for classroom sinks in Elementary Schools will not be permitted.
5.   DRINKING FOUNTAINS
     5.1 Drinking fountains to be stainless steel wall-mount types recessed into wall and allowing
          for barrier free access. Haws, Elkay or approved equal. Install 675mm from floor to rim in
          Elementary schools. Install 850mm from floor to rim in Junior / Senior High Schools.
          Confirm mounting heights with CBE prior to installing.
6.   CARETAKING SERVICE BASINS
     6.1 Caretaker service basins to be molded high density composite 90cm X 60cm floor-
          mount type. Trim to be 200mm centers heavy duty cast brass wall mount service sink
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 7 of 33


       faucet, rigid pail hook spout, lever blade handles c/w vacuum breaker spout, c/w hose
       and mop holder accessories.
7. SHOWERS
   7.1 Showers shall be flow restricting to a maximum flow of 9.5 L/minimum.

Section 15510                    Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems
1. Provide guards for sprinkler heads exposed in gymnasiums and other exposed areas.

Section 15515                    Hot Water Specialties
1. Hydronic heating line air vents to be “Maid-O-Mist” or approved equal c/w isolation valves.

Section 15557                    Water Tube Boilers
1. School to be served from central, natural gas-fired water-tube boilers. Provide contacts for
   Distributed Control and Monitoring System Control including boiler enable, burner firing rate,
   and flame failure alarm.
2. Adhere to MNECB 1997 Clause 5.2.12.4.1 for multiple boilers.

Section 15561                    Fume Hoods
1. GENERAL
   1.1 Fume hoods to be conventional type constant volume fume hoods. If the base cabinet is
       used for chemical storage the exhaust for the cabinet shall not be provided by the Fume
       Hood Exhaust System; a dedicated exhaust shall be provided for that cabinet. There
       shall be no openings between the fume hood and the cabinet. Reference B3,
       Mechanical Section 15820 Fans. Reference A7, Interior Space, Section 7.5.5 Science
       Room – Senior High and Section 7.5.6 Science Preparation Room(s) – Junior / Senior
       High.
   1.2 Each fume hood to have its own dedicated exhaust fan so operators can operate each
       of the fume hoods on an as needed basis. Welded 316 stainless steel ductwork to be
       utilized. Exhaust fans to be wall-mounted or roof-mounted; inline fans are not permitted.
       Fan rotating elements shall be of non-ferrous or spark resistant construction. Portions of
       the fan in contact with the air stream shall be coated with corrosion resistant material to
       suit application.
   1.3 Each fume hood fan shall be individually controlled with power control switches at the
       side of the fume hood and readily accessible in case of an emergency. The switches to
       be c/w with running light indicator to show whether the fan is on or off or not operating.

Section 15575                    Breeching & Chimneys
1. Flues and chimneys shall have 20mm X 20mm bird screen mesh installed at openings.

Section 15660                    Electric Motors
1. Motors below 373W (1/2 Hp) shall be 120V single phase.
2. Motors shall be high efficient design.
3. Coordinate with Electrical.

Section 15671                    Air Cooled Condensing Units
1. Condensing units to have condensing unit coil fin guards.
2. Refrigerant R134a shall be utilized in lieu of R22 for condensing units.

Section 15705                    Glycol Systems
1. Glycol heating systems may be used as deemed required by consultant boilers not to
   circulate glycol.
2. All terminal units including radiation and reheat coils shall circulate hot water.
3. Uninhibited propylene glycol to be utilized.

Section 15755                    Heat Exchangers
1. Shell and tube heat exchangers are to be utilized.
Section 15783                    Humidification Systems
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 8 of 33


1. Humidify all areas of building except gymnasium and specialized areas such as CTS rooms
   that are provided with dedicated make up air units. Cell deck humidification systems
   preferred.

Section 15820                    Fans
1. FANS
   1.1 Range hoods for home economics or staff room kitchen shall be stainless steel, c/w
       charcoal filter and vented to exterior to meet requirements of local authority having
       jurisdiction.
   1.2 Roof top exhaust fans shall be installed as per Detail M-3.
   1.3 Staff rooms or work rooms that have photocopiers or laminating equipment to be
       provided with exhaust, preferably via grilles located directly above the individual
       equipment; coordinate final locations with CBE and electrical consultant.
   1.4 Chemical storage cabinets in science classrooms are to be exhausted with dedicated
       exhaust fans; acid and flammable cabinet exhaust not to be combined. Acid and
       flammable cabinet to be exhausted from the bottom vent; upper opening to remain as an
       air inlet c/w flame arrestor plate. Duct work to be welded 316 stainless steel. Exhaust
       fans to be wall-mounted or roof-mounted. Fan rotating elements shall be of non-ferrous
       or spark resistant construction. Portions of the fan in contact with the air stream shall be
       coated with corrosion resistant material to suit application.
   1.5 Reference B3, Mechanical Section 15561 Fume Hoods.

Section 15830                    Terminal Heat Transfer Units
1. GENERAL
   1.1 All elevated radiation including that in Gymnasiums shall be c/w double slope cabinet.
   1.2 Where perimeter radiation and reheat coil serve the same space, radiation shall operate
       initially and in sequence to the reheat coil.
   1.3 Hydronic duct reheat coils to be sized for pressure drop of maximum of 12 Pa. on the air
       side.
   1.4 Each heating radiation zone to have isolating valves and control valve on supply and
       balancing valve, and isolating valve on return side and where practical provide
       thermometer wells for taking temperature readings. Install air vents on high side of
       return.
   1.5 Unit heaters and cabinet unit heaters shall have remote line voltage thermostat
       controlling fan at the unit. Provide isolating valves on supply and return as well as
       isolating valve, balancing valve and air vent at high point in return line.

Section 15833                    Unit Ventilators
    NOTE: For modification of existing schools with unit ventilators.
1. Unit ventilator shall only be fitted with the following control manufacturers:
    1.1 New thermostats to be Honeywell TP-970;
    1.2 Low limit to be Johnson # T-3610-1 installed using mounting clips (included) which
        raises the bulb off the coil;
    1.3 Unit ventilator heating coil control valve not to be radiation valve type.
    1.4 Use Honeywell unit ventilator control valve # VP512A70 or Siemens (POWERS) ¾”
        control valve # 26803175 for the unit ventilator heating coil valve (3-8 # spring range);
    1.5 Honeywell damper hesitation operator # MP516A1087 with Mounting Bracket
        #314249D; and
    1.6 Radiation valves that operate in sequence to univent valves shall be Honeywell valve in
        the 2-5 # spring range.
Sequence of unit ventilator operation to follow the ASHRAE Y cycle. Radiation to operate in
sequence to unit ventilator; the spring ranges should be lower than that for the unit ventilator
valve.

Section 15855                    Air Handling Units
1. GENERAL
Design Guidelines                                                                             B3
Calgary Board of Education                                   Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 9 of 33


    1.1 Air handling units to have provision for future cooling coil if none initially provided, except
        gymnasium and makeup air units. The unit shall operate on minimum fresh air opening
        when ambient exceeds 21°C.
    1.2 Accessibility to all items for removal and servicing is required, c/w isolation valves.
    1.3 Air handling equipment to be silenced so that RC rating as per A.I. Design Guidelines is
        achieved in all instructional and occupied areas, at all specified air volumes. Provide
        vibration isolation as required as per A.I. Design Guidelines.
    1.4 Cabinet panels need not be more than 18 gauge steel with air-dried enamel finish for air
        handlers supplying less than 11,000 L/S. For air handlers supplying more than 11,000
        L/S cabinet panels to be 16 gauge satin coated galvanized steel with air dried enamel
        finish.
    1.5 Floors to be 16 gauge standard flooring with no checker plate. Floors in humidifier
        section to be non-slip 16 gauge metal panel.
    1.6 Filter to be 50mm thick 25-30% efficient fibrous glass blanket equal to Farr 30/30,
        factory sprayed with flameproof, non-drip, non-volatile adhesive sized to give maximum
        3 – 9 m/s velocity.
Section 15860                     Duct Accessories
1. GENERAL
   1.1 Duct access doors on both sides of reheat coils and on one (1) side of fire damper.
   1.2 Fire dampers to allow for 100% free area across the duct.

Section 15870                     Air Outlets & Inlets
1. GENERAL
   1.1 Supply air diffusers to be installed as shown in Detail M-1.
   1.2 Roof hoods to be installed as shown in Detail M-2.
   1.3 Sidewall air louvers to be storm proof c/w bird screen.

Section 15960                     Building Automation System               (This section currently under
                                  revision)
1. GENERAL
   1.1 Products furnished but not installed under this section
       1.1.1 The Controls Contractor shall coordinate and verify the installation of all products
             required to produce a complete and functioning BAS system. These products
             include, but are not limited to, control valves, sensors, flow meters, actuators and
             terminal unit controls.
   1.2 Products not furnished or installed but integrated with the work of this section
       1.2.1 The Controls Contractor shall be responsible for the integration of any and all
             controls that are provided by other manufacturers to produce a complete and
             functioning BAS system. These products include, but are not limited to, boiler
             controls, chiller controls, controls provided with air-handling units, smoke
             detectors, security and lighting.
   1.3 Related sections
       1.3.1 The following sections constitute related work:
             1.4.1.1 Mechanical General Requirements
             1.4.1.2 Air Handling Units
             1.4.1.3 Electrical General Requirements
             1.4.1.4 Wiring Materials & Methods
             1.4.1.5 Fire Alarm Systems
             1.4.1.6 Security Systems
   1.4 Description
       1.4.1 Abbreviations
             1.4.1.1 DDC Direct Digital Control
             1.4.1.2 SAC        Stand Alone Computer
             1.4.1.3 MCC Motor Control Unit
             1.4.1.4 BAS        Building Automation System
       1.4.2 All requirements of a BAS System shall be provided by a single Controls
             Contractor.
Design Guidelines                                                                         B3
Calgary Board of Education                               Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                      Page 10 of 33


       1.4.3 Controls Contractor shall install control components wiring and conduit.
       1.4.4 Controls Contractor shall provide programming, commissioning, owner training
             and documentation.
       1.4.5 The control system shall be client/server based DDC System with capability of
             being controlled and modified from a central station at the CBE Highfield Security
             Office, Energy Office and school site via web based operator interface.
       1.4.6 The control system shall consist of a high-speed, peer to peer network of DDC
             controllers and an operator workstation (Supplied by the CBE). The PC and
             software (provided by the controls contractor) will allow a user to interface with
             the network via dynamic color graphics. Each mechanical system, building floor
             plan, and control device will be depicted by point and click graphics.
       1.4.7  The control system shall directly control the HVAC equipment which includes,
             but is not limited to, air-handling units by maintaining discharge air temperature
             and outside air control, hot water boilers and pumping systems, chiller and chilled
             water pumping systems. Each zone controller will provide for
             occupied/unoccupied mode of operation by individual zone.
       1.4.8 The system will be programmed for optimal start/stop of air handling units and
             hot and chilled water systems and night set-back based on schools operational
             schedule provided by the CBE.
       1.4.9 The control system shall allow CBE operators with necessary access clearance
             to access system status and perform permanent or temporary program, set point
             and scheduling changes from ANY school or the Highfield Center.
   1.5 Approved HVAC Controls Contractors & Equipment
       1.5.1 Honeywell – Honeywell Building Manager / Excel 5000
       1.5.2 Johnson Controls – Johnson Metasys / NAE Controller
   1.6 Codes & Standards
       1.6.1 Comply with rules and regulations of codes of local, provincial and federal
             authorities.
       1.6.2 New products that have not been previously installed in CBE sites must go
             through a CBE approval process to ensure CBE security standards are
             maintained.
   1.7 System Performance
       1.7.1 Graphic Display. The system shall display a graphic with 20 dynamic points
             with all current data within 10 seconds.
       1.7.2 Graphic Refresh. The system shall update a graphic with 20 dynamic points
             with all current data within 8 seconds.
       1.7.3 Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object
             by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be less than 2 seconds.
             Analog objects should start to adjust within 2 seconds.
       1.7.4 Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values will be
             transmitted over the high speed network such that any data used or displayed at
             a controller or workstation will have been current within the previous 6 seconds.
       1.7.5 Alarm response time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm
             to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 45 seconds.
       1.7.6 Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be
             capable of running as often as once every 5 second. The controls Contractor
             shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical
             process under control.
       1.7.7 Performance. Programmable controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID
             control loops at a selectable frequency of at least once per second. The
             controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this
             calculation at this same frequency.
       1.7.8 Multiple Alarm Annunciation. All workstations on the network must receive
             alarms within 5 seconds of each other.
       1.7.9 Reporting Accuracy. The system shall report all values with an end-to-end
             accuracy as listed or better than those listed in Table 1.
Design Guidelines                                                                            B3
Calgary Board of Education                                  Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 11 of 33


       1.7.10 Stability of Control. Control loops shall maintain measured variable at set point
              within the tolerances listed in Table 2.
                                            TABLE 1
                                      Reporting Accuracy
                     Measured Variable                Reported Accuracy
                Space Temperature                            ±0.5°C
                Ducted Air                                   ±0.5°C
                Outside Air                                  ±1.0°C
                Dew Point                                    ±1.5°C
                Water Temperature                            ±0.5°C
                Delta-T                                     ±0.15°C
                Relative Humidity                            ±5%RH
                Water Flow                             ±5% of full scale
                Airflow (terminal)               ±10% of full scale (see Note 1)
                Airflow (measuring stations)           ±5% of full scale
                Airflow (pressurized spaces)           ±3% of full scale
                Air Pressure (ducts)                ±25 Pa (±0.1 in. w.g.)
                Air Pressure (space)                 ±3 Pa (±0.1 in. w.g.)
                Water Pressure                   ±2% of full scale (see Note 2)
                Electrical                        5% of reading (see Note 3)
                Carbon Monoxide (CO)                    ±5% of reading
                Carbon Dioxide (CO2)                        ±50 ppm


                Note 1: 10%-100% of scale

                Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure.

                Note 3: Not including utility supplied meters.




                                            TABLE 2
                                  Control Stability and Accuracy
                    Controlled             Control
                                                              Range of Medium
                     Variable             Accuracy
                                           ±50 Pa                   0-1.5 kPa
                   Air Pressure
                                            ±3 Pa                  -25 to 25 Pa
                    Airflow            ±10% of full scale
               Space Temperature           ±1.0°C
                Duct Temperature            ±1.5°C

                    Humidity                ±5%RH
                                           ±10 kPa                0-1 MPa
                 Fluid Pressure
                                           ±250 Pa          0-12.5 kPa differential
   1.8 Submittals
       1.8.1 Submittals shall include:
             1.8.1.1 DDC System Hardware:
                     .1 A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating
                         quantity, manufacturer, model number, and other relevant technical
                         data.
Design Guidelines                                                                         B3
Calgary Board of Education                               Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                      Page 12 of 33


                      .2 Manufacturer’s description and technical data, such as performance
                          curves, product specification sheets, and installation/maintenance
                          instructions for items listed below and other relevant items not listed:
                           Direct Digital Controller (controller panels)
                           Transducers / Transmitters
                           Sensors
                           Actuators
                           Valves
                           Relays / Switches
                           Control Panels
                           Power Supplies
                           Batteries
                           Operator Interface Equipment
                           Wiring
                      .3 Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel. Show all
                          termination numbers.
                      .4 Schematic diagrams for all field sensors and controllers. Provide
                          floor plans of all sensor locations and control hardware including
                          locations of spring wind override timers and HOA switches.
              1.8.1.2 Central System Hardware and Software:
                       .1 A complete bill of materials of equipment used, indicating quantity,
                          manufacturer, model number, and other relevant technical data.
                       .2 Manufacturer’s description and technical data, such as product
                          specification sheets and installation / maintenance instructions for
                          the items listed below and other relevant items not listed:
                          Interface equipment between CPU and Control Panels
                          Operator Interface Software
                          Color Graphic Software
                          Third-Party Software
                       .3 Schematic Diagrams for all control, communication and power
                          wiring. Provide a schematic drawing of the central system
                          installation. Label all cables and ports with computer manufacturer’s
                          model numbers and functions. Show all interface wiring to the control
                          system.
                       .4 Riser diagrams of wiring between central control unit and all control
                          panels.
                       .5 A list of the color graphic screens to be provided. For each screen,
                          provide a conceptual layout of pictures and data and show which
                          screens can be directly accessed.
              1.8.1.3 Controlled Systems:
                       .1 A schematic diagram of each controlled system. The schematics
                          shall have all control points labeled with point names listed. The
                          schematics shall graphically show all control elements in the
                          system.
                       .2 A schematic wiring diagram for each controlled system. Each
                          schematic shall have all elements labeled. Where a control element
                          is the same as that shown on the control system schematic, it shall
                          be listed with the same name. All terminals shall be listed.
                       .3 An instrumentation list for each controlled system. Each element of
                          the controlled system shall be listed in table format. The table shall
                          show element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number
                          and product data sheet number.
                       .4 A complete description of the operation of the control system,
                          including sequences of operation. The description shall include and
                          reference a schematic diagram of the controlled system.
Design Guidelines                                                                         B3
Calgary Board of Education                               Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                      Page 13 of 33


                        .5 A point list for both inputs and outputs (I/O), point number, the
                           control device associated with the I/O point and the location of the
                           I/O device. Software flag points, alarm points, etc.
                        .6 A description of the proposed process along with all report formats
                           and checklists to be used in Part 3: “Control System Demonstration
                           & Acceptance.”
       1.8.2   Project Record Documents
               1.8.1.1 Upon completion of installation, submit three copies of record (as-built)
                       documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final
                       completion and shall include:
                       .1 Project Record Drawings. These shall be as-built versions of the
                           submittal shop drawings. One set on CD-ROM including CAD,
                           .DWG, or .DXF drawing files shall also be provided.
                       .2 Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Completes
                           versions of all reports and checklists, along with trend logs, used to
                           meet requirements of Part 3: “Control System Demonstration &
                           Acceptance.”
                       .3 One set of control schematics must be secured to the inside panel of
                           each control enclosure.
                       .4 Operation & Maintenance Manuals (O&M). This shall include as-built
                           versions of the submittal product data. In addition to the information
                           required for submittals, the O&M manual shall include:
                            Names, addresses and 24-hour telephone numbers of installing
                               controls Contractors, as well as the control system and service
                               representatives.
                            Operators Manual with procedures for operating the control
                               system, including logging on and off the system, alarm handling,
                               producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer
                               controls, and changing set points and other variables.
                            One set of Programming Manuals with a description of the
                               programming language (including syntax), statement
                               descriptions (including algorithms and calculations used), point
                               database creation and modification, and use of the editor.
                            Engineering, Installation, and Maintenance Manual(s) that
                               explain how to design and install new points, panels, and other
                               hardware; preventative maintenance and calibration procedures;
                               how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace
                               hardware.
                            A listing and documentation of all custom software created using
                               the programming language, including the set-points, tuning
                               parameters, and object database. One set of CD_ROM(s)
                               containing files of the software and database also shall be
                               provided.
                            One set of CD_ROM(s) containing files of all coloured graphic
                               screens created for the project.
                            A list of recommended spare parts with part numbers and
                               suppliers.
                            Complete documentation, installation, and maintenance
                               information for all third party hardware provided.
                            A copy of the programmed schedule including occupied and
                               unoccupied times, holidays etc.
                            Complete original issue CD-ROM(s) of all software provided,
                               including operating systems, programming language, operator
                               workstation software, and graphics software.
                            Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documentation for all
                               equipment and systems.
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 14 of 33


                              Recommended preventative maintenance procedures for all
                               systems components, including a schedule of tasks (inspection,
                               cleaning, calibration, etc.), time between tasks and task
                               descriptions.
                           A separate control system manual shall be provided to the
                               Facility Operator that includes, but is not limited to, the following
                               information:
                           Proficiently operate the system to level determined by CBE.
                           Understand DDC system components.
                               Operate the workstation.
                               Log on and off the system.
                               Access graphics, point reports and logs.
                               Adjust and change system set points.
                               Recognize system alarms and there meaning
                       .5 Training Manuals: The controls Contractor shall provide a course
                          outline and training manuals for all training classes at least six
                          weeks prior to the first class. The owner/engineer may modify any or
                          all of the training course outline and training materials to meet the
                          needs of the owner. Review and approval by the owner / engineer
                          shall be completed at least 3 weeks prior to the first class.
   1.9 Warranty
       1.9.1 Labor and materials for the control system specified shall be warranted free from
              defects for a period of 12 months dating from Substantial Completion. Control
              system failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired or
              replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to the owner. The controls
              Contractor shall respond to the owner’s request for warranty service within 24
              hours.
       1.9.2 All work shall have a single warranty date, even when the owner has received
              beneficial use due to an early system start-up. If the work specified is split into a
              multi-phase contract, then each phase or contract shall have a separate
              warranty start date.
       1.9.3 At the end of the final start-up, testing and commissioning phase, if equipment
              and systems are operating satisfactorily to the engineer, the engineer shall sign
              certificates certifying that the control system operation has been tested and
              accepted in accordance with the terms of the specification. This signed certificate
              shall be included in the Owner’s documentation package.
       1.9.4 Operator workstation software, project-specific software, graphic software,
              database software, and firmware updates that resolve known software
              deficiencies shall be provided at no charge during the warranty period. Any
              upgrades or functional enhancements associated with the above-mentioned
              items also can be provided during the warranty period for an additional charge to
              the owner. Written authorization by the owner must, however, be granted prior to
              the installation of any above-mentioned items.
       1.9.5 Exception (for modernization projects only): The controls contractor shall not be
              required to warrant reused devices, except for those that have been rebuilt
              and/or repaired by the controls contractor. The controls contractor shall warrant
              all installation labour and materials, however, and shall demonstrate that all
              reused devices are in operable condition at the time of the engineer’s/owner’s
              acceptance.
       1.9.6 A minimum of two (2) inspections (spring and fall) to confirm software operation
              and to calibrate controls as required.
       1.9.7 Maintain DDC system accuracy during warranty period. Sensor to operator
              terminal display must maintain accuracies as outlined in Part 1, Tables 1 & 2.
   1.10 Ownership Of Proprietary Material
       1.10.1 Software and documentation generated under the work becomes the property of
              the Owner, including and not limited to graphic files, database files, custom
              applications programs, project record documents and training manuals.
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 15 of 33


2. PRODUCTS
   2.1 Materials
       2.1.1 All products used shall be new and currently under manufacture and shall have
             been applied in similar installations for a minimum period of at least one (1) year.
             The installation shall not be a test site for new products unless explicitly
             approved by the owner or an owner’s representative in writing.
       2.1.2 Latest available revision for operator software, controller resident software and
             firmware at start of warranty
       2.1.3 Replacement parts must be readily available and not scheduled for
             discontinuation at time of substantial completion.
   2.2 Communications
       2.2.1 The controls contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors,
             repeaters, hubs, patch cables necessary for the internetwork.
       2.2.2 All controllers shall have a communication port for connections with the operator
             interfaces
       2.2.3 Communication services over the internetwork shall result in operator interface
             and value passing that is transparent to the internetwork architecture as follows:
             2.2.3.1 Connection of an operator interface device to any one controller on the
                      internetwork will allow the operator to interface with all other controllers
                      as if that interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data,
                      status information, reports, system software, custom programs, etc. for
                      all controllers shall be available for viewing and editing from any one
                      controller on the interface.
             2.2.3.2 Uploading, downloading and backing-up of any controller program data
                      shall be available from any one controller in the interface.
             2.2.3.3 All database values of any one controller shall be readable by any other
                      controller on the internetwork. This value passing shall be automatically
                      performed by a controller when a reference to an object name not
                      located in that controller is entered into the controller database. An
                      operator shall not be required set up any communication services to
                      perform internetwork value passing.
             2.2.3.4 The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized
                      daily via the internetwork. An operator change to the time clock in any
                      controller shall be automatically broadcast to all controllers on the
                      internetwork.
             2.2.3.5 There shall only be one (1) building controller and it shall be located in
                      the mechanical room. One 2-port outlet must be provided and located
                      within the same enclosure as the network adapter. Mechanical and
                      electrical trades must coordinate the exact location of this 2-port outlet.
             2.2.3.6 A patch cable between the network adapter and a network switch port
                      must be provided and installed. The controls contractor must provide the
                      CBE IT department with the appropriate IP address to activate the
                      device.
             2.2.3.7 All hardware and software (except server and associated operating
                      system software) required to allow control network and CBE WAN/LAN
                      access shall be provided by controls contractor.
             2.2.3.8 Control system shall have the capability of being controlled from a
                      Windows XP workstation within the same Local Area Network using
                      TCP/IP protocol.
             2.2.3.9 SAC to have RJ45 ethernet interface with auto negotiate capability of
                      10/100Mbps in either full or half duplex mode.
             2.2.3.10 SAC to be configurable using a static IP address
             2.2.3.11 The CBE Highfield Security Center shall communicate with the school
                        BMS via web browser based operator interface.
   2.3 Operator Interface
       2.3.1 A PC-based workstation shall be provided by the CBE complete with operating
             system, web server software and database software. Minimum system
Design Guidelines                                                                         B3
Calgary Board of Education                               Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                      Page 16 of 33


               requirements must be provided to the CBE by the controls contractor. Control
               software, configuration, and implementation will be performed by the controls
               contractor.
       2.3.2   BMS software to be compatible with the Windows XP operating system.
       2.3.3   The operator interface shall minimize the use of keyboard command entry,
               through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device, and “point and click”
               approach to menu selection.
       2.3.4   Application Software
               2.3.4.1 Each workstation shall store on the hard disk a copy of the current
                         database of each building controller. This database shall be updated
                         whenever a change is made in any system panel. The storage of this
                         data shall be automatic and not require operator intervention. In the
                         event of a database loss in a building management panel. The first
                         workstation to detect the loss shall automatically restore the database
                         for that panel.
               2.3.4.2 A system operator with the proper password clearance shall be able to
                         save the database from any system panel. The operator shall be able
                         to clear a panel database and manually initiate a download of a
                         specified database to any panel in the system.
               2.3.4.3 The workstation software shall provide a method of configuring the
                         system. This shall allow for future system changes or additions by
                         users under proper password protection.
               2.3.4.4 Password Protection. Multiple level password access protection shall
                         be provided to allow the user / manager to limit workstation control,
                         display, and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems
                         appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password.
               2.3.4.5 Login information should be encrypted.
               2.3.4.6 User access should be logged including both successful and failed
                         attempts. 5 (five) unsuccessful login attempts should result in user
                         lockout.
               2.3.4.7 A minimum of 50 passwords shall be supported at each control panel.
               2.3.4.8 Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for
                         their respective passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator
                         interface shall be limited to only those items defined for the access
                         level of the password used to log on.
               2.3.4.9 CBE to designate passwords for the system. Provide capability for the
                         CBE to administer and change the password for future.
               2.3.4.10 System security level shall be selectable for each operator. The CBE
                         IT department shall have the ability to set passwords, login names and
                         associated security levels. There shall be a user log-off time period
                         enabled and adjustable that shall log off the operator if no keystrokes
                         or mouse movement is detected over a user selectable time period.
                         .1 There shall be a minimum of 5 levels of system access:
                            Level 1 – Data Access and Display
                            Level 2 – Level 1 + Operator overrides.
                            Level 3 – Level 2 + Database modifications
                            Level 4 – Level 3 + Database Generation
                            Level 5 – Level 4 + Password Add / Modification
               2.3.4.11 The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all
                         workstations, network connections, building management panels, and
                         controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the
                         operator.
               2.3.4.12 Operator Commands. The operator interface shall allow the operator
                         to perform commands including but not limited to, the following:
                         .1 Start-up or shutdown selected equipment
                         .2 Adjust set points
                         .3 Add / Modify / Delete time programming
Design Guidelines                                                                          B3
Calgary Board of Education                                Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 17 of 33


                         .4 Enable / Disable process execution.
                         .5 Lock / Unlock alarm reporting for each point
                         .6 Enable / Disable Totalization for each point.
                         .7 Enable / Disable trending for each point.
                         .8 Override PID loop set points
                         .9 Enter temporary override schedules
                         .10 Define holiday schedules.
                         .11 Change time / date (Automatic DST changeover)
                         .12 Enter / Modify analog alarm points.
                         .13 Enter / Modify analog warning limits.
                         .14 View limits.
                         .15 Enable / Disable demand limiting for each member.
                         .16 Enable / Disable duty cycle for each load.
              2.3.4.13   Logs and summaries. Reports shall be generated automatically or
                         manually, and directed to screen, printer or hard disk. As a minimum,
                         the system shall allow the user to obtain the following types of report:
                         .1 A listing of all points on the network.
                         .2 List all points currently in alarm.
                         .3 List all points currently off-line.
                         .4 List all points currently in override status.
                         .5 List all disabled points.
                         .6 List all points currently locked out.
                         .7 List all items defined in a follow up file.
                         .8 List all weekly schedules.
                         .9 List all holiday programming.
                         .10 List of limits and deadbands.
              2.3.4.14   Any object in the system shall be configurable to alarm in and out of
                         normal state. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits,
                         alarm limit differentials, states, and reactions for each object in the
                         system.
              2.3.4.15   Alarm messages shall use the English language descriptor for the
                         object in alarm in such a way that the operator will be able to recognize
                         the source, location, and nature of the alarm without relying on
                         acronyms and other mnemonics.
              2.3.4.16   The operator shall be able to define custom trend logs for any data
                         object in the system. This definition shall include interval, start time
                         and stop time. Trend data shall be sampled and stored on the building
                         controller panel and be archivable on hard disk, and be retrievable for
                         use in spreadsheets and standard database programs.
              2.3.4.17   Point Definitions. There shall be a means provided by which an
                         operator can easily access an alphabetical point’s definition list through
                         a drop down menu or ‘button.’ For example RTU – Roof Top Unit.
              2.3.4.18   Alarm and Event Logs. The operator shall be able to view all system
                         alarms and change of states from any location in the system. Events
                         shall be listed chronologically. An operator with proper security level
                         may acknowledge and clear alarms.
              2.3.4.19   Object and Property Status Control. Provide a method for the operator
                         to view, and edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in
                         the system. The status shall be available through the system graphic
                         display. Point information shall automatically display when cursed
                         over. An operator with proper security clearance shall be capable of
                         changing the point name / acronym.
              2.3.4.20   Reports and Logs. Provide a reporting package that allows the
                         operator to select, modify, or create reports. Each report shall be
                         definable as to data content, format, interval, and date. Report data
                         shall be archivable on the hard disk for historical reporting. Provide
                         the operator with the ability to obtain real time logs of all objects by
Design Guidelines                                                                         B3
Calgary Board of Education                               Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                      Page 18 of 33


                        type and status. Reports and logs shall be store on hard disk in a
                        format that is readily accessible by other standard software
                        applications, including spreadsheets and word processing.
             2.3.4.21 Custom Reports. Provide the capability for the operator to easily
                        define any system data into a daily, weekly, monthly, or annual report.
                        These reports shall be time and date stamped and shall contain a
                        report title and the name of the facility.
             2.3.4.22 Tenant Overrides. Provide the ability to obtain data for the daily total
                        time in hours that each tenant has requested overrides for the HVAC
                        and lighting systems.
             2.3.4.23 Custom Application Programming. Provide the tools to create, modify,
                        and debug custom application programming. The operator shall be
                        able to create, edit, and download custom programs at the same time
                        the system is operating. A full screen character editor/programming
                        environment shall be provided. The editor shall have a
                        debugging/simulation capability that allows the user to step through the
                        program and observe any intermediate values or results.
   2.4 Controller Software
       2.4.1 All software application shall reside and operate at the system controllers.
             Editing of applications shall occur at the operator workstation.
       2.4.2 The following set points shall be used:
             2.4.2.1 Occupied heating set point                    21.0°C
             2.4.2.2 Occupied cooling set point                    24.0°C
             2.4.2.3 Unoccupied heating set point                  15.0°C
             2.4.2.4 Unoccupied cooling set point                  35.0°C
             2.4.2.5 High alarm limit temperature                  37.0°C
             2.4.2.6 Low alarm limit temperature                   10.0°C
             2.4.2.7 Local set point offset adjust                 ±1.0°C
             2.4.2.8 Temporary occupancy pushbutton timer 4.0 hours
       2.4.3 For Gymnasiums use above values with the following exceptions:
             2.4.3.1 Occupied heating set point (Junior / Senior High Schools)           19.0°C
             2.4.3.2 Occupied heating set point (Elementary Schools)                     19.0°C
             2.4.3.3 Temporary occupancy spring wind timer                       0-4.0 hours
       2.4.4 Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in
             the system. Each schedule shall consist of the following:
             2.4.4.1 Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week.
                      Each of these schedules should include the capability for setting of
                      occupied and unoccupied time periods. When a group of objects are
                      scheduled together, provide the capability to adjust the occupied /
                      unoccupied times for each individual object.
             2.4.4.2 Exception Schedule. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any
                      day of the year as an exception schedule. Exception schedules may be
                      defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is
                      executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for
                      that day of the week.
             2.4.4.3 Holiday Schedules. Provide the ability to define up to 99 special or
                      holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling
                      calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to
                      define the length of each holiday period.
       2.4.5 System Coordination. Provide a standard application for the proper coordination
             of equipment. This application shall provide the operator with a method of
             grouping together equipment based on function and location. This group may
             then be used for scheduling and other applications.
       2.4.6 Binary Alarms. Each binary object shall be set to alarm based on the operator
             specified state. Provide the capability to automatically and manually disable the
             alarm.
Design Guidelines                                                                          B3
Calgary Board of Education                                Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 19 of 33


        2.4.7 Analog Alarms. Each analog object shall have both high and low limit capable of
              being operator specified. Provide the capability to automatically and manually
              disable the alarm.
       2.4.8 Maintenance Management. The system shall monitor equipment status and
              generate maintenance messages based on user designated run-time, starts,
              and/or calendar date limits.
       2.4.9 Sequencing. Provide application software based upon the sequences of
              operation to properly sequence chillers, boiler and pumps.
       2.4.10 PID Control. A PID (Proportional-Integral-Derivative) algorithm with direct or
              reverse action and anti-windup shall be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a
              time varying analog value that is used to position an output or stage a series of
              outputs. The controlled variable, set-point and PID gains shall be user
              selectable.
       2.4.11 Staggered Start. This application shall prevent all controlled equipment from
              simultaneously starting after a power outage. The order in which equipment
              starts, along with the time delays between shall be user selectable.
       2.4.12 Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output objects shall be protected form short cycling.
              This feature shall allow for minimum on and off times to be selected.
       2.4.13 On/Off Control with Differential. Provide an algorithm that allows a binary output
              to be cycled based on a controlled variable and set point. The algorithm shall be
              direct actin or reverse acting and incorporate an adjustable differential.
       2.4.14 Run-Time Totalization.
              2.4.14.1 Totalization shall be set up on a weekly basis for every controlled load
                         and operating mode.
              2.4.14.2 For scheduled equipment operation, Totalization alarm limits shall be
                         set 10% higher than the normal scheduled runtime for that equipment.
              2.4.14.3 For temperature controlled equipment operation, for example; fan
                         operation, Totalization shall be set up with alarm limits set initially at
                         the manufacturer’s duty cycle. Should the equipment exceed the
                         runtime an alarm message shall be generated.
       2.4.15 Start / Stop Time Optimization Programming.
              2.4.15.1 Start / stop optimization shall be automatically coordinated with event
                         scheduling. The program shall start HVAC equipment at the latest
                         possible time that will allow equipment to achieve the desired zone
                         condition by the time of occupancy. The program shall also shut down
                         the HVAC equipment at the earliest possible time before the end of the
                         occupancy period, and still maintain desired comport conditions.
              2.4.15.2 The program shall operate in both the heating and cooling seasons. It
                         shall be possible to apply the program to individual Fan Systems. The
                         program shall operate based on both outside weather conditions as
                         well as indoor zone conditions.
              2.4.15.3 The program will meet the local code requirements with respect to
                         outside air ventilation requirements for all occupied times.
   2.5 Building Controllers.
       2.5.1 Provide a Building Controller capable of achieving the performance specified in
              Part 1 “System Performance”.
              2.5.1.1 The Building Controller shall be comprised of one (1) independent,
                       stand-alone, microprocessor based building controller to manage the
                       global strategies described in the System Software section.
              2.5.1.2 ALL equipment shall have CSA approval.
              2.5.1.3 The building controller shall have sufficient memory to support it
                       operating system, database and programming requirements.
              2.5.1.4 Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.
              2.5.1.5 The building controller shall continually check the status of its processor
                       and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller
                       shall:
                       .1 Assume a predetermined failure mode.
Design Guidelines                                                                         B3
Calgary Board of Education                               Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                      Page 20 of 33


                      .2 Generate an alarm notification.
             2.5.1.6 The Building Controller shall communicate with all other devices over
                      the internetwork.
             2.5.1.7 The Building Controller shall have the ability to perform any or all of the
                      following energy management routines:
                      .1 Time of day scheduling
                      .2 Calendar based scheduling
                      .3 Holiday scheduling (2 different holiday schedules)
                      .4 Temporary scheduling overrides
                      .5 Optimal start/stop and optimal transition from night setback to
                           occupied temperatures
                      .6 Night setback control
                      .7 Enthalpy switchover (free cooling economizer)
                      .8 Peak demand limiting.
                      .9 Indoor / Outdoor control.
                      .10 Fan speed control.
                      .11 Heating / cooling interlock.
                      .12 Set point reset.
                      .13 Ramp routine
                      .14 Temperature compensated load rolling.
             2.5.1.8 The Building Controller shall automatically accumulate and store runtime
                      hours for all fans, pumps and boilers. The user should have the ability to
                      define a warning limit alarm.
             2.5.1.9 The Building Controller shall have the ability to count events such as fan
                      or pump starts and stops.
       2.5.2 Communication
             2.5.2.1 Each controller shall reside on the internetwork via Ethernet connection.
                        The Building Controller shall perform routing duties when connected to
                        a network of application specific controllers.
             2.5.2.2 The controller shall be provided with a service communication port for
                        connection to a portable operator workstation.
       2.5.3 Environment. Controllers shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
             2.5.3.1 Controllers mounted outdoors and / or in wet ambient conditions shall be
                        mounted in waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -
                        40°C to 65°C.
             2.5.3.2 Controllers used in conditioned spaces shall be mounted in dust-proof
                        enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C.
       2.5.4 Keypad. A local keypad and display shall be provided for each controller. The
             keypad shall be provided for interrogating and editing data. An optional security
             system password shall be available.
       2.5.5 Serviceability. Provided diagnostic LED’s for power, communication, and
             processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular
             terminal strips, or to termination card connected to a ribbon cable.
       2.5.6 Memory. The building controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming
             information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.
       2.5.7 Immunity to Power and Noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to
             100% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below
             80% nominal voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5
             to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5W at 1m.
   2.6 Application Specific Controllers
       2.6.1 General. Application Specific Controllers (ASC’s) are microprocessor based DDC
             controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a
             specific piece of equipment. They are not fully user programmable but are
             customized for operation within the confines of the equipment they are designed
             to serve. Application Specific Controllers shall communicate with all other
             devices on the internetwork.
Design Guidelines                                                                         B3
Calgary Board of Education                               Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                      Page 21 of 33


              2.6.1.1 Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue
                         to provide control functions without being connected to the network.
              2.6.1.2 Each ASC shall contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target
                         system and the specified sequence of operation shall be
                         accomplished.
              2.6.1.3 All ASC’s shall have CSA approval.
       2.6.2 Communication
              2.6.2.1 Each controller shall reside on the internetwork via Ethernet connection.
              2.6.2.2 The controller shall be provided with a service communication port for
                      connection to a portable operator workstation.
       2.6.3 Environment. Controllers shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
              2.6.3.1 Controllers mounted outdoors and / or in wet ambient conditions shall be
                      mounted in waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -
                      40°C to 65°C.
              2.6.3.2 Controllers used in conditioned spaces shall be mounted in dust-proof
                      enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C.
       2.6.4 Keypad. A local keypad and display shall be provided for each controller. The
              keypad shall be provided for interrogating and editing data. An optional security
              system password shall be available.
       2.6.5 Serviceability. Provided diagnostic LED’s for power, communication, and
              processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular
              terminal strips, or to termination card connected to a ribbon cable.
       2.6.6 Memory. The ASC shall use non-volatile memory and maintain all BIOS and
              programming information in the event of a power loss and shall have sufficient
              memory to support its own operating system and data base.
       2.6.7 Immunity to Power and Noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to
              100% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below
              80% nominal voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5
              to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5W at 1m.
       2.6.8 Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated to 125% of ASC power
              consumption and shall be of the fused or current limiting type.
   2.7 Enclosures
       2.7.1 Main controllers shall be placed in lockable vandal-proof cabinets to prevent
              access by students and the general public. The cabinets wherever practical shall
              be mounted in areas NOT accessible to the student population.
   2.8 Input/Output Interface
       2.8.1 Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices.
              Outputs shall provide either a 0 to 10VDC or a 4 to 20mA signal as required to
              provide proper control of the output device. Analog outputs on controllers shall
              have status lights and a 2 position switch (Auto/Manual) and manually adjusted
              potentiometer.
       2.8.2 Binary outputs shall provide for on/off operation and shall have 3 position
              (On/Off/Auto) override switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for
              normally open or normally closed position.
   2.9 Auxiliary Control Devices
       2.9.1 Motorized Control Dampers.
             2.9.1.1 Control dampers shall be the parallel or opposed blade type.
                      .1 Outdoor and/or return air mixing dampers and face and bypass
                           dampers shall be parallel blade with blades oriented to direct air
                           stream toward each other.
                      .2 Other modulating dampers to be the opposed blade type.
                      .3 Two-position shut-off dampers may be opposed or parallel blade
                           type with blade and side seals.
              2.9.1.2 Individual blades shall not exceed 150mm in width and 1200 mm in
                      length. Provide interlocking edges and compressible seals. Provide oil
                      impregnated bronze or nylon bearings with additional thrust bearings for
                      vertical blades.
Design Guidelines                                                                          B3
Calgary Board of Education                                Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 22 of 33


             2.9.1.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Johnson Controls, Honeywell,
                  Tamco
       2.9.2 Damper/Valve Actuators.
              2.9.2.1 The actuator shall have mechanical or electric stall protection to prevent
                       damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.
              2.9.2.2 Where shown, for power failure/safety applications, an internal
                       mechanical, spring-return mechanism shall be built into the actuator
                       housing.
              2.9.2.3 Proportional actuators shall accept a 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA control
                       signal and provide a 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA operating range.
              2.9.2.4 All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear
                       release to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is
                       not powered. Spring-return actuators with more than7 N-m torque
                       capacity shall have a manual crank.
              2.9.2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Belimo
       2.9.3 Control Valves.
              2.9.3.1 Control valves shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or
                       modulating service as indicated.
              2.9.3.2 Close Off Pressure Ratings:
                        .1 Two-way:150% of total system (pump) head.
                        .2 Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at
                            design flow or at 100% of total system head.
                        .3 Steam: 150% of operating (inlet) pressure.
              2.9.3.3 Water Valves.
                        .1 Body and trim style and materials shall be in accordance with
                            manufacturer’s recommendations for design conditions and service
                            shown, with equal percentage ports for modulating service.
                        .2 Sizing Criteria.
                            Two-position: line size
                            Two-way modulating: Pressure drop shall be equal to twice the
                               pressure drop through the heat exchanger, 50% of the pressure
                               difference between supply and return mains, or 35kPa, whichever
                               is greater.
                            Three-way modulating: Pressure drop shall be equal to twice the
                               pressure drop through the heat exchanger, 35 kPa maximum.
                       .3 Water valves shall fail normally open or closed, as scheduled on
                            plans, or as follows:
                            Water Zone Valves – normally open
                            Heating Coils – normally open
                            Chilled water – normally closed
                            Other – As scheduled or by sequence of operation.
   2.10 Electrical
       2.10.1 Generally, the Control Controls Contractor shall provide all wiring to all
              Mechanical controls except in the case of line voltage devices which directly
              switch single phase motors such as unit heaters, cabinet heaters, etc., or unless
              included in the Electrical Specifications and plans
       2.10.2 If devices other than those indicated in the Electrical Specifications or Drawings
              are used to interlock equipment by directly switching line voltage, it shall be the
              Controls Contractor’s responsibility to wire these devices
       2.10.3 The Control Controls Contractor’s responsibility for connection of control to motor
              starters, unitary equipment, etc., shall be from the terminal section within the
              MCC
       2.10.4 All wiring, line or low voltage, shall be installed in conduit within Mechanical and
              Electrical Service Rooms, reference B4, Electrical Section 16110 Wiring
              Materials & Methods. Installation shall be governed by the Division
              Specifications and all local governing codes. Conduit for Controls Systems shall
Design Guidelines                                                                          B3
Calgary Board of Education                                Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 23 of 33


              be by Controls Contractor. Wiring in other areas to be run in cable trays or
              raceways and NOT layed on t-bar grid or freely suspended.
       2.10.5 All conduits must terminate within 5 feet of device its serving.
       2.10.6 All power supplies for controls are this Controls Contractor’s responsibility unless
              otherwise specified in the Electrical Specifications
       2.10.7 Wiring of hand-off-auto switches on magnetic starters shall be such that the
              hand position shall bypass controls which are used to automatically start and
              stop that particular piece of equipment with the exception of safety controls such
              as low limit thermostats. Interlocks shall not be permitted in the hand position if
              unsafe or unacceptable conditions can be created.
3. EXECUTION
   3.1 Examination
       3.1.1 The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment
              locations. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the
              architect/engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.
       3.1.2 The controls Contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment may be
              installed as shown. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported
              to the architect/engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.
       3.1.3 The controls Contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other
              parts of the work. If head room or space conditions appear inadequate-or if any
              discrepancies occur between the plans and the controls Contractor’s work and
              the plans and the work of others-controls Contractors shall report these
              discrepancies to the engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any
              changes to accommodate the controls Contractor’s work with the work of others.
   3.2 General Workmanship
       3.2.1 Install equipment, piping, and raceway parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal,
              vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.
       3.2.2 Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping
              and equipment.
       3.2.3 Install all equipment in readily accessible locations.
       3.2.4 Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom form shorts and
              grounds.
       3.2.5 All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with accepted industry
              standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict
              adherence to local codes.
   3.3 Field Quality Control
       3.3.1 Controls Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code
              compliance and quality of workmanship.
   3.4 Wiring & Conduit
       3.4.1 All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the Canadian Electrical Code
              and Division 16 of the Design Guidelines.
       3.4.2 All wire to wire connections shall be made at a terminal block or terminal strip.
              All wire-to-wire connections shall be at a terminal block.
       3.4.3 All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit
              access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.
       3.4.4 All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted
              between termination points.
       3.4.5 Install wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Seal conduit
              where such conduit leaves heated area and enters unheated area. Maintain fire
              rating at all penetrations.
       3.4.6 The controls Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and
              shall maintain updated (as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at
              the job site.
       3.4.7 Raceway must be rigidly installed, adequately supported, properly reamed at
              both ends, and left clean and free of obstructions. Raceway sections shall be
              joined with couplings. Terminations must be made with fittings at boxes, and
              ends not terminating in boxes shall have bushings installed.
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 24 of 33


        3.4.8 All exposed wiring outside of cable trays in Mechanical and Electrical Rooms
              and other areas where wiring is visibly exposed, is to be in conduit. Wiring
              outside of cable trays in Corridor Ceiling Space to be installed in conduit. Wiring
              outside of cable trays in Classroom Ceiling Spaces to be without conduit.
              Conform to Division 16 requirements for conduit. Branch control cable serving
              individual terminal units such as fin radiation or reheat coils valves for occupied
              spaces are not to be installed in conduit.
       3.4.9 Flexible conduit shall not be used.
       3.4.10 Install conduit concealed in finished area.
       3.4.11 Install conduit free from dents. Plug end to prevent entrance of dirt or moisture.
       3.4.12 Install liquid tight flexible conduit or teck cable connections from junction boxes to
              avoid transmission of vibration.
       3.4.13 Install junction boxes in areas that are accessible.
       3.4.14 Do not bend flexible coaxial cables in a radius less than ten (10) times the cable
              outside diameter.
       3.4.15 Identify each cable and wire at every termination point.
       3.4.16 Leave pull wire in conduit for future use.
       3.4.17 Use weather proof conduit (Liquid Tite) in outdoor environments or where
              moisture exists.
       3.4.18 Provide instrumentation c/w standard electrical conduit box for termination
              unless otherwise noted.
       3.4.19 The use of FT4 type plenum cable is approved for use in accessible ceiling
              spaces. Lines outside of cable trays in ceiling spaces shall be run parallel with
              building lines that is securely strapped to structure.
       3.4.20 All communication cable shall be twisted and shielded and shall be installed in
              raceway.
       3.4.21 Sensor cable shall be twisted and shielded as recommended by manufacturer to
              reduce “noise” to analog inputs.
   3.5 Installation Of Sensors
       3.5.1 Install sensors in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
       3.5.2 Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment within which the
              sensor operates.
       3.5.3 Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes
              properly supported by wall framing.
       3.5.4 All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their raceways or in the wall
              to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting the reading.
       3.5.5 Sensors used in mixing plenums and hot and cold decks shall be of the
              averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner
              vertically across the duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.
       3.5.6 Low-limit sensors used in mixing plenums shall be installed in a serpentine
              manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary
              clip. Provide 3 m of sensing element for each 1 m^2 of coil area.
       3.5.7 All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid
              temperature sensors with heat-conducting fluid in static wells.
       3.5.8 Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall, complete with sun shield at
              designated location.
   3.6 Actuators
       3.6.1 Mount and link control damper actuators according to manufacturer’s
              recommendations.
              3.6.1.1 To compress seals when spring return actuators are used on normally
                        closed dampers, power actuator to approximately 5° open, loosen
                        linkage and manually close the damper, tighten linkage.
              3.6.1.2 Check operation to confirm smooth operation throughout entire range of
                        stroke.
              3.6.1.3 Provide all mounting hardware and linkages for actuator installation.
              3.6.1.4 Actuators shall be mounted directly to damper shaft or jackshaft.
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 25 of 33


             3.6.1.5 Actuators for valves shall be connected to valves with adapters approved
                     by the actuator manufacturer.
   3.7 Warning Labels
       3.7.1 Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all equipment that can be
             automatically started by the DDC system.
             3.7.1.1 Labels shall use white lettering on a red background.
             3.7.1.2 Warning labels shall read as follows:
                                                 CAUTION
                                      This equipment is operating under
                                   automatic control and may start or stop at
                                          any time without warning.
                                     Switch disconnect to “OFF” position
                                               before servicing.

   3.8  Identification Of Hardware And Wiring
       3.8.1 All wiring and cabling, including those within factory-fabricated panels shall be
               labeled at each end within 5 cm of termination with the DDC address or
               termination number.
       3.8.2 Permanently label each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or
               item served.
       3.8.3 Identify control panels, duct mounted thermostats, manual switches and sensors
               with minimum of 13mm x 50mm engraved lamicoid nameplates.
       3.8.4 Manufacturer’s nameplates and CSA labels shall be visible after equipment is
               installed.
       3.8.5 Identify all systems, equipment components, controls and sensors with engraved
               plastic tags identifying name, point address, control name and control panel
               location.
   3.9 Controllers
       3.9.1 Provide a separate controller for each AHU or other HVAC system.
       3.9.2 Building controllers and Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a
               minimum of 15% spare I/O capacity for each point type.
       3.9.3 Future use of spare capacity shall require providing the filed device, field wiring
               and point database definition. No additional controller boards and point modules
               shall be required to implement use of these spare points.
   3.10 Programming
       3.10.1 Point Naming. System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy
               operator interface without the use of a written index. Use the following naming
               convention: AAA.BBB-#.CCC-DD where:
               AAA: 3 letter school codes (provided by the CBE)
               BBB-#: Equipment designation (i.e. AHU-1)
               CCC – DD: Prefix and suffix designation (i.e.: CHWE-T “Chilled Water Entering
               Temperature”)
               A list of standard prefix and suffix designations will be provided to the controls
               contractor by the CBE.
       3.10.2 Software Programming. Provide programming for the system and adhere to the
               sequences of operation provided. All other system programming necessary for
               the operation of the system, but not specified in the documents shall also be
               provided by the controls Contractor. Imbed into the program sufficient comment
               statements to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment
               statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of operation.
       3.10.3 Operator interface.
               3.10.3.1 Provide graphics for all mechanical systems and floor plans of the
                           building. This includes each chilled water system, hot water system,
                           chiller, boiler, air handler, damper position and all terminal equipment.
                           Point information on the displays shall graphically update. Show on
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 26 of 33


                         each graphic all input and output points for the system. Also show
                         relevant calculated points.
              3.10.3.2 Show terminal equipment information on a graphic summary table.
                         Provide dynamic information for each point shown.
              3.10.3.3 The controls Contractor shall provide all the labour necessary to
                         install, initialize, start-up and troubleshoot all operator interface
                         software and its functions as described in this section.
   3.11 Control System Check-Out And Testing
       3.11.1 Start-up Testing. All testing listed in this article shall be performed by the
              controls Contractor and shall make up part of the necessary verification of an
              operating control system. This testing shall be completed before the owner’s
              representative is notified of the system demonstration.
              3.11.1.1 The controls Contractor shall furnish all labour and test apparatus
                         required to calibrate and prepare for service of all instruments,
                         controls, and accessory equipment furnished under this section of the
                         guideline.
              3.11.1.2 Verify that ALL control wiring is properly connected and free of all
                         shorts and ground faults. Verify the terminations are tight.
              3.11.1.3 Enable the control systems and verify calibration of all input devices
                         individually. Perform calibration procedures based on manufacturer’s
                         recommendations.
              3.11.1.4 Verify that all binary output devices operate properly and that the
                         normal positions are correct.
              3.11.1.5 Verify that all analog output devices are functional, that start and span
                         are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct. The
                         controls contractor shall make any necessary adjustments to valve
                         stem and damper blade travel.
             3.11.1.6 Verify that the system operation adheres to the sequences of operation
   3.12 Control System Demonstration And Acceptance
   3.13 Demonstration
       3.13.1 Prior to acceptance, the control system shall undergo a series of performance
              tests to verify operation and compliance with this specification. These tests shall
              occur after the Contractor has completed the installation, started up the system,
              and performed his/her own tests.
       3.13.2 The tests described in this section are to be performed in addition to the tests
              that the controls contractor performs as a necessary part of the installation, start-
              up, and debugging process and as specified in the “Control System Check-out
              and Testing” article in Part 3 of this specification. The engineer and a CBE
              representative shall be present to observe and review these tests. The engineer
              and CBE representative shall be notified at least 10 days in advance of the start
              of the testing procedures.
       3.13.3 The approved checklists and forms shall follow those approved in Part 1
              “Submittals” and be completed for all systems as part of the demonstration.
       3.13.4 The controls contractor shall provide at least 2 people with two way
              communication and demonstrate actual field operation of each control and
              sensing point for all modes of operation including day, night, occupied and
              unoccupied, fire/smoke alarm and power failure modes. The purpose is to
              demonstrate the calibration, response, and action of every point and system. Any
              test equipment required to prove the proper operation shall be provided by and
              operated by the contractor.
       3.13.5 As each control input is checked, a log shall be completed showing the date,
              technician’s initials, and any corrective action taken or needed.
       3.13.6 Demonstrate compliance with Part 1 “System Performance” and Part 3
              “Sequence of Operation.”
   3.14 Acceptance
       3.14.1 All tests described in this guide shall have been performed to the satisfaction of
              both the engineer and owner prior to the acceptance of the control system as
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 27 of 33


               meeting the requirements of completion. Any tests that cannot be completed due
               to circumstances beyond the control of the controls contractor may be exempt
               from the completion requirements but must be noted in the test log.
        3.14.2 The system shall not be accepted until all forms and checklists completed as
               part of the demonstration are submitted and approved as required in Part 1
               “Submittals.”
   3.15 Cleaning
        3.15.1 The controls contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from their activities on
               a daily basis. The contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc.
               under their control as soon as their contents have been removed.
        3.15.2 At the completion of work, all equipment shall be checked for damage. Any
               enclosures that have been deformed shall be replaced with new.
   3.16 Training
        3.16.1 Training will be conducted according to approved course outline submitted as per
               Part 1 “Submittals” section of this guideline.
        3.16.2 Provide a minimum of one 3 hour building “walk-thru” for designated CBE trades
               people in order to familiarize them with the building systems, control strategy,
               controller locations, maintenance information and other pertinent information as it
               relates to the building management system.
        3.16.3 Train the designated staff of owner’s representatives to enable them to do the
               following task and other tasks not listed and agreed upon by the CBE:
               3.16.3.1 Facility Operators
                          a) Proficiently operate the system to level determined by CBE.
                          b) Understand DDC system components.
                          c) Operate the workstation.
                          d) Log on and off the system.
                          e) Access graphics, point reports and logs.
                          f) Adjust and change system set points.
                           g) Recognize system alarms and there meaning
               3.16.3.2 Controls Technicians (Points (a) thru (g) plus)
                           h) Adjust time schedules and holiday schedules.
                           i) Understand job layout and location of control components.
                           j) Access data from DDC controllers and Application Specific
                             Controllers.
                           k) Make and change graphics on a workstation.
                           l) Create, delete and modify alarms.
                           m) Create, delete and modify point trend logs.
                           n) Create, delete and modify reports
                           o) Add, remove and modify system physical points.
                           p) Create and modify programming
                           q) Perform DDC system diagnostics.
               3.16.3.3 Training venue shall be provided by the controls contractor. The
                           classroom shall be capable of accommodating a class size of no less
                           than 10. The classroom shall have individual laptops provided with
                           controls application software installed. The control application software
                           shall be the same version as that which is installed on-site. A web link
                           for direct access to the school BMS is preferable.
       3.16.3 Training Schedule.                   Table 3
                       Length of               Attendees              Topics**          Venue
                        Session                                     (see 3.16.3)
                        (hours)
Within 1 week of
                           4              Facility Operator(s)         a to g           On-site
building turnover
 Within 1 month                          Control Techs (Group
   of building         4 (in A.M.)                 A)*                 a to g       Training Room
     turnover                            Option for other F.O.’s
Design Guidelines                                                                         B3
Calgary Board of Education                               Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                      Page 28 of 33


                                       Control Techs (Group
                      4 (in P.M.)                B)                 a to g       Training Room
                                       Option for other F.O.’s
                                       Control Techs (Group
                      4 (in A.M.)                A)                 h to q       Training Room

                                       Control Techs (Group
                      4 (in P.M.)               B)                  h to q       Training Room

                                       Control Techs (Group
                                                                 As determined
                      4 (in A.M.)                A)*                by CBE       Training Room
                                       Option for other F.O.’s
                                       Control Techs (Group
                                                                 As determined
                      4 (in P.M.)                B)                 by CBE       Training Room
Within 9 months
                                       Option for other F.O.’s
  of building
                                       Control Techs (Group
   turnover.                                                     As determined
                      4 (in A.M.)                A)                 by CBE       Training Room

                                       Control Techs (Group
                                                                 As determined
                      4 (in P.M.)               B)                  by CBE       Training Room

       *Control Technicians will be divided (by the CBE) into 2 groups GROUP A & GROUP B.
                **Topics may be added or deleted as deemed necessary by the CBE.

   3.17 Sequence Of Operation
       3.17.1 Abbreviations
                      AHU-n Air Handling Unit #n
                      B-n       Boiler #n
                      BAS       Distributed Control and Monitoring System
                      EF-n Exhaust Fan #n
                      FC-n Fan Coil Unit #n
                      OAT       Outside Air Temperature
                      P-n       Pump #n
                      RH        Relative Humidity
                      SAT       Supply Air Temperature
                      RAT       Return Air Temperature
                      MAT Mixed Air Temperature
                      UH-n Unit Heater #n
       3.17.2 Radiation / Reheat Coils
              3.17.2.1 Normally open two (2) -way control valve shall cycle to maintain space
                        temperature set point as measured by room temperature sensor.
              3.17.2.2 Provide day / night setback control to provide two (2) stage night and
                        weekend temperature. Set each. The first at 4:00 p.m. weekdays to
                        19°C and the second at 11:00 p.m. weekdays and on weekends to
                        15°C
              3.17.2.3 Radiation and reheat valves to be electronic fully modulating electronic
                        fail in place, non-spring return and controlled by DDC space sensor.
                        No floating control valves are permitted
       3.17.3 Fan Coil Units
              3.17.3.1 Related Equipment: FC-1, FC-2,
              3.17.3.2 Fan coil unit blower to cycle to maintain space set-point as measured
                        by room temperature sensor. Sensor to open control valve in supply
                        line on a call for heat; no wild loops.
       3.17.4 Unit Heaters – Vestibule
              3.17.4.1 Related Equipment: UH-1, UH-2
Design Guidelines                                                                          B3
Calgary Board of Education                                Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 29 of 33


              3.17.4.2 Unit heaters including cabinet unit heaters shall not be controlled by
                        BMS; a line voltage thermostat shall cycle the fan motor on a drop in
                        space temperature.
       3.17.5 Unit Heaters - Combustion Air
              3.17.5.1 Related Equipment: UH-1, UH-2
              3.17.5.2 Combustion air unit heaters shall be controlled via BMS. Heating
                        water control valve shall cycle to maintain temperature set point as
                        measured by temperature sensor.
       3.17.6 Main Ventilation System
              3.17.6.1 Related Equipment: AHU-1, AHU-2, EF-1, EF-2 …, P-5, P-6,
              3.17.6.2 A differential pressure transducer shall measure resistance across the
                        filter bank to alarm a clogged filter condition.
              3.17.6.3 During day operation, the BAS shall start the fans and the control
                        system shall be energized.
              3.17.6.4 During night operation the BAS shall stop the fans, close the outdoor
                        air damper, and return air damper shall be fully open
              3.17.6.5
                        .1 In occupied mode, a controller located in the discharge of the fan
                              shall modulate in sequence the mixed air dampers and heating
                              coil valve to maintain a constant fan discharge temperature.
                              Provide full economizer control.
                        .2 Outside air sensor shall send signal back to lock out mechanical
                              cooling below 15C (adjustable). At above 15C outside air
                              temperature, Heating Systems shall be locked out.
                        .3 In unoccupied mode, mixed air controller located upstream of the
                              preheat coil shall open the preheat coil valve 100% if the controller
                              senses a temperature below 5C (adjustable).
              3.17.6.6 A modulating low limit controller located in the mixed air shall prevent
                        the mixed temperature from dropping below 10ºC (operator
                        adjustable). The low limit controller shall be hard wired to the MCC for
                        fan shutdown
              3.17.6.7 On start-up after return fan is running supply fan starts and the return
                        dampers shall remain open for five (5) minutes after which the
                        minimum F/A damper shall open for five (5) minutes after which the
                        dampers go to full mixed air control.
              3.17.6.8 When the outdoor air temperature is greater than the return air
                        temperature, all the dampers shall return to their normal recirculating
                        position. This outdoor change over shall be done with a 2ºC
                        deadband.
              3.17.6.9 A safety low limit located after the heating coil discharge shall
                        shutdown the System when the temperature drops below 4ºC. An
                        alarm to be sent to the Digital Control System. The low limit shall be
                        manual reset. The low limit shall be hard wired to the MCC's for fan
                        shutdown.
              3.17.6.10 The fan discharge temperature controller shall be reset with outside
                        temperature at a proportional rate with the following end points.
              3.17.6.11 If OAT = 0.5ºC (or less) then SAT = 20ºC
              3.17.6.12 If OAT = 15ºC (or more) then SAT = 15ºC
              3.17.6.13 In addition to discharge temperature control incorporate space
                        temperature reset control
              3.17.6.14 At mixed air temperature below 10ºC (operator adjustable) the heating
                        mode shall be enabled.
              3.17.6.15 AH1, AH2, to have dampers supplied as part of the units. Controls sub-
                        trade to provide damper operators and remaining control devices to
                        provide controlled system as described.
Design Guidelines                                                                        B3
Calgary Board of Education                              Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                     Page 30 of 33


              3.17.6.16 Control relief air dampers in relation to return air dampers in
                        associated system in conjunction with static pressure sensors for
                        remote relief air hoods.
              3.17.6.17 Provide spring-wound override timers (0-4 hours) to turn units to
                        occupied mode. Override to BAS to be located in Facility Operator’s
                        Office.
              3.17.6.18 Provide interlocks of exhaust fans to associated systems per point
                        schedule.
              3.17.6.19 Provide high temperature protection.
              3.17.6.20 During unoccupied mode, if any space temperature falls below low
                        alarm limit temperature for that space, the air handlers associated with
                        that space will turn on until the space temperature is above the low
                        alarm limit temperature.
       3.17.7 Gymnasium Ventilation System
             3.17.7.1 Related Equipment: AHU-1, AHU-2, EF-1, EF-2…, P-5, P-6,
              3.17.7.2 A differential pressure transducer shall measure resistance across the
                        filter bank to alarm a clogged filter condition.
              3.17.7.3 During day operation, the BAS shall start the fans and the control
                        system shall be energized.
              3.17.7.4 During night operation, the BAS shall stop the fans and close the
                        outdoor air damper.
              3.17.7.5 A controller located in the discharge of the fan shall modulate in
                        sequence the mixed air dampers and heating coil valve, to maintain a
                        constant fan discharge temperature. Full economizer control to be
                        provided. In unoccupied mode, a mixed air controller located upstream
                        of the preheat coil shall open the preheat coil valve 100% if the
                        controller senses a temperature below 10C (adjustable).
              3.17.7.6 A modulating mixed air controller shall prevent the mixed temperature
                        from dropping below 10ºC (operator adjustable). The low limit
                        controller shall be hard wired to the MCC for fan shutdown.
              3.17.7.7 At mixed air temperature below 10ºC (operator adjustable) the heating
                        mode shall be enabled.
              3.17.7.8 On start-up after return fan is running supply fan starts and the return
                        dampers shall remain open for five (5) minutes after which the
                        minimum F/A damper shall open for five (5) minutes after which the
                        dampers go to full mixed air control.
              3.17.7.9 A safety low limit located after the heating coil discharge shall
                        shutdown the System when the temperature drops below 4ºC. An
                        alarm to be sent to the Digital Control System. The low limit shall be
                        manual reset. The low limit shall be hard wired to the MCC's for fan
                        shutdown.
              3.17.7.10 The fan discharge temperature controller shall be reset with outside
                        temperature at a proportional rate with the following end points:
              3.17.7.11 If OAT = 0.5ºC (or less) then SAT = 20ºC
              3.17.7.12 If OAT = 15ºC (or more) then SAT = 15ºC.
              3.17.7.13 In addition to discharge temperature control incorporate space
                        temperature reset control.
              3.17.7.14 AH1, AH2, to have dampers supplied as part of the units. Controls sub-
                        trade to provide damper operators and remaining control devices to
                        provide controlled system as described.
              3.17.7.15 Control relief air dampers in relation to return air dampers in
                        associated system in conjunction with static pressure sensors for
                        remote relief air hoods.
              3.17.7.16 Provide spring wound override timers (0-4 hours) to turn units to
                        occupied mode. Override to BAS to be located in physical education
                        instructor’s office. Provide digital interface to BAS.
Design Guidelines                                                                       B3
Calgary Board of Education                             Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                    Page 31 of 33


              3.17.7.17 Provide interlocks of exhaust fans to associated Systems per point
                          schedule.
              3.17.7.18 Provide high temperature protection.
              3.17.7.19 Gymnasium unit to be c/w CO2 sensor in the return air duct to control
                          minimum outside air damper position. If CO2 sensor level rises above
                          acceptable levels, BMS to modulate open outside air damper and
                          increase fan speed to high.
              3.17.7.20 Two (2) speed fans shall be employed. Second speed override to be
                          enacted via BMS during high Gymnasium assembly occupancies or
                          during times when free cooling is to be optimized on Caretaker’s
                          command.
   3.18 Humidification
       3.18.1 Related Equipment: H-1, H-2,
       3.18.2 The BAS shall modulate the humidifier control valve to maintain space humidity
              at set point.
       3.18.3 Humidifier shall be controlled to limit humidity in supply air duct to 85%.
       3.18.4 Space humidify set point shall be reset by outdoor air temperature at a
              proportional rate to the following schedule:
              If OAT = -35ºC or less, then R.H. = 15%
              If OAT = 0ºC or higher, then R.H. = 30%.
   3.19 Humidification Steam Boiler
       3.19.1 Related Equipment: B-3,
       3.19.2 Boiler operation to be enabled by DDC.
       3.19.3 Pressure sensor shall monitor steam pressure output from boiler.
       3.19.4 Boiler operation shall be disabled when ventilation unit supply fan is not
              operating.
   3.20 Primary Heating Loop Pumps
       3.20.1 Related Equipment: P-1, P-2,
       3.20.2 One (1) of the two (2) heating pumps shall start automatically and run
              continuously whenever the outdoor air temperature falls below 16ºC. Provide a
              2ºC differential between starting and stopping. The second pump shall be on
              standby and will start automatically upon failure of the lead pump.
       3.20.3 Alternate the lead pump after every 200 hours of operation or after each off
              cycle, whichever comes first.
       3.20.4 When the heating pumps are off, as sensed by the flow switch, the boilers shall
              stop firing.
   3.21 Boiler Control
       3.21.1 Related Equipment: B-1, B-2,
       3.21.2 Boiler operation shall be disabled until primary pump is proven on.
       3.21.3 The primary loop hot water supply temperature shall be maintained at set point
              by modulating the two (2) boilers in sequence. This sequence shall be rotated
              every 24 hours so that each boiler alternates as lead boiler.
       3.21.4 During occupied mode, the primary loop supply temperature set point shall be
              reset by the outdoor air temperature according to the following schedule
              (schedule to be adjustable):
                  OAT                    HWST
                  -35ºC                  95ºC
                  16ºC                   65ºC.
       3.21.5 During unoccupied mode, the primary loop supply temperature set point shall be
              reset by the outdoor air temperature according to the following adjustable
              schedule (schedule to be adjustable):
                  OAT                    HWST
                  -35ºC                  75ºC
                  16ºC                   65ºC.
       3.21.6 Provide an alarm for low hot water supply temperature set at 10ºC below set
              point. Disable this alarm above 12ºC.
       3.21.7 Boiler high limit control to have an automatic reset
Design Guidelines                                                                           B3
Calgary Board of Education                                 Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 32 of 33


   3.22 Glycol Heating Water Control
       3.22.1 During occupied mode, BAS indoor / outdoor controller shall modulate the 3-way
              valves on the heat exchanger to maintain Glycol Heating System water
              temperature to the following schedule (schedule to be adjustable):
                    OAT                   GWST
                    -35ºC                 75ºC
                    16ºC                  25ºC.
       3.22.2 During unoccupied mode, BAS indoor / outdoor controller shall modulate the 3-
              way valves on the heat exchanger to maintain Glycol Heating System water
              temperature to the following schedule (schedule to be adjustable):
                    OAT                   GWST
                    -35ºC                 50ºC
                    16ºC                  12ºC
   3.23 Glycol Fill System
       3.23.1 Glycol fill pump shall be manually operated; not to be controlled via BMS
   3.24 Domestic Water Recirculation
       3.24.1 Related Equipment: P-8,
       3.24.2 Recirculation pump to operate continuously during occupied hours and be
              disabled during unoccupied period.
   3.25 Drain Trap Primers
       3.25.1 CBE has had significant problems with drain trap primers and if possible are not
              to be used. Any use to be approved by CBE
   3.26 Urinal Tanks
       3.26.1 If utilized, provide scheduled operation of two (2) solenoid valves on supply
              water lines to urinal tank. On new installations, flush valves will be installed
   3.27 Car Plugs
       3.27.1 Car plug-ins must be divided equally onto two (2) power panels, each panel
              having a control contactor, operated so that each panel can be turned on and off
              alternating with the other panel to keep electrical demand down. Such contactors
              shall both be off at or above –15C (adjustable) and alternating below that
              temperature during normal hours. Two (2) separate plug-in duplex receptacles
              for facility operators are to be turned on at -15ºC (adjustable) but remain on until
              11:00 p.m. Alternate general car plugs in a 15 minute cycle during normal school
              hours from 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Alternate caretaker’s receptacles in a 15
              minute cycle from 7:00 a.m. to 11:00 p.m. All times to be adjustable
   3.28 Ceiling Circulation Fans
       3.28.1 Provide solid state thermostatic multi-speed controllers to control fans or banks
              of fans as indicated. Controllers shall be sized to match connected load. Ceiling
              fans to be installed in areas with high ceilings such as libraries and gymnasiums
              as deemed necessary
   3.29 Sump Pumps
       3.29.1 Provide high level alarm tie-in to BMS
   3.30 Lighting
       3.30.1 Exterior Lighting: Photocell control and timer by the BMS.
       3.30.2 Interior lighting:
              3.30.2.1 Voltage Relay Switching: Allow capability of Lighting Control System
                           to interface with BMS in the future with low voltage relays controllable
                           by the BMS.
              3.30.2.2 Occupancy Sensors: Temperature application specific controllers for
                           each space shall be c/w spare digital input in order that, in the future,
                           each occupancy sensor status can be reported to BMS.
       3.30.3 Reference B4, Electrical Section 16500 Lighting Systems.
   3.31 Security Alarm Transmitter Interface
       3.31.1 The CBE Highfield Security Office shall receive the following alarm signals:
              3.31.1.1 Low Building Temperature: BAS to send a digital signal to CBE
                           Highfield Security Office via the Silent Knight security control panel
Design Guidelines                                                                        B3
Calgary Board of Education                              Mechanical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                     Page 33 of 33


                       when any space temperature sensor is below 10ºC. Coordinate with
                       Electrical.
              3.31.1.2 Water in Mechanical Boiler Room: Water detectors are not to be
                       connected to the BAS. Signal from electronic water detector to CBE
                       Highfield Security Office via the Silent Knight Security control panel
                       upon water detection. Supply and installation of detector by Electrical.
                       Reference B4, Electrical Section 16727 Security Alarm System, Item
                       2.7 for flood detect6727 Security Alarm System, Item 2.7 for flood
                       detect
Design Guidelines                                                                              B4
Calgary Board of Education                                    Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 1 of 23



SECTION B4               ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION GUIDELINES

Section 16010                    Electrical General Requirements
1. General
   1.1 Accessibility: Locate conduit runs, outlet boxes, equipment (such as battery packs),
        etc., so as to maximize the ease with which such things may be accessed for servicing,
        pulling additional wires, etc. In stairwell areas, lighting and other equipment must be
        located over the landing areas; this will also maximize ease of servicing.
   1.2 Obstruction: Conduit and electrical device equipment shall not be located in front of
        any other device or equipment in such a way as to prevent or hinder access to the
        complete original device or equipment.
   1.3 Coordination of Equipment: Raceway, device and equipment positions shall be
        located in such a way as to coordinate with other trade’s products (such as millwork)
        and existing equipment so that nothing is covered up or rendered unserviceable.
   1.4 Fire Alarm System / Power Panel / Cabinet Keys:
        1.4.1 Provide keys to the fire alarm panel, power panels and other major cabinets /
               systems in sufficient numbers for all principals (including assistant principals and
               vice principals), all facility operators and an additional set of keys for maintenance
               personnel.
        1.4.2 In the case of new facilities, where ever possible, master all keys so that one (1)
               key opens all.
        1.4.3 In the case of existing facilities, master any new keys to match the existing keys.
   1.5 Electrical Alternatives and Allowances: Where electrical cash allowances and
        alternatives are specified, place them in the General Conditions section of the
        specifications along with the other architectural, mechanical and structural cash
        allowances and alternatives. Include a reference in the electrical specifications pointing
        to the electrical cash allowances and alternatives in the General Conditions. No cash
        allowances or alternatives to appear in electrical specification.
   1.6 Asbestos Containing Materials: At existing CBE sites, be aware of possible asbestos
        surfaces and follow regulatory requirements.
   1.7 Coordination with School Staff: Coordination is required with school staff for
        demolition and installation of equipment when school is in session. Do not disable the
        Fire Alarm system when the building is occupied. Provide notification to school when
        other electrical systems are disabled. When practical, reactivate system before leaving
        site.
   1.8 Demolition: All removal of communication cables is to be performed by the
        communications contractor. The communications contractor must confirm that a cable
        is not required for existing operations prior to the disconnection and removal of the
        cable. Specific direction must be given by either the consultant or the CBE prior to
        demolition.
   1.9 Verification: All major electrical equipment shall be verified to confirm safe and proper
        operation (panel boards, transformers, lighting control, security, telephone, fire alarm,
        etc.).
   1.10 Specific Equipment Requirements: The electrical consultant is responsible for
        collecting and designing to the requirements of the specific equipment that will be
        installed in the facility. For example:           wood shop equipment, pre-engineering
        equipment, kitchen appliances, computer workstations, etc.
   1.11 Codes and Standards:
        1.11.1 Follow the latest edition of all applicable national, provincial and municipal
                 codes.
        1.11.2 If required obtain a ruling from the authority having jurisdiction for special
                 installations.
Design Guidelines                                                                              B4
Calgary Board of Education                                    Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 2 of 23


        1.11.3 The applicable codes and standards shall include, but are not limited to the
                  current edition of:
                  The Canadian Electrical Code
                  Alberta Building Code
                  Model National Energy Code of Canada for Buildings 1997 mandatory
                  requirements
                  CAN/ULC S524, CAN/ULC S537
                  CAN/CSA T529, CAN/CSA T530
                  TIA/EIA 568B and TIA/EIA 569.
   1.12 Green Log Book: The electrical contractor is responsible to sign “Green Log Book” in
        facility operator’s office and to fill in information such as: type of work, location, permit
        no., company, contact info, etc.
   1.13 Related Sections: Reference A6 General Electrical Design, A7 Interior Spaces and B6
        Electrical Typical Drawings for additional requirements.
   1.14 Professional Obligation: Receipt of information or documentation from CBE employees
        in no way relieves the consultant from the professional obligation to meet all applicable
        codes and standards.

Section 16110                   Wiring Materials & Methods
1. Wiring Devices
   1.1 Power Receptacles
        1.1.1 Mounting Heights: All receptacles to be mounted on walls at 300mm or above
              counter-tops or as specifically determined to suit occupant use. Data outlets and
              supporting power to be mounted at 787mm AFF.
        1.1.2 Block Heater (Parking Lot) Receptacles:
              1.1.2.1 Reference A2 Site Planning, Section 2.14 parking facilities for more
                      controls detail.
              1.1.2.2 Reference Electrical Standard Drawing E-1 Typical car plugs control
                      schematic.
        1.1.3 Receptacles for Network Data Outlets:
              1.1.3.1 One (1) dedicated 120V 15/20A T-slot receptacle per four (4) workstation
                      data outlets.
              1.1.3.2 Circuiting as per Alberta Infrastructure guidelines.
              1.1.3.3 Power outlets to be installed at a height to match data outlet.
        1.1.4 Receptacles for Smartboards (Existing Schools): One (1) dedicated 120V
              15/20A T-slot receptacle split between three (3) Smartboards. Reference drawing
              E-SB-1 for details on mounting of receptacles and data for Smartboards.
   1.2 Motor Protection & Control: Locate in service rooms accessible to authorized
        personnel only.
   1.3 Variable Frequency Drives: Provide manual overrides for variable frequency drive
        fans.
   1.4 Cover plates: Use High-impact Smooth Nylon coverplates on all wiring devices.
   1.5 Boxes
        1.5.1 Surface Wall Boxes: To be used in existing buildings only, where surface-
              mounted runs cannot be avoided. In these instances, use die-cast aluminum,
              knock-out free, powder coat finish outlet boxes c/w closure plugs.
        1.5.2 Access Floor Boxes: Recessed type, multi-service steel recessed floor boxes
              c/w two (2) split duplex receptacles and two (2) four-gang tele-data brackets.
        1.5.3 Telecommunications Zone Boxes: Type: Standard NEMA 1 Screw-cover
              boxes.
        1.5.4 Service Poles (PAC-Poles) Reference B4, Electrical Section 16790 Computer
              Network System.
              1.5.4.1 Type: Dual channel (power / communications), all metal construction.
                      Front plastic channel covers are not acceptable.
              1.5.4.2 Fittings: Use pole manufacturer's fittings suitable for duplex receptacles
                      and computer network outlets.
Design Guidelines                                                                              B4
Calgary Board of Education                                    Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                            Page 3 of 23


              1.5.4.3 Type: Hubbell dual channel brushed aluminum or G4000 wiremold.
2. Wiring Methods
   2.1 Power Wiring:
        2.1.1 #12 AWG or larger for all home runs.
        2.1.2 All armored cable must be run parallel to building lines and properly supported.
        2.1.3 All power branch circuit and home-run wiring to be run in minimum 21mm
              diameter conduit.
   2.2 Low Voltage Cabling Pathways:
        2.2.1 Method:
              2.2.1.1 Cable tray throughout major runs in corridors.
              2.2.1.2 Open air cabling within classroom ceilings and within stud walls.
              2.2.1.3 EMT Conduit must be installed
                           In surface-mount applications and within block walls.
                           Within corridors from cable tray to accessible ceiling space within
                              classrooms and administration areas.
                           Within electrical and mechanical service rooms.
                           In non-assessable ceiling spaces.
                           In exposed areas.
                           In all other areas subject to mechanical damage.
        2.2.2 Installation to meet EIA/TIA 569 telecommunications pathway standard.
        2.2.3 Use plenum rated cable where required.
        2.2.4 All plenum cabling is to be kept clear of all power equipment and lighting fixtures.
              Installation guidelines:
                           Transformers not less than 1000mm
                           Power lines (120v systems) not less than 300mm
                           Power lines (600v systems) not less than 1000mm
                           Fluorescent lighting not less than 300mm
                           Electrical motors not less than 1000mm.
        2.2.5 Open Air Pathways:
              2.2.5.1 Cables must be properly supported and bundled over entire length of run.
              2.2.5.2 Use approved cable tray, cable clips or hangers (i.e. J-Hooks) at 600mm
                        centers to effectively support all multi-cable harnessing. Support cables
                        from building structure, independent of building water lines, ducting,
                        lighting supports, etc.
              2.2.5.3 All conduit ends, including vertical conduit stubs in wall cavities, shall be
                        fitted with insulated grommets. Cables run open air in stud wall cavities
                        shall have insulated bushings fitted to the top wall plate.
              2.2.5.4 One (1) small loop of cable shall be arranged in the cable before entering
                        the wall cavity. Excessive slack cable should be avoided as this increases
                        run length. Reference: detail drawing E-3 open air cabling.
              2.2.5.5 Pathway to be installed tight to underside of roof in corridor areas and
                        along lines parallel to building structures. Penetrations through full-height
                        wall partitions should be made through horizontal openings or sleeves.
        2.2.6 Cable Tray:
              2.2.6.1 Size cable tray with allowance for 20% additional capacity.
              2.2.6.2 Type: Continuous, rigid, welded steel, wire mesh (wire basket).
        2.2.7 Related Sections: Reference: Section 16727 security alarm system, Section
              16760 telephone system and Section 16790 computer network system.
   2.3 Grounding and Bonding:
        2.3.1 Separate conductor required for bonding of all major equipment (i.e. motors,
              panel boards, MCC’s, low voltage control system panels. etc.).
        2.3.2 Communications Raceway Systems: Reference EIA/TIA 607 Standard for
              grounding requirements.
3. Labeling
   3.1 Boxes
Design Guidelines                                                                           B4
Calgary Board of Education                                 Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 4 of 23


        3.1.1 Power junction box covers to indicate the circuit numbers using permanent ink
              marker.
        3.1.2 Low tension system boxes colour coded to indicate system type.
   3.2 Equipment Nameplates
        3.2.1 Clearly label all major electrical equipment including main distribution centres,
              sub-distribution panels, power panels, lighting panels, relay panels, disconnect
              switches, starters, contactors, motor control centres, terminal cabinets and
              panels, pushbuttons and selector switches, etc. by permanent labels described
              below.
        3.2.2 Provide nameplates of lamicoid plastic with black back showing 10mm white
              letters in a visual location on the surface of the equipment. For flush panels,
              mount nameplates on front inside of enclosure.
        3.2.3 Label all receptacles with the supply panel and circuit number using transparent
              label tape.

Section 16415                   Main Service & Distribution
1. Distribution Equipment
   1.1 Main Distribution Panel boards:
         1.1.1 Approved products: Cutler-Hammer, Siemens and Group Schnieder Canada
               FPE or preapproved equal.
         1.1.2 Main and sub-distribution to be circuit breaker only. Fusible disconnects are not
               acceptable.
2. Branch Panel boards:
   2.1 Breakers: Bolt-on, moulded case, quick make, quick break, thermal magnetic.
   2.2 Covers to be lockable where panelboard is located within public areas.
   2.3 Covers shall also bolt directly to the tub, wing bolt style covers not acceptable. All
       equipment must meet EEMAC standards.
3. Motor Control Centre: Design motor control centres to conform to A.I. guidelines.
4. Power Quality
   4.1 Transient voltage surge suppression
   4.2 A surge protective device (SPD) shall be provided for each building incoming AC power
       supply and all supplies entering or leaving the building.
   4.3 Provide TVSS integral with distribution equipment. Additionally, TVSS to be modular
       such that the TVSS component can be removed without replacing the entire panel board.
   4.4 Provide TVSS on branch circuit panel for designated media centres.

Section 16500                   Lighting Systems
1. Lighting Systems
   1.1 General
        1.1.1 Provide lighting fixtures to meet but not exceed required lighting levels,
              reference A7 Interior space requirements.
        1.1.2 Provide a detailed lighting design report as outlined in A.I. Guidelines. Design
              report will include a schedule describing each typical area, luminaire, lighting
              source, load (W/m2) and design lighting levels. To demonstrate all lighting levels
              are designed within given ranges, provide updated lighting report at 75% drawing
              review stage for CBE review. Upon project completion, add field measured levels
              to the report.
   1.2 Disposal
        1.2.1 In retrofit situations, ensure all lamp and lighting components containing
              hazardous materials are recycled at an approved facility in accordance with all
              government regulations.
        1.2.2 Provide O&M Documentation of proper disposal of hazardous materials.
   1.3 Lamps
        1.3.1 Minimize different sizes and lamp wattages.
        1.3.2 Cool white colour temperature and colour rendering index of not less than 80.
        1.3.3 Linear Fluorescent Lamps:
Design Guidelines                                                                             B4
Calgary Board of Education                                   Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 5 of 23


                  1.3.3.1 Low mercury content, initial lumens 2950 and 24000 hours rated life.
                  1.3.3.2 Use 4’ tubes generally, other sizes may be considered for special
                           applications but only with CBE preapproval. Do not use U-tube lighting.
           1.3.4 HID lamp bases shall either be welded or use lead-free solder. Pay particular
                  attention to lamp starting method and ballast compatibility.
           1.3.5 A minimum of 4100 °K lamps for fluorescent lamp fixtures is acceptable.
   1.4   Ballasts
           1.4.1 Use only ballasts that contain no PCB’s.
           1.4.2 Use potted or encapsulated electronic ballasts.
           1.4.3 Ballasts shall have a manufacturer’s warranty of not less than five (5) years.
           1.4.4 HID ballasts: When HID fixtures are used in instructional areas, use ‘A’ noise
                  rated ballasts or mount remotely to reduce noise level. For remote design, mount
                  HID ballasts in adjacent storage rooms, spaced to manufacturer’s
                  recommendations, with a wire trough above.
   1.5   Interior Lighting
           1.5.1 Use T8 technology wherever possible.
           1.5.2 High bay luminaries: (high ceiling (<25 feet) applications).
                  1.5.2.1 T5HO Fluorescent Fixtures
                  .1 Approved product: Reflex BIGMAX Cat. No. BIGPM42HSI2M32PIDFDF or
                       preapproved equal.
                  .2 Suspension: A stable suspension system to prevent oscillation from impact
                       of gymnasium equipment.
                  .3 Combination 60% direct and 40% indirect distribution.
                  1.5.2.2 HID Fixtures
                  .1 Combination 60% direct and 40% indirect distribution; maximum 400W
                       pulse- start metal halide c/w safety hooks.
   1.6   Exterior Lighting
           1.6.1 Provide cast protective grille for all luminaries below 4m.
           1.6.2 Incorporate a sharp cut-off, night friendly design.
           1.6.3 Pole-Mounted Parking Lot Lighting:
                  1.6.3.1 Light Level: Minimum level as required by City of Calgary.
                  1.6.3.2 Control: Photocell control and timer by the Building Management
                           System (BMS).
                  1.6.3.3 Security Lighting: For building designs that create concealed areas by
                           exterior wall configurations, provide minimal motion operated lighting
                           with protective cages in these locations.
           1.6.4 Provide a site plan indicating exterior light coverage and motion detector
                  coverage.
   1.7   Exit Lighting
           1.7.1 Use LED illumination.
           1.7.2 Convert existing incandescent exit signs to LED with retrofit modules.
           1.7.3 Use dedicated AC circuits that are in common with battery pack AC circuits.
   1.8   Emergency Lighting Systems
           1.8.1 Lighting Heads: 12 Watt, 12 Volt, micro quartz, double and single head.
           1.8.2 Battery Pack: Sealed lead acid, 10 year rated life, audible alarm silence button.
           1.8.3 AC Power: Provide standard 120V, 15A, straight-blade plug cord set.
           1.8.4 DC Power: Provide twist-lock plug disconnect and cabtire DC cord sets.
   1.9   Special Lighting Systems
           1.9.1 Special lighting includes stage and drama lighting systems, reference A7 Interior
                  space requirements.
           1.9.2 Electrical consultant to completely design and provide for all requirements in
                  consultation with CBE. Include all conduit, wireways, and device boxes required
                  for the future installation of the drama style dimming system equipment.
           1.9.3 Use where program requirements require drama lighting systems.
           1.9.4 All systems will have one (1) dimmer per circuit capability.
           1.9.5 Equipment NIC: Racks, dimmers, controllers, control boards and luminaries.
Design Guidelines                                                                            B4
Calgary Board of Education                                  Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 6 of 23


2. Lighting Controls
   2.1 Low Voltage Relay Switching: Lighting in new schools to utilize a complete 24 VAC
       low voltage relay system to control the general building lighting. Lighting control system
       to interface with BMS with low voltage relays controllable by the BMS.
   2.2 Keyed Lighting Switches: Provide the same keyed lighting switches throughout the
       school, Hubbell cat. # HBL1201L.
   2.3 Occupancy Sensors
         2.3.1 Occupancy sensor to be approved by AES project manager.
         2.3.2 Wherever possible, avoid the use of ultrasonic occupancy sensors. Use passive
                detection technology or if necessary, dual infrared / ultrasonic operating above
                35 KHz.
         2.3.3 Passive infrared occupancy sensors to be "masked" as required preventing
                sensors from detecting motion outside the area they are controlling. The masking
                material provided by the occupancy sensor manufacturer expressly for this
                purpose.
         2.3.4 Ultrasonic occupancy sensors shall be calibrated so that they detect motion only
                in the intended control space.
         2.3.5 Occupancy sensors intended for use with HID systems (typically high-low
                operation) shall be designated by the manufacturer to be compatible with such
                dimming systems.
         2.3.6 Flush mounted, 360° detectors are preferred.
         2.3.7 Occupancy sensors shall be installed with 1000mm of slack wire to permit
                subsequent relocation without the need for rewiring.
         2.3.8 Occupancy sensor status to be reported to BMS.
         2.3.9 Failure of an occupancy sensor shall not allow the lights to remain OFF, when
                there are people in the room.
   2.4 Daylight Harvesting
         2.4.1 Use photocell sensors and low voltage relays to individual lamps or dimmable
                (stepped or continuous) ballasts to control fixtures in areas where daylight may
                supplement the artificial lighting. Control fixtures based on daylight penetration
                equal 1.5 times the height of the daylight window. Include low voltage auto / off
                control switches.
         2.4.2 Any specified dimming ballasts shall be electronic (solid state) 100% to 10%
                dimmable unless otherwise noted.
         2.4.3 Photocell and other sensors shall be installed with 1500m of slack wire to permit
                subsequent relocation without the need for rewiring.
         2.4.4 Occupancy sensors intended for use with HID systems (typically high-low
                operation) shall be designated by the manufacturer to be compatible with such
                dimming systems.
         2.4.5 Control systems that include both occupancy sensors and photocells shall be
                installed as indicated by the control manufacturer to assure compatibility.
         2.4.6 Before calibrating a dimming control system, all lamps shall be operated at full
                output for at least 100 hours to assure stable dimming operation.
   2.5 Light Sweeping: All low voltage lighting control circuits to incorporate light sweeping
       such that the lights can be scheduled off at designated times controlled by the BMS.
       Control of light sweep to be on zone basis.
   2.6 Lighting for Smartboards: Lighting must take into account when a Smartboard is in
       use. Darken area where the Smartboards is located while allowing students to take
       notes.
   2.7 Arrange for lighting for conventional use by means of switching.

Section 16721                   Fire Alarm Systems
1. General
   1.1 Summary
        1.1.1 Provide a complete microprocessor based electrically supervised non-coded,
              zoned, addressable single stage Fire Alarm system.
Design Guidelines                                                                            B4
Calgary Board of Education                                  Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 7 of 23


         1.1.2 Design system to meet all requirements set out by applicable codes and
                standards.
         1.1.3 Provide training for CBE operations and maintenance staff.
   1.2 Qualifications: All fire alarm system installers shall be certified by Alberta Labour, Fire
       Prevention Branch, to perform maintenance on fire alarm systems.
   1.3 Reference: Electrical Standard Drawing E-LV1 Low Voltage Systems Schematic.
   1.4 Identification
         1.4.1 Provide a device naming standard and label each device with its unique device
                tag. Naming convention to include the data communication link circuit or the
                audible signal device circuit.
         1.4.2 Identify all terminations, connections, etc., in conformance with Identification or
                numbering system used on manufacturer’s wiring diagram.
         1.4.3 Paint junction box coverplates red to indicate Fire Alarm system.
2. Fire Alarm System
   2.1 Addressable System Zones
         2.1.1 Create zones by assigning appropriate device number ranges and descriptions
                to logically subdivide the building into areas not larger than 2000m². Create
                zones for:
                2.1.1.1 Each floor area
                2.1.1.2 Sprinkler zone areas
                2.1.1.3 Stairwells
                2.1.1.4 Relocatable additions
                2.1.1.5 Elevator shafts
                2.1.1.6 Impeded egress zones created by security lock-down applications
                2.1.1.7 Air handling units equipped with smoke detectors
                2.1.1.8 Tamper switches
                2.1.1.9 Flow switches.
         2.1.2 Install a static zoning schematic for all Fire Alarm systems or update the
                schematic when modifications to the Fire Alarm system are completed.
                2.1.2.1 Non-illuminated drawing of the building with zones clearly indicated in
                         differing colours. Do not show devices or room names.
                2.1.2.2 Protect drawing with a lexan or polycarbonate transparent pane in a
                         metal frame designed to make removal difficult.
                2.1.2.3 Locate schematic adjacent to annunciator panel at main Fire
                         Department’s entrance.
                2.1.2.4 Zoning diagram includes:
                .1 North arrow
                .2 Location of sprinkler flow valve and tamper switches
                .3 Zone area description
                .4 “You are here” label.
                2.1.2.5 Provide as-built AutoCAD Drawing of zoning diagram on CD-ROM.
                2.1.2.6 Reference Drawing E-4 Typical Fire Alarm Zoning Graphic.
   2.2 Fire Alarm Control Panel
         2.2.1 Single-stage operation; fully addressable on all alarm and supervisory devices
                with class A connections; non-coded with sufficient capacity for required devices.
         2.2.2 Drill button which must not bypass the Emergency Monitoring Station
                transmission relays. Where a control panel comes equipped with a dedicated fire
                drill function button, the programming of the control panel must be modified to
                disable this feature.
         2.2.3 Acceptable manufacturers: Mircom Technologies, Notifier Canada, Simplex /
                Grinnell, Edwards, or preapproved equal.
         2.2.4 Contact AES project manager for a list of CBE approved passwords for
                programming the Fire Alarm panels. Locate password on the inside cover of the
                Fire Alarm panel.
   2.3 Fire Alarm Transmitter Panel (This section under review, check with CBE for
          current information)
Design Guidelines                                                                           B4
Calgary Board of Education                                 Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 8 of 23


         2.3.1 Silent Knight, Model 5104, Fire Control communicator, UL 684 listed for NFPA
                71, c/w 7.5 AH battery, used as a slave communicator to the Fire Alarm control
                panel with Model 5230 remote annunciator / programmer, Model 5530 modem
                and Model 5541 download software and panel tamper contacts.
         2.3.2 Reference Electrical Standard Drawings E-D4 Main communications room layout
                & E-S1 Low voltage terminal cabinet.
   2.4 Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 60 Hz dedicated circuit, isolated ground, surge
       suppressed inputs.
   2.5 Manual Alarm Stations:
         2.5.1 In locations subject to mechanical damage or that pose a risk to occupants such
                as in the gymnasium, surface boxes are not acceptable. Devices must have back
                boxes recessed into the wall.
         2.5.2 Call 911 Warning: Where an existing Fire Alarm system is being upgraded,
                some manual stations may have a red square painted on the wall around them
                with a message indicating that 911 is to be called in the event of fire. In this
                situation, paint over reference to calling 911 to match existing.
   2.6 Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Access in stairwells: for serviceability, install
       smoke detectors above a landing wherever possible and not above stairs.
   2.7 Duct Type Smoke Detectors
         2.7.1 Complete with manufacturer approved housing and sampling tubes suitable for
                application.
         2.7.2 Where possible, utilize the same smoke detector heads through the building (i.e.
                both in duct smoke detectors and ceiling-mounted smoke detectors).
         2.7.3 Locations: Only as required by code for circulating air handling systems serving
                more than one (1) floor.
   2.8 Supervisory Equipment: Coordinate design and installation of supervised equipment
        with Division 15.
   2.9 End of Line Resistors: Wall-mounted in separate boxes, not within initiating or
        annunciating device boxes 1800 mm A.F.F.
   2.10 Visual Indication and Audible Notification Appliances
         2.10.1 Wall-mounted electronic horn integral with xenon strobe and red lettering –
                “FIRE”, addressable or 24 VDC, ensure that the tone is distinguishable from PA
                announcements.
         2.10.2 Where more than four (4) strobes are located in the same visual area,
                synchronize to flash in unison.
   2.11 Magnetic Door Hold-Open Devices
         2.11.1 Senior High and Junior High: Doors close upon general alarm or upon a signal
                from either adjacent smoke detector.
         2.11.2 Elementary: Doors close only upon a signal from either adjacent smoke
                detector.
   2.12 Protective Guards: Locations: Install protective guards in the gymnasium, locker
       rooms, mechanical rooms, storage rooms, rooms with low ceilings, and other locations
       where mechanical damage to Fire Alarm system components is possible.
3. Application
   3.1 General
         3.1.1 Spare Conduits: Two (2) spare 27mm conduits, c/w installed pull wire, stubbed
                up from the main Fire Alarm panel to above accessible ceiling level when the
                panel is flush-mounted in a new wall.
         3.1.2 On the outside of the panelboard supplying the main system power, rivet a
                lamacoid label, white-letters-on-red-background, with the words “Fire Alarm
                System” is connected to circuit #X” where “X” is the circuit number to which the
                Fire Alarm system is connected.
         3.1.3 Existing conduit may be reused where the existing installation meets current
                codes and standards. Install new ground conductor.
   3.2 Portable Classrooms
         3.2.1 Provide separate signal zones for clusters of portable classrooms.
Design Guidelines                                                                             B4
Calgary Board of Education                                   Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 9 of 23


         3.2.2 Provide portable classrooms with non-addressable devices and connect to
               addressable Fire Alarm systems using monitor modules.
    3.3 Connection to Public Address
         3.3.1 Fire Alarm system alarm signal shall be interlocked with the master clock
               controller so that automatic period change loudspeaker tones and exterior call-in
               horns are disabled for the duration of the alarm. Do not disconnect power to
               clock itself.
         3.3.2 Interconnection: 16mm conduit with four (4) - #14AWG, stranded, separate
               coloured, RW90 XLPE conductors from the master clock to the main fire alarm
               control panel.
         3.3.3 Connection of wires to master clock system is by CBE facility maintenance
               services electronics personnel.
    3.4 Connection to Remote Monitoring Transmitter
         3.4.1 Contacts to be provided in the fire alarm control panel for relay of alarm,
               supervisory and trouble signals to the fire monitoring station. All signals to be
               transmitted to the CBE Highfield Security office.
         3.4.2 Interconnection: 21mm conduit with one (1) 4-pair, FT4 rated, #24 AWG, UTP,
               cat 3 cable from the main Fire Alarm control panel to the Fire Alarm transmitter
               panel.
         3.4.3 Advise the CBE Highfield Security office (214-1131) whenever working on a
               system that has been connected to the fire monitor transmitter panel.

Section 16727                    Security Alarm System
1. General
   1.1 Summary
         1.1.1 Provide intrusion security using infrared technology motion detectors connected
               to separate zones.
         1.1.2 Provide water flood and low space temperature detection.
         1.1.3 Provide for remote monitoring transmission devices to send security signals to
               CBE Highfield Security office. Monitoring signals to include both trouble and
               alarm signals from security transmitter.
         1.1.4 Security control panel and access / secure station will be provided by CBE. All
               field devices, installation of equipment, wiring and connections will be included in
               the contract. The contractor will provide a warranty for the contract scope of
               work.
2. Components
   2.1 Low Voltage Interconnections: Reference Electrical Standard Drawing E-LV1 Low
       Voltage System Schematic.
   2.2 Low Voltage Terminal Cabinet
        2.2.1 Reference Electrical Standard Drawing E-S1 Low voltage terminal cabinet.
        2.2.2 Additional Low voltage terminal sub-cabinets: Supply additional low voltage
               terminal sub-cabinets in sub communications room(s) as appropriate to design.
   2.3 Security Alarm Control Panel
        2.3.1 Security Alarm control panel provided by CBE. Installation of the control panel
               equipment and the supply and install of field devices is by the electrical
               contractor.
        2.3.2 Control / Communicator Equipment provided by CBE
               2.3.2.1 Silent Knight, Model 4720, c/w 7.5 AH battery and transformer model
                        4660C Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Touchpad. Provided with panel
                        tamper contacts.
               2.3.2.2 Zone Expander: Model 4126/64 Zone Expander. For schools with more
                        than 16 zones.
               2.3.2.3 Access / Secure Station: 100mm X 100mm X 75mm deep flush box,
                        located at designated staff entrance. Provide monetary contact key
                        switch flush mounted in back box, keyed to CBE grand master outside
                        key.
Design Guidelines                                                                            B4
Calgary Board of Education                                  Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 10 of 23


       2.3.3  Door Security: Provide all door hardware and electric equipment required to
              meet project requirements.
       2.3.4 Infrared Motion Detectors
              2.3.4.1 Long Range
              .1 Mirror Optic Passive Infrared Detector; long range integral coverage 60m
                  max; 24m and 12m wide-angle; form C relay; ULC listed.
              .2 GE Interlogix AP633A or preapproved equal.
              2.3.4.2 Short range
              .1 Digital motion detector; quad element sensor; 12m X 12m coverage; 110º
                  viewing angle; ULC listed.
              .2 Paradox digigard 65 or preapproved equal.
              2.3.4.3 Locations
              .1 Exterior doors.
              .2 All main floor corridors and corridors on other floors with exterior doors.
              .3 The following areas with exterior windows or doors:
                   Libraries, library storage, A/V storage.
                   Computer rooms (rooms with ten (10) or more computers).
                   Music rooms or music storage.
                   General administration office area.
                   CTS shop.
                   Service rooms: Electrical, communication, mechanical.
                   Stairways.
              2.3.4.4 Mounting Height: At least 2750mm above floor and no more than
                      200mm below ceiling level.
       2.3.5 Zoning
              2.3.5.1 A separate zone for each field device except the following to be
                      considered as one (1) zone:
              .1 All switches on two (2) or more doors leading to the same room.
              .2 All motion sensors in the same room.
              .3 All motion sensors in the same corridor section.
              2.3.5.2 Provide a security zoning diagram in the design drawings.
       2.3.6 Flood Detectors
              2.3.6.1 Electronic water detector; 12 or 24V AC/DC; form C relay.
              2.3.6.2 Water bug WB 200 or preapproved equal.
              2.3.6.3 Locate at the lowest point in all boiler rooms.
       2.3.7 Low Space Temperature Alarm
              2.3.7.1 Sensor provided through BMS. Coordinate with mechanical consultant
                      to provide a software point and relay contact.
              2.3.7.2 Operation: Send an alarm signal to CBE Highfield Security office via the
                      Silent Knight 4720 security control panel when any space temperature
                      sensor is below 10ºC.
       2.3.8 Verification: Verify the correct operation and reporting of each device
              connected to the Security System as a condition for substantial completion.
       2.3.9 Identification: Identify the connected device and location for all cables with
              labels on the appropriate QCBIX 1A terminal block.
       2.3.10 Record Drawings
              2.3.10.1         Submit “as-built” floor plans showing the locations of all security
                      field devices, all conduit runs junction boxes and pull boxes. Submit as-
                      built drawings to CBE as described in the A1, Section 1.15 close out.
              2.3.10.2         Provide a floor plan showing only the location of all intrusion
                      detectors with their designated device addresses on an 11 X 17” ledger
                      size sheet.

Section 16728              Electronic Access & Electronic Locking System
1. General
   1.1 Summary
Design Guidelines                                                                            B4
Calgary Board of Education                                  Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 11 of 23


        1.1.1 An Electronic Access system is to be included for new school construction. One
              (1) door, the main entrance or the staff entrance, where the security panel is
              located to be provided with a card / fob reader to control an electric strike to
              release the entry door. Rough-in of conduit and boxes to be included in the
              electrical scope. A second door for access to the playfields may also require a
              card / fob reader, confirm with the AES project manager.
        1.1.2 Design in coordination with B2, Architectural Section 08740 Electronic Access.
              Coordinate with architectural consultant.
        1.1.3 The complete installation of the electronic access system to include: Client work
              station, LAN link controller, terminal controller, card reader, power supplies,
              necessary conduit cabling, etc., required for the proper installation of the SIELOX
              – access control system.
    1.2 Component (Under review check with CBE for current information)
        1.2.1 Door Contacts
              1.2.1.1 For electronic locking system, door contacts will be considered on doors
                       where required for electronic locking system.
              1.2.1.2 Type: Commercial grade, minimum gap width of 1’’ before alarming.
              1.2.1.3 Door contacts must be installed in a tamper-proof manner.

Section 16729 School Electrical Lockdown System
This section is under development, check with CBE for current information

Section 16760                   Telephone System
This section is under review. Check with CBE for current information (examining VOIP)
1. General
   1.1 Summary: Provide a complete operational system including telephone switch, all wiring
       and interconnections and voice station sets. Systems with direct interoffice voice and fax
       traffic over an IP network and also provide compatibility and interoperability with other
       CBE Nortel Norstar telephone systems and IP telephony solutions, such as Nortel
       Networks business communications manager, VoIP Gateway, succession 1000M and
       succession 1000.
   1.2 Abbreviations
            CAPs Central answering positions
            CDT      Cable design technology (a Nortel standard)
            C/O      Central office (Central telephone exchange)
            DN       Directory number (Local)
            EATA Enhanced analog terminal adapter
            IDC      Insulation displacement connection
            KLM      Key lamp module
            KSU      Key switching unit
            MDF Main distribution frame
            RAD      Remote access device
            SAPS Station auxiliary power supply
            USOC Universal service order code.
   1.3 Qualifications: The system shall be installed by a contractor who can provide factory
       approved installation, service and warranty. Proof of factory approval is required.
   1.4 Reference Electrical Standard Drawings E-T1 Telephone backboard Detail; E-lv1 Low
       voltage system schematic & E-S1 Low voltage terminal cabinet.
   1.5 CBE to arrange for number of phone lines coming into the building. Notify CBE at least
       two months in advance of when the lines are required to accommodate the fire alarm
       verification, so the phone lines can be ordered well in advance.
2. Components
   2.1 Manufacturers: Nortel or preapproved equal to meet the following performance.
   2.2 Main Telephone KSU system:
         2.2.1 Key system for small-to-medium installations from 0x32 expandable up to 272
                 ports. Base KSU supports up to eight (8) incoming lines and up to 32 phones.
Design Guidelines                                                                              B4
Calgary Board of Education                                    Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 12 of 23


                Advanced integrated applications include voice messaging, unified messaging,
                digital networking, enhanced call centers and speech recognition.
                2.2.1.1 Nortel Norstar 0X32 Modular ICS 0X32 (0 lines by 32 stations):
                         (NT7B53FA), c/w removable 120V power supply or current equivalents.
                2.2.1.2 Quantity: one (1).
        2.2.2   Cartridge to allow the addition of up to six (6) fiber trunk or fiber station modules.
                This cartridge is required to enlarge the system beyond the base controller.
                2.2.2.1 Norstar 6 port fibre expansion cartridge (NTBB06GA93) or current
                         equivalents.
                2.2.2.2 Quantity:
                      one (1) for systems with up to 96 station sets.
                      two (2) for systems with more than 96 station sets.
        2.2.3   Fibre trunk module installed in conjunction with a 6 port expansion cartridge to
                allow the addition of up to three (3) trunk cartridges. The fibre trunk module
                requires a power bar for installation. The fibre trunk module uses fibre-optic DS-
                30 cables instead of copper DS-30 cables.
                2.2.3.1 Norstar 12x0 fibre trunk module (NTBB20FB93) or current equivalents.
                2.2.3.2 Quantity: One (1) when more than eight (8) C/O lines are required;
                         typically in Senior High schools.
        2.2.4   Loop start / disconnect supervision trunk cartridge supports disconnect
                supervision, and provides access for up to four (4) analog C/O lines. Used with a
                fibre trunk module.
                2.2.4.1 Norstar 4x0 LS/DS trunk cartridge (NT7B69AAAC) or current
                         equivalents.
                2.2.4.2 Quantity:
                      Up to two (2), for a maximum of eight (8) C/O lines on base KSU.
                      Up to three (3), for a maximum of 12 additional C/O lines on fibre trunk
                         module.
        2.2.5   Fibre station module installed in conjunction with a 6 port fiber expansion
                cartridge to allow the addition of up to 16 station sets. The fibre station module
                requires a power bar for installation. The fibre station module uses fibre-optic
                DS-30 cables instead of copper DS-30 cables.
                2.2.5.1 Norstar 0x16 fibre station module (NTBB41FB93) or current equivalents.
                2.2.5.2 Quantity:
                      use the formula to calculate the number of modules required (round up to
                         next                            whole                                number):

                         # modules   # of stations  spare station ports - 32 
                                     
                                                                              16 
                                                                                  
                     Spare station ports required:
                      Systems with up to 96 station sets: minimum six (6).
                      Systems with more than 96 station sets: minimum 16.
        2.2.6 Software for systems: Norstar 0X32 modular ICS-XC (latest version) software
              feature cartridge, with English documents
              2.2.6.1 Software: MICS 7.0 or current, MICS XC 7.0 or current.
        2.2.7 Driver used for maintenance personnel to connect to the Norstar system
              remotely.
              2.2.7.1 Norstar remote access device (RAD) or FastRAD II (NT8B80AAAB).
              2.2.7.2 Quantity: One (1).
              2.2.7.3 Location: Within 2000mm of the KSU and connected to KSU station port
                      #132.
        2.2.8 Analog adapter to convert a digital jack into an analog jack. This will allow the
              user to run an analog device. For instance, an answering machine or a cordless
              telephone.
              2.2.8.1 Norstar enhanced analog terminal adapter (EATA) (NT8B90AL-93).
              2.2.8.2 Quantity: One (1).
Design Guidelines                                                                           B4
Calgary Board of Education                                 Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 13 of 23


               2.2.8.3 Location: Main telephone equipment backboard within 2000mm of the
                       KSU.
        2.2.9 Accessories
               2.2.9.1 BIX Blocks: QCBIX-1A blocks with QCBIX 10-Mount.
               2.2.9.2 Power Bar: Isobar, four (4) receptacles.
               2.2.9.3 Other Items: All required parts, programming and documentation to
                       make a complete working system.
   2.3 Station Sets:
        2.3.1 Classroom / General Use Stations:
               2.3.1.1 General use locations include library, guidance / resource / physical
                       education / facility operator’s offices, lunchrooms, kitchen, stage.
               2.3.1.2 Type: NORTEL T7100 (NT8B25AABLEG) or current equivalent
               2.3.1.3 Color: Charcoal.
        2.3.2 Elementary and Middle School Administrative General Office Workstations:
               2.3.2.1 Type: Nortel T7316E c/w KIMS (NT8B27JAAAE6) or current equivalent.
               2.3.2.2 Color: Charcoal.
               2.3.2.3 Quantity: One (1) set for each secretary, to a maximum of three (3) sets.
               2.3.2.4 NORTEL T24 KIM key expansion module (NT8B29AAAB) or current
                       equivalent.
                    The KIM is a module connected to a T7316E terminal that provides 24
                       additional memory buttons which can be used to show a busy or idle status
                       for up to 24 other sets, as well as to program system features or autodial
                       numbers.
                    Up to 9 KIM modules can be added to any T7316E set providing a
                       maximum total of 216 programmable buttons.
                    One (1) SAPS is required to power every two KLM modules.
        2.3.3 Senior High Administrative General Office Workstations:
               2.3.3.1 Type: Nortel T7316E (NT8B27JAAAE6) or current equivalent.
               2.3.3.2 Color: Charcoal.
               2.3.3.3 Quantity: One (1) set for each secretary to a maximum of three (3) sets.
        2.3.4 Administrative Staff Office Stations:
               2.3.4.1 Type: Nortel T7316E (NT8B27JAAAE6) or current equivalent.
               2.3.4.2 Colour: Charcoal.
               2.3.4.3 Power failure telephone: used to provide emergency paging
               2.3.4.4 Type: As recommended by the public address system supplier.
               2.3.4.5 Location: Near main PA console, wall-mounted.
        2.3.5 Elevator / Lift Telephone:
               2.3.5.1 Type: One (1) Adams “Lifeline” single button, hands-free operation.
               2.3.5.2 Supplied and installed by the elevator supplier.
               2.3.5.3 Connection and Programming
                    Connect directly to the Telus demark station and parallel any C/O line other
                       than the lines dedicated to the security and fire transmitters.
                    Programmed to direct dial to CBE security monitoring center (# 214-1131).
                    Programmed for dial-out only; no audible ring and no answer.
                    Programmed with the name of the school as caller ID.
        2.3.6 Barrier Free Washroom Telephone:
               2.3.6.1 Type: Nortel T7100 (NT8B25AABLEG) or current equivalent.
               2.3.6.2 Colour: Charcoal.
               2.3.6.3 Programming: To main office only; no outside line.
               2.3.6.4 Mounting Height: 915mm to center.
        2.3.7 Noisy Areas Stations:
               2.3.7.1 Type: Nortel T7100 (NT8B25AABLEG) or current equivalent.
               2.3.7.2 Colour: Charcoal.
               2.3.7.3 Auxiliary Ringers: Algo 1825 duet plus.
Design Guidelines                                                                           B4
Calgary Board of Education                                 Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 14 of 23


                2.3.7.4 Locations: All noisy areas including band room, music room, drama
                        room, career and technology studies areas, when these locations include
                        an internal office within the teaching area.
3. Application
   3.1 Wiring: The wiring shall comply with the data network wiring standards except that the
       Cat5E or Category 6 (confirm with CBE which cable is being utilized) cable will be
       terminated onto an RJ11 jack. Reference B4, Electrical Section 16790 computer network
       system.
   3.2 Labeling: Use a unique labeling sequence that is not duplicated anywhere in the
       building. Label the cable sheaths, QC-BIX blocks and Telephone faceplate.
   3.3 Systems Interconnections and Conduit Requirements: Reference electrical standard
       drawing E-LV1 low voltage systems schematic.
   3.4 Station Ports:
         3.4.1 General: RJ-11 pinout conformance to USOC.
         3.4.2 Classrooms and general use stations:
                3.4.2.1 Single-port, RJ-11, flush wall jack with two (2) flanges for securely
                        mounting the telephone.
                3.4.2.2 Mounting: Wall-mounted, 1400mm high to centre of wall plate.
                3.4.2.3 Locations:
                     Each classroom adjacent to entrance.
                     Stage. Do not install in gymnasium.
         3.4.3 Administration workstations in the main office:
                3.4.3.1 6-port, RJ-11.
                     Top 2 Jacks: For secretary sets and CAP modules.
                     Centre 2 Jacks: Reserved for future.
                     Lower Left Jack: For fax.
                     Lower Right Jack: For answering machine.
         3.4.4 Office Stations:
                3.4.4.1 2-port, RJ-12.
                    Locations: offices, general staff work stations, staff room, and kitchen
         3.4.5 Low Voltage Terminal Cabinet:
                3.4.5.1 Three (3) RJ11 baseboard jacks. Reference drawing E-S1 low voltage
                        terminal cabinet.
4. Programming
   4.1 General
         4.1.1 Installer is responsible for initial KSU and set programming.
         4.1.2 Sample Norstar programming record:
         4.1.3 In order to provide operational consistency in all CBE installations, program the
                KSU to conform, as closely as possible, to the sample Norstar programming
                record. Reference tables at the end of this section.
   4.2 KSU System Wide C/O Lines Programming: Program as supervised loop start with tone
       dialing.
         4.2.1 Assign:
                4.2.1.1 Lines 1 and 2 to Line Pool A (Line Pool Code 5).
                4.2.1.2 Lines 3, 4 and 5 to Line Pool B (Line Pool Code 4).
         4.2.2 Designate:
                4.2.2.1 The Prime Set as DN # 2177.
                4.2.2.2 The Direct Dial Set as DN # 2177.
         4.2.3 Do not change from the configuration default password.
   4.3 Set Programming:
         4.3.1 C/O Lines: Program to appear and ring at all T7316E secretary sets.
         4.3.2 EATAs: Program to use Line Pool B as a prime line.
         4.3.3 RAD:
                4.3.3.1 Program for “auto-answer” on KSU C/O line 3 after ten (10) rings.
                4.3.3.2 Program to have an “ID number” consisting of area code 403 plus the
                        same KSU line number that it is to auto-answer (e.g.: 403-777-XXX2).
Design Guidelines                                                                              B4
Calgary Board of Education                                    Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 15 of 23


         4.3.4 All Sets:
                4.3.4.1 Assign two (2) extension (intercom) buttons.
                4.3.4.2 Assign to line pool B as their prime line.
         4.3.5 T7100 Student Phone: Program to use an External Hotline, pre-dial the digit 9
                and use line pool B as its Prime Line.
         4.3.6 T7100 Classroom / General Use Sets:
                4.3.6.1 Program access to line pool B only.
                4.3.6.2 Program and label programmable key as “Do Not Disturb”.
         4.3.7 T7208 and T7316E Sets:
                4.3.7.1 Program access to both line pool A and line pool B.
                4.3.7.2 Extension, C/O line and programmable keys shall appear, be
                         programmed and be labeled according to sample “Set Configuration”
                         which is part of the "Norstar Programming Record", reference tables at
                         the end of this section.
                4.3.7.3 Program “Page” key for “General” paging (Feature code F-60).
   4.4 Set Labeling: All Used Programmable Buttons: On all sets must be labeled to indicate
       their feature, autodial name or function. All unused programmable buttons may be left
       blank.
   4.5 Connection to Other Systems: Connect C/O lines to the fire alarm and security
       transmitters as detailed in electrical standard drawing E-S1 low voltage terminal cabinet.
   4.6 Documentation:
         4.6.1 Complete the appropriate Norstar Modular Programming Record, including all
                installed equipment, telephones, and other related devices.
         4.6.2 Specify for all equipment the Model, Location, Name, Default DN number, New
                DN number, and Port number for each connection.
         4.6.3 Submit the “System Coordinator”, “Quick Reference”, “System Installation”
                guides and all user and reference documentation for the sets and devices in the
                Electrical Maintenance Manual.

           TYPICAL NORSTAR NUMBERING PLAN
           Function                                   Digit
           Call Park Prefix Digit                       1
           Extension numbers                            2
           Line Pool C                                  3
           Line Pool B                                  4
           Line Pool A                                  5
           Reserved for 4-digit Centrex dialing         6
           Reserved for 4-digit Centrex dialing         7
           Reserved for 4-digit Centrex dialing         8
           Beyond Centrex                               9
           Direct Dial Number                           0
           Note: Change extension “DN length” to 4-digits for all systems, whether expanded or
           not.
           TYPICAL KSU STATION PORTS
           The following table shows “typical” Names, DN and port numbers for Nortel Norstar
           PLUS OX32 Centrex+ Systems as used by CBE:


           LOCATION            NAME               DEFAULT         NEW          PORT      NOTE
                                                  DN#             DN#          #
           Main Office         Sec 1              2221            2177         101
           Main Office         Sec 2              2222            2277         102
           Main Office         Sec 3              2223            2377         103
           Administration      Principal          2224            2123         104
Design Guidelines                                                                          B4
Calgary Board of Education                                Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 16 of 23


           Administration      Vice Prn            2225       2223         105
           Administration      Asst Prn            2226       2323         106
           Guidance            Guidance 1          2227       2227         107
           Guidance            Guidance 2          2228       2228         108
           Resource            Resource 1          2229       2229         109
           Resource            Resource 2          2230       2230         110
           Confer Rm           Confer. Rm          2231       2231         111
           Staff Room          Staff Room          2232       2232         112
           Staff Wrk Rm        Staff Wrk           2233       2233         113
                               Rm
           Library             Library             2234       2234         114
           Lib Office          Lib Office          2235       2235         115
           Phys Ed             Phys Ed 1           2236       2236         116
           Phys Ed             Phys Ed 2           2237       2237         117
           Stage               Stage               2238       2238         118
           Room 1              Room 1              2239       2001         119
           Room 2              Room 2              2240       2002         120
           .                   .                   .          .            .
           .                   .                   .          .            .
           .                   .                   .          .            .
           Room 12             Room 12             2250       2012         130
           Room 13             Room 13             2251       2013         131
           RAD                 RAD                 2252       2252         132
           …                   …                   …          …            …
           Room 14             Room 14             2253       2014         301       (1)
           Room 15             Room 15             2254       2015         302       (1)
           Room 16             Room 16             2255       2016         303       (1)
           …                   …                   2268       …            316       (1)
           …                   …                   2269       …            401       (2)
           …                                       …          …            404       (2)
           Spare                                                           405       (2) (3)
           Spare                                                           406       (2) (3)
           Spare                                                           407       (2) (3)
           Spare                                                           408       (2) (3)
           Spare                                                           409       (2) (3)
           Spare                                                           410       (2) (3)
           Student             Student             2279       2279         411       (2)
           ATA 1               ATA 1               2280       2280         412       (2)
           ATA 2               ATA 2               2281       2281         413       (2)
           PA Bells            Bells               2282       2282         414       (2)
           Caretaker           Caretaker           2283       2283         415       (2)
           Boiler              Boiler              2284       2284         416       (2)

           NOTES:
           (1) Station Expansion Module #1 Ports
           (2) Station Expansion Module #2 Ports
           (3) Spare Station Ports


Section 16770                   Voice Communication System
1. General Voice Communications
   1.1 Summary:
        1.1.1 Provide a public address / telephone system or an integrated communication
              system to meet the needs of the facility.
        1.1.2 The public address system must be capable of integration with the telephone
              system specified.
Design Guidelines                                                                            B4
Calgary Board of Education                                  Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 17 of 23


   1.2 Public Address System:
        1.2.1 The public address system will be a microprocessor-based system that includes
              a built-in master clock used to distribute bell and tone signals. Acceptable
              manufacturers: Telecor and Edwards Communications or preapproved equal.
        1.2.2 Paging through the public address system will be accomplished through any of
              the telephone handsets with pre-programmed DTMF tones to activate: individual
              paging zone, all paging zones or a group of paging zones.
        1.2.3 Functionality of six (6) or more amplified signaling zones for the following areas:
              1.2.3.1 Classrooms, library and gymnasiums
              1.2.3.2 All circulation spaces and washrooms
              1.2.3.3 Administration spaces, service spaces, and miscellaneous areas
              1.2.3.4 Additional area zones as identified in the design process.
        1.2.4 Provide an exterior vandal proof push button contact for a door bell, discretely
              mounted at the designated public entrance. The door bell will broadcast a distinct
              tone separate from the class change tone over the paging speakers.
        1.2.5 Public address system will have the capability to generate a distinct, timed tone
              for class change signals over the PA and telephone speakers and broadcast a
              short signal from an attached media device (CD or MP3 player). Provide media
              device signal broadcast for class changes in Middle and Senior High schools
              only.
        1.2.6 Master Clock System will provide:
              1.2.6.1 Capability to drive the exterior class change buzzers. Do not broadcast
                       voice paging signals to the exterior of the facility.
              1.2.6.2 Automatic daylight savings correction.
              1.2.6.3 Must be separate from the PA system.
        1.2.7 Media Devices, rack-mounted
              1.2.7.1 AM / FM radio tuner.
              1.2.7.2 Compact disk player / MP3 digital audio player.
   1.3 Paging System Speakers & Horns:
        1.3.1 Loudspeaker – Transformer – Baffle Assembly
              1.3.1.1 The loudspeaker size shall be 8” in diameter and have a power handing
                       capacity of 15 watts. The voice coil shall be 1” in diameter and have an
                       impedance of 8 ohms. The speaker shall have a frequency range of at
                       least 50Hz to 15 kHz.
              1.3.1.2 Each speaker will require a 25/70 volt line-matching transformer. The
                       transformer shall have at least five (5) primary taps. Insertion loss shall
                       be no greater than 1.3 dB.
        1.3.2 Outside Horns:
              1.3.2.1 Horns: Low current, high decibel, weatherproof surface mount, 24VAC
                       electronic adapahorn horn for outdoor use, c/w gasket and weatherproof
                       backbox.
              1.3.2.2 Transformers: 24V AC transformer with 1.0A capacity per installed horn.
        1.3.3 Loudspeaker Locations
              1.3.3.1 Classrooms
              1.3.3.2 Gymnasium
              1.3.3.3 Corridors
              1.3.3.4 Stairwells
              1.3.3.5 Student washrooms
              1.3.3.6 Locker rooms
              1.3.3.7 Mechanical / boiler room
              1.3.3.8 Other occupied rooms exceeding 14m²
        1.3.4 Outside Horn Locations: Front and sides of school to provide adequate
              coverage of playground areas and student parking areas.
        1.3.5 Loudspeakers in T-Bar: Use channel supports bars to support speaker
              independently of ceiling tile.
Design Guidelines                                                                           B4
Calgary Board of Education                                 Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 18 of 23


        1.3.6 Labeling: Label all terminated cables as to their origin label all front panel
              controls as to their function.
        1.3.7 Programming for signaling class changes:
              1.3.7.1 Provide separate circuits for the following:
                    Times for interior class change bells.
                    Times for exterior call-in horns.
                    For “class change music” intervals (if required).
                    For door bell disable during teaching hours.
              1.3.7.2 Signal Duration:
                    For interior class change bells: Three (3) seconds.
                    For exterior call-in horns: Six (6) seconds.
                    For class change music: Five (5) minutes.
   1.4 Gymnasium Sound System (Under review check with CBE for Further Details)
        1.4.1 Electrical consultant to completely design and provide for all requirements in
              consultation with end-user and manufacturer. Include all conduit, wireways,
              device boxes, and panel boards required for the future installation of the
              gymnasium public address equipment.
        1.4.2 Equipment Not Included in Contract: Loudspeakers, microphones, mixer,
              amplifier, and wiring.
        1.4.3 Sound System Cabinet Location: Provide a sound system cabinet rough-in
              location in the physical education office and also within the gymnasium. Provide
              conduit between these two (2) locations.
        1.4.4 Microphones Locations
              1.4.4.1 Provide microphone rough-in locations distributed around gymnasium
                       with conduit to sound system cabinet location
                    Stage: Two (2) are required at stage opening or opposite the bleachers.
                    Rear end of gymnasium: One (1) is required at end opposite the
                       loudspeakers.
                    Left / right side of gymnasium: One (1) is required near the scoreboard
                       controller outlet, if applicable (not required for Elementary schools).
        1.4.5 Loudspeaker Locations: Provide loudspeaker rough-in locations on both sides
              of the stage opening or opposite bleachers, and centered at 2800mm above
              gymnasium floor level.
        1.4.6 Conduit Requirements: Run separate conduit for microphone and loudspeaker
              wiring.

Section 16790                   Computer Network System
1. General
   1.1 Summary:
        1.1.1 Provide a structured cabling system to meet the needs of the facility.
              1.1.1.1 Provide cable distribution system as described in B4, Electrical Section
                      16110 Wiring materials and methods, low voltage wiring pathways and
                      distribution.
              1.1.1.2 Design a star bus network topology.
              1.1.1.3 For information purposes only: All CBE properties will have a Wireless
                      System installed. The design and installation will be coordinated by CBE;
                      the consultant shall specify a two-port data outlet to be installed in the
                      ceiling space of every classroom and the library. Two locations at
                      opposite ends of the gym and gathering spaces located at 8 – 10 ft
                      above finished floor.
        1.1.2 Qualifications: The system shall be installed by a trained and authorized
              contractor from the cable manufacturer.
        1.1.3 Reference Electrical Standard Drawings:
              1.1.3.1 E-3      Typical Open Air Cabling Schematic
              1.1.3.2 E-D1 Data Faceplate Configurations
              1.1.3.3 E-D2 Flexmode Faceplate Configurations.
Design Guidelines                                                                          B4
Calgary Board of Education                                Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 19 of 23


              1.1.3.4 E-D3 Patch Panel Termination Assembly
              1.1.3.5 E-D4 Main Communications Room Layout
              1.1.3.6 E-D5a Sub Communications Room Layout
              1.1.3.7 E-D5b Wall Mount Sub Communications Room
              1.1.3.8 E-D5c Sub Communications Room: 2 Racks
              1.1.3.9 E-D6 Single Rack Floor Mounting Detail
              1.1.3.10          E-D6.5 Two Rack Floor Mounting Detail
              1.1.3.11          E-D7 Triple Rack Floor Mounting Detail
              1.1.3.12          E-D8 Main Communication Room Layout
              1.1.3.13          E-D8A Four Rack Floor Mounting Detail
              1.1.3.14          E-D9 Communications Single Line Diagram
        1.1.4 Regulatory Standards:
              1.1.4.1 ANSI EIA/TIA–568B
              1.1.4.2 ANSI EIA/TIA-569
              1.1.4.3 ANSI EIA/TIA-607
              1.1.4.4 ANSI EIA/TIA TSB 67
              1.1.4.5 CAN/CSA-T530-M90
              1.1.4.6 CAN/CSA-T529-M91
        1.1.5 Warranty: Will require manufacturers warranty for system performance and
              components.
   1.2 Components
        1.2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers:
              1.2.1.1 For brand new builds/buildings: Tyco/AMP Netconnect, CommScope,
                      Hubbell premise wiring or approved equal.
              1.2.1.2 For existing buildings with an existing network: Product manufacturer
                      must match the existing LAN Infrastructure for the life of the building,
                      unless otherwise specified. If it is a complete modernization and the
                      wiring is replaced throughout the facility then the other manufacturers
                      may be considered. Example: A building has AMP Netconnect product
                      throughout the data network, it will remain with the product line for new
                      installations, moves, additions and changes for the life of the building.
   1.3 Communication Rooms:
        1.3.1 Space Requirements:
              1.3.1.1 All new communications rooms will require floor standing racks.
              1.3.1.2 Main communications room will require a minimum of three (3) floor
                      standing racks c/w 2 vertical cable management per rack. Provision
                      space for a 4th floor standing rack and vertical cable management
                      bracket for future equipment requirements.
              1.3.1.3 Sub communications rooms will require a minimum of two (2) floor rack
                      c/w 2 vertical cable management on both sides of rack. Provision space
                      for a 3nd floor standing rack c/w vertical cable management.
              1.3.1.4 Minimum clearances must be maintained around racks in the design.
                      Coordinate with architectural to assure room size is adequate.
                      Coordinate with mechanical to assure mechanical systems are adequate
                      for room. See Drawings ED5a & ED5c for guide.
              1.3.1.5 Assure that other low voltage systems within the same room will have
                      the minimum clearances allowed for.
              1.3.1.6 Buildings with local area network (LAN) already established may have
                      wall rack in place. A minimum clearance of 1m in front of wall racks is
                      required.
        1.3.2 Rack Requirements:
              1.3.2.1 Racks: 2 post, black, metal 19” X 84”.
              1.3.2.2 Vertical Cable Management: 2 Channel, black, metal, one (1) per side of
                      rack.
              1.3.2.3 Must be bolted to floor.
              1.3.2.4 Refer to Drawings E-D6, E-D6.5, E-D8
Design Guidelines                                                                           B4
Calgary Board of Education                                 Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 20 of 23


        1.3.3 Other Low Voltage Systems: telephone system, main security panel cabinet,
              public address system, master clock system, fire alarm system, low voltage
              terminal cabinet, Supernet service, Shaw service, Telus service, card access
              system, wireless system and associated wiring will be located on the wall in the
              main communications room.
        1.3.4 Power Requirements:
              1.3.4.1 Each floor standing rack will require one dedicated 120v 15/20A
                       receptacle installed on the top of each rack. Do not install power for
                       racks on walls.
              1.3.4.2 Each of the low voltage systems and associated equipment will require
                       dedicated 120V 15/20A T-slot receptacles.
        1.3.5 Ventilation: Assure main and sub communications rooms have adequate
              ventilation.
   1.4 Wiring
        1.4.1 Wiring:
              1.4.1.1 LAN copper (Building with existing network): Unshielded, 4 pair, blue,
                       Category 5E wiring or match existing type.
              1.4.1.2 LAN copper (New building with new network): Shielded 4 pair, blue,
                       category 6 wiring.
              1.4.1.3 Intranet: 12 Strand Laser Optimized 50 micron fibre.
              1.4.1.4 Internet (between buildings): 12 strand single mode fibre.
        1.4.2 Terminations:
              1.4.2.1 RJ-45 connectors for existing category 5/5E LAN: Black, category 5E, 8-
                       pin.
              1.4.2.2 RJ-45 connectors for new category 6A LAN: Blue.
        1.4.3 Fibre Backbone
              1.4.3.1 Connect all communications rooms directly back to the main
                       communications room, using fibre optic cable.
              1.4.3.2 12 strand multimode fibre is to be the backbone for the LAN and will
                       connect the communications rooms in a star configuration. Install fibre
                       between sub-communication rooms (intra-building) and between campus
                       building’s main communication rooms (inter-building) up to a length of
                       600m away.
        1.4.4 Telephone Tie Cables: Position QC-BIX termination blocks for telephone tie
              cables above the data patch panels to facilitate the future termination to 48-port
              patch panels. Include a 50-pair Category 3 telephone cable back to the
              telephone KSU. Directions may change to have telephone outlets in new school
              onto patch panels, confirm with CBE.
        1.4.5 Terminate all data network cabling in communication rooms on patch panels.
        1.4.6 Warranty: Supply manufacturers 25 year system performance warranty.
        1.4.7 Alberta Supernet Wide Area Connection will be ordered and supplied by AXIA
              Netmedia. Alberta Government will put in order. Please coordinate Supernet
              service entrances with AXIA Netmedia.
        1.4.8 Wireless local area network (WLAN) is required to cover 100% of instructional
              spaces and administrative areas. General contractor will coordinate installation
              and provide CBE with as-builds and coverage maps.
2. Products
        2.1.1 Approved Manufacturers:
              2.1.1.1 Match manufacturer at sites with existing LAN’s
              2.1.1.2 Amp netconnect Systimax & Hubbell for new buildings with new LAN.
              2.1.1.3 There shall not be more than one structured cabling manufacturer at any
                       on facility.
        2.1.2 Fibre Optic Cable:
              2.1.2.1 Intra-building Fibre: Distribution fiber optic cable 12-strand, multimode,
                       riser (OFNR) rated, suitable for direct termination with epoxy / polish-
                       type, MT-RJ SC connectors. Match existing fibre type if expanding LAN
Design Guidelines                                                                            B4
Calgary Board of Education                                  Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                         Page 21 of 23


                        in building with fibre already installed, unless otherwise instructed by
                        owner.


                2.1.2.2 50/125µm laser optimized micron (core / cladding) fibre will be used in
                         new construction or renovation projects where the entire fibre backbone
                         is replaced.
                2.1.2.3 62.5/125µm (core / cladding) fibre will be used in renovation construction
                         projects where the existing fibre backbone is 62.5/125µm micron fibre.
                2.1.2.4 Inter-building Fibre: Indoor / outdoor single loose tube cable, 12-strand
                         single mode fibre.
         2.1.3 Fibre Connector Jacks:
                2.1.3.1 50/125µm fibre, terminate fibre termination panels with “SC” connectors.
                2.1.3.2 62.5/125µm fibre, terminate fibre termination panels with “SC”
                         connectors.
         2.1.4 Fibre Optic Termination Panels:
                2.1.4.1 Rack-Mount: Loaded rack mount patch enclosures, slide and tilt drawer,
                         1U, 24-port with horizontal ringed cable management panel, 1U.
                2.1.4.2 Wall-Mount: Double sided, double door, four adapter plate wall mount
                         patch enclosure with 6-fibre or 12-fibre snap in adapter plates and cable
                         grommets.
         2.1.5 Indoor Category 6 Cable: Category 6 blue for data and white for voice.
         2.1.6 Outdoor Underground Category 6 Cable: Gelfilled Category 6, rated –40°C,
                approved for use and covered under the 25 Year performance warranty by the
                structured cabling manufacturer (Mohawk).
         2.1.7 Patch Cables: Copper and fibre patch cables supplied by CBE and do not form
                part of the required warranty.
         2.1.8 Patch Panels:
                2.1.8.1 Category 6 patch panel, 48 ports, 1U, universal wiring, 19” X 2U with
                         horizontal ringed cable management panel.
                2.1.8.2 Wall mounted patch panels,19" X 3U X 4"; install hinge to left. This
                         should be included only when the closet is already established with wall
                         mounted patch panels.
         2.1.9 Cable Jack: Category 6, 4-pair, 8 pin, non-keyed, unshielded modular jack, and
                black, wiring to EIA/TIA pin-out pattern T568A.
         2.1.10 Faceplates:
                2.1.10.1          Semi-flush mount nylon faceplates compatible with modular
                         jacks c/w standard labels and plastic label covers, almond or white. 2-
                         port: single gang; 4-port: single gang; 6-port: double gang.
                2.1.10.2          Wiremold or service pole faceplates: 2-port and 3-port modular
                         (flexmode) furniture faceplate kits with standard ¾” extenders. Install
                         data outlets flush into the raceway at intervals of 1000mm. Reference
                         Drawings E-D1 & E-D2.
         2.1.11 Service Poles: Dual channel (power / communications), all metal construction
                with pole manufacturers recommend fittings for computer network outlets.
3. Application
   3.1 Fibre Termination Panels:
         3.1.1 Install at the top of the patch panel rack for rack-mount enclosure.
         3.1.2 Install on top right hand corner on plywood backboard for wall-mount enclosure
         3.1.1 Reference Drawings E-D4 & E-D5b for placement.
   3.2 Fibre Optic Cable: Termination: All 12 fibre strands are to be terminated to the fibre
       termination panel. For a wall-mount enclosure, leave a 3m loop of fibre cable formed in a
       circle outside of the termination panel. For rack-mounted enclosures leave a 3m loop of
       fibre on the backboard or cable tray within close proximity to the enclosure.
   3.3 Faceplate
Design Guidelines                                                                              B4
Calgary Board of Education                                    Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                           Page 22 of 23


        3.3.1 Service Poles: Install the specified faceplates into the poles in a fashion that
              allow removal of the cable connectors and relocation of the pole without re-
              termination and re-certification of the cables.

   3.4 Mounting Height: All data outlets and supporting power outlet to be installed at 787mm
       (31”) from finished floor to bottom of outlet.
   3.5 Service-Pole
         3.5.1 Installed on Solid Ceilings: Secure the top of the pole to a data box mounted on
                ceiling. Allow a 3m extra loop of cable and coil in the data box. Mount a
                receptacle on ceiling adjacent to the data box and provide an extra 3m length of
                cabtire cable with plug disconnect.
         3.5.2 Installed in T-Grid or Accessible Solid Ceilings: Secure the top of the pole to a
                data box mounted in ceiling space. Allow a 3m extra loop of cable and neatly tie,
                coil and fasten in the ceiling space. Mount a receptacle in the ceiling space
                adjacent to the data box and provide an extra 3m length of cabtire cable with
                plug disconnect.
   3.6 Labeling Format: “FWnnnx/x/x/x”
         3.6.1 “F” – the floor of the Communications Room. Basement is considered “0”.
         3.6.2 “W” – consecutive alphanumeric numbering that designate the communications
                rooms on any separate floor of the building. The communications room housing
                the Alberta SuperNet service entrance is designated as “A”.
         3.6.3 “nnn” – consecutive number beginning at 001 through 999. Do not duplicate
                faceplate numbers.
         3.6.4 “x/x/x/x” – alphabetic identification of the jack and cable. E.g. 2-port: A/B; 3-port:
                A/B/C; 4-port: A/B/C/D; 6-port: A/B/C/D/E/F.
         3.6.5 “nnnx” – the labeling that is affixed to the patch panel identifying the port.
         3.6.6 “FW” – the communications room identification.
   3.7 Labeling:
         3.7.1 Fibre termination panels with the communication room label ‘FW’ from whence
                the fibre backbone originates.
         3.7.2 Patch panels with typewritten labels above each RJ45 connector with the format
                “nnnx” in the space provided by the manufacturer. All labeling will be continuous
                numbering scheme from left to right, top to bottom with patch panels from top to
                bottom. Provide a typewritten label for the communication room label ‘FW’ on the
                left of the patch panel between the port rows. Reference Drawing E-D3.
         3.7.3 Workstation ports with typewritten labels on the faceplate in the spaces provided
                by the manufacturer. Port identification begins from top left to right and continues
                bottom left to right. Reference Drawings E-D1 & E-D2.
         3.7.4 Both ends of the copper cable sheath to be labeled (fwnnnx), to match the
                workstation outlet (fwnnnx).
   3.8 Cable Testing
         3.8.1 Fibre Optic Cable:
                3.8.1.1 Fibre segments shall be tested for attenuation in accordance with
                          ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14-A Method B. The length of each segment is
                          required.
                3.8.1.2 Each horizontal multimode or single mode distribution segment shall be
                          tested in one (1) direction at both 850 and 1300 nanometers.
                3.8.1.3 Horizontal segments must display an attenuation of less than or equal to
                          2.0 db.
         3.8.2 Copper Category 6 Cable: Submit data electronically in the native format of the
                testing instrument. PDF format is preferred.
   3.9 Qualified Voice / Data Contractors: The contractor shall staff each installation crew with
       the appropriate number of trained personnel, in accordance with their manufacturer /
       warranty contract agreement, to support the 25-year system performance warranty
       requirements.
Design Guidelines                                                                             B4
Calgary Board of Education                                   Electrical Specification Guidelines
Capital Planning and Development Services                                          Page 23 of 23


   3.10 Warranty: 25 year system performance warranty certificate for all category 5e or 6
         cable and fibre cable installed.
   3.11 Record Drawings:
        3.11.1 Consultant to provide record drawings in AutoCAD 2006 format upon substantial
               completion.
        3.11.2 All data outlets will be identified on the drawings by the cable outlet label.
        3.11.3 Locations of outlets cable tray, pathways, box, etc. and conduits shall be shown
               on the drawings.


Section 16812 Security Camera System (CCTV)
Under development, check with CBE for current information.
Design Guidelines                                                                B5
Calgary Board of Education                                   List of Standard Forms
Capital Planning and Development Services                                Page 1 of 1


B5            LIST OF STANDARD FORMS
The following is a list of Standard Forms that are to be used for CBE Projects by
the Consultants.
1.     Project Checklist
2.     Asbestos Database Update Report
3.     Proposed Change Notice (PCN)
4.     Change Order (CO)
5.     Change Directive for PCN (CDPCN)
6.     Cash Allowance Authorization (CAA)
7.     Supplemental Instruction (SI)
8.     Certificate of Payment (COP)
9.     Field Review Report (FR)
10.    Facility Access Sign-Out Form
11.    Warranty Work Request
Sample copies of Standard Forms are included in Appendix 5 of this Document.
Design Guidelines                                                                  B6
Calgary Board of Education                                   List of Typical Drawings
Capital Planning and Development Services                                  Page 1 of 2


B6                          TYPICAL DRAWINGS
The following is a list of Typical Drawings that are to be used for CBE Projects by
the Consultants.
1.     Typical Millwork Details
       Typical Details                                     ST-1
       Open Shelving Unit - Moveable                       ST-2
       Closed Shelving Unit - Moveable                     ST-3
       Sink Unit                                           ST-4
       Art Room Sink Unit with Clay Trap                   ST-5
       Paper Storage Unit - Moveable                       ST-6
       Upper Cupboard                                      ST-7
       Kitchen & Home Economics Unit                       ST-8
       Music Storage Unit – Elementary Only                ST-9
       Shelf Units W1, W2, W3, W4                          ST-10
       Student Coatrack Unit                               ST-11
       Glassware Drying Rack - Science Room                ST-12
       Gymnasium Storage Room Layout Plan                  ST-13
       Gymnasium Storage Units                             ST-14
       Bat & Badminton Rack Units                          ST-15
       Gymnasium Storage Hooks                             ST-16
       Staff Mailbox Unit                                  ST-17
       Caretaker Cabinets                                  ST-18
       Picture Book Units PB1, PB2, PB3                    ST-19

2.     General Roofing Details
       Typical Cant Edge Detail                            R1
       Parapet Wall Detail – Over 460mm High               R2
       Parapet Wall Detail – Under 460mm High              R3
       Plumbing Vent Detail                                R4
       Typical Expansion Joint Detail                      R5
       Typical Wall Junction Detail                        R6
       Typical Gum Cup Detail                              R7

3.     General Typical Details
       Under Stage Chairs / Mats Storage Plan              A-1
       Under Stage Chairs / Mats Storage Details           A-2
       Sample Washroom Layout                              A-3
       Barrier Free Washroom                               A-4
       Barrier Free Washroom Sink                          A-5
       Barrier Free Washroom Cabinet                       A-6
       Bootscraper Detail                                  A-7
       Supply Air Diffuser Detail                          M-1
       Roof Hood Detail                                    M-2
       Roof Exhaust Fan Detail                             M-3
       Emergency Gas Shut-Off Detail                       M-4
Design Guidelines                                                           B6
Calgary Board of Education                            List of Typical Drawings
Capital Planning and Development Services                           Page 2 of 2


       Water Meter Schematic                         M-5
       Typical Car Plugs Control Schematic           E-1
       Gas Line Control Schematic                    E-2
       Typical Open Air Cabling Schematic            E-3
       Typical Fire Alarm Zoning Graphic             E-4
4.     Gym Floor Game Line Layout
       Gymnasium Floor Paint Marking Layout          G1
       Colour Plan of Gymnasium Lines                G1a
5.     Typical Design for Stage Drama Lighting
       Typical Lighting Patch Panel                  E-L1
6.     Security System Details
       Low Voltage System Schematic                  E-LV1
       Low Voltage Terminal Cabinet                  E-S1
       Telephone Backboard Detail                    E-T1
7.     Computer Network System Details
       Data Faceplate Configurations                 E-D1
       Flex-Mode Faceplate Configurations            E-D2
       Wall Mount Patch Panel Assembly               E-D3
       Main Communications Room Layout (3 Rack)      E-D4
       Main Communication Room Layout (4 Rack)       E-D4a
       Sub Communications Room Layout (1 Rack)       E-D5
       Sub Communications Room Layout (2 Rack)       E-D5a
       Sub Communications Room Layout (Wall mount)   E-D6
       Single Rack Elevation Detail                  E-D7
       Two Rack Elevation Detail                     E-D7a
       Three Rack Elevation Detail                   E-D7b
       Four Rack Elevation Detail                    E-D7c
       Communication Single Line                     E-D8
G1a
Calgary Board of Education                   Appendix 1                              Section 00200
School Name, Project Title                                               INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Project No.                                                                            Page 1 of 9


1. Method of Bidding
   1.1 Complete the Stipulated Price Bid Form in this Specification, signed and corporate
        sealed together with the security specified. Bid To: The Calgary Board of Education,
        address as per Section 00100 - Invitation to Bid. Complete Stipulated Price Bid Form in
        legible manner in ink, without typed or printed alterations or erasures. Submit Bids in
        sealed envelope(s) clearly stating the name of the Bidder, the Project name and the
        name of the Owner.
   1.2 Complete the Stipulated Price Bid Form in this Specification, signed and corporate
        sealed together with the security specified. Bid To: The Calgary Board of Education,
        address as per Section 00100 - Invitation to Bid. Complete Stipulated Price Bid Form in
        legible manner in ink, without typed or printed alterations or erasures. Submit Bids in
        sealed envelope(s) clearly stating the name of the Bidder, the Project name and the
        name of the Owner.
   1.3 Base Bids on strict compliance with Drawings and Specifications and include all costs
        for the Project.
   1.4 Base Bids on the brands, products and requirements indicated or specified, or on
        brands or products that have been accepted as required under the heading
        "Acceptance".
   1.5 The Alberta Construction Tendering System will not be used on this Project.
   1.6 The time period commitment proposed to achieve Substantial Performance of the work,
        to be as indicated in Section 00700 or as entered on the Bid Form.
   1.7 Ensure all proposed Subcontractors are listed as per Appendix B in the Stipulated Price
        Bid Form. Failure to do so may result in Bid being rejected for being incomplete.
   1.8 Submission of the Bid will be construed as constituting approval of all terms and
        conditions set out in the Bidding Documents.
   1.9 Bidders are solely responsible for the delivery of their Bids in the manner and time
        prescribed.
   1.10 Complete Page 2 of the Stipulated Price Bid Form, Section 00410 as follows:
          1.10.1 Limited Company: Print or type full name of company and name(s) and status of
                   authorized signing officer(s) in space provided. Only authorized signing officer(s)
                   shall sign. Sign in the presence of a witness, and affix the corporate seal. If the
                   Bid is signed by officials other than the President and Secretary of the Company
                   or the President, Secretary, Treasurer of the Company, a copy of the by-law
                   resolution of the Board of Directors authorizing such officials to sign, must be
                   submitted with the Bid in the envelope.
          1.10.2 Partnership: Print or type name of partnership and name(s) of the person(s)
                   signing in space provided. Insert the word "Partner" against each signature. All
                   Partners shall sign in the presence of a witness who shall also sign.
          1.10.3 Sole Proprietorship: Print or type business name and name of Sole Proprietor in
                   space provided, the Sole Proprietor shall sign, in the presence of a witness who
                   shall also sign. Affix seal. Insert the words "Sole Proprietor" under the signature.
          1.10.4 If the Bidder is a Joint Venture, each party will execute the Bid under seal in a
                   manner appropriate to such parties. Disclose Joint Venture in accordance with
                   the instructions above.
   1.11 Complete the Stipulated Price Bid Form in its entirety. Any items omitted or illegible, or
        any alterations to the text, or any conditions added on or submitted with the Stipulated
        Price Bid Form, may cause the Bid to be declared invalid and rejected.
   1.12 Combined Bids from Subcontractors may be included in the Bid (i.e. acoustic ceilings
        and acoustic wall treatment), but a Subcontractor name must be entered for each
        Division or Section of Work listed in Appendix B.
2. Contract/Bidding Document Definitions
   2.1 Contract Documents are as defined in CCDC 2, Stipulated Price Contract 2008
        Definitions with General Conditions.
   2.2 Bidding Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Instructions to Bidders,
        Stipulated Price Bid Form, Bid Securities, and Bid Supplementary Forms as contained

                                Architectural & Engineering Services
Calgary Board of Education                   Appendix 1                               Section 00200
School Name, Project Title                                                INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Project No.                                                                             Page 2 of 9


        herein.
    2.3 Bid: Act of submitting an offer under seal.
3   Acceptance or Withdrawal of Bids
    3.1 The Bidder acknowledges that the Owner shall have the right to reject any, or all bids for
        any reason, or to accept any Bid which the Owner in its sole unfettered discretion deems
        most advantageous to itself. The lowest, or any, Bid will not necessarily be accepted,
        including Bids by subtrades, and the Owner shall have the unfettered right, acting in its
        sole absolute discretion to:
        3.1.1 request clarification and additional information from any Bidder;
        3.1.2 waive any irregularities in any Bid;
        3.1.3 accept any regular, unbalanced, informal, non conforming or qualified Bid;
        3.1.4 accept a Bid that is not the lowest Bid;
        3.1.5 reject a Bid that is the lowest Bid even if it is the only Bid received; and
        3.1.6 reject a Bid submitted by a Bidder if the Bidder, or any officer or director of the
                  Bidder is or has been engaged either directly or indirectly through another
                  corporation in a legal action brought in the Court of Queen’s Bench of Alberta
                  against the Owner, its elected or appointed officers and employees in relation to
                  any other contract for works and services within five years of the date of the
                  Invitation to Bid. In determining whether to reject a Bid under this provision, the
                  Owner will consider whether the litigation is likely to affect the Bidder’s ability to
                  work with the Owner, its Consultants and representatives and whether the Owner’s
                  experience with the Bidder indicates that the Owner is likely to incur increased staff
                  and legal costs in the administration of the Contract if it is awarded to the Bidder
                  and whether the Bidder’s performance on a contract for works and services within
                  five years of the date of the Invitation to Bid was unsatisfactory.
    3.2 By submitting a Bid, the Bidder acknowledges the Owner’s rights under the Bid and
        absolutely waives any right, or cause of action against the Owner, its agents, employees
        or officers, by reason of the Owner’s failure to accept the Bid submitted by the Bidder,
        whether such right or cause of action arises in contract, negligence, or otherwise. Any
        and all costs incurred by the Bidder in the preparation and submission of the Bid shall be
        borne solely by the Bidder.
    3.3 It is further understood that the Bid submission is a unilateral offer to be bound by the
        Bidding Documents and no bilateral contract exists between the Owner and the Bidder
        or any Bidder unless and until written acceptance of a Bidder’s offer is issued by the
        Owner in the manner set out in the Instructions to Bidders.
    3.4 Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, any Bid may be rejected for being
        incomplete including FULL completion of the Appendices, having obscured or irregular
        erasures or corrections, interlineations, having requested Alternative Prices, Separate
        Prices or Unit Prices omitted, or for failure to provide an agreement to bond or
        undertaking of insurance certificate, unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional,
        failure to use specified materials or systems or installers or installation methods,
        illegible, obscure, contain arithmetical errors or any other nonconforming, non-
        responsive and conditional Bids.
    3.5 The Owner reserves the right to negotiate Contract terms with the lowest Bidder.
    3.6 Discrepancies between words and figures shall be resolved in favour of the words.
        Discrepancies between indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum
        thereof will be resolved in favour of the correct sum.
    3.7 The Owner will notify successful Bidder, in writing, of the acceptance of his Bid, and
        thereafter, the Bidder will be required to execute the Contract within fifteen (15) days of
        such notice of acceptance.
    3.8 A Bid may be withdrawn at any time up to the time stated for receiving Bids, but only on
        a request in writing, signed by the Bidder or his authorized representative.
    3.9 A Bid may not be withdrawn at or after the time stated for receiving Bids and will be
        open to acceptance by the Owner (1) until another Bidder has entered into a Contract
        with the Owner for the performance of the Work, or (2) until 60 days after the time stated

                                Architectural & Engineering Services
Calgary Board of Education                Appendix 1                              Section 00200
School Name, Project Title                                            INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Project No.                                                                         Page 3 of 9


        for receiving Bids, whichever comes first.
   3.10 The 60 day period referred to above shall commence at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) of the day
        stated for receiving Bids and shall terminate at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) of the 60th day
        thereafter. If the 60th day falls on a Saturday or a Sunday, or a statutory holiday, such
        day or days shall be omitted from the computation and shall fall on the next business
        day.
   3.11 Amendments to the submitted Bids will be permitted if received in writing prior to time
        stated for receiving of Bids and if endorsed by the same party or parties who signed and
        sealed the Bid.
   3.12 Verbal, telephonic, telegraphic or faxed Bids or Amendments to Bids shall not be
        considered.
   3.13 Where a modification is directing a change in the Bid price, the modification shall not
        reveal the original price nor the revised price. State only the amount added to or
        deducted from the original Bid Price.
   3.14 The Owner will not accept responsibility for the content of modifications, or modifications
        that are, for any reason, delayed, illegible or otherwise improperly received. The Owner
        may disregard modifications that are improperly received. It is the Bidders responsibility
        to ensure that the modifications to the Bid have been properly received.
   3.15 The Bidder submitting the lowest complete bid may be required to attend an interview at
        CBE, AES offices prior to acceptance of his Bid, to provide confirmation of
        completeness of scope included, ability to meet schedule and quality control, to provide
        references and to discuss any other items in connection with this Project.
   3.16 After a Bid has been accepted, all Bid Securities will be returned to the respective
        unsuccessful Bidders.

                                   TO BE EDITED
                       IF OVER $100,000 USE RED SECTIONS,
                    BETWEEN $50,000 – 99,999 USE BLUE SECTIONS
                    UNDER $50,000 REMOVE RED & BLUE SECTIONS
       USE IF PROJECT IS OVER $100,000

4. Bid Security
   4.1 Submit with the Bid, a Bid security in the form of a Bid Bond in the amount of not less
        than ten percent (10%) of the Bid Price including GST, endorsed in the name of the
        Owner, along with a Consent of Surety from a recognized bonding company to furnish a
        fifty percent (50%) Performance Bond and a fifty percent (50%) Labour and Materials
        Payment Bond for this Work.
   4.2 Include the cost of bonds in the Bid Price.
   4.3 Certified cheques shall not be accepted in lieu of Bid Bond or any other required Bond.
   4.4 Provide Bid Bonds in accordance with Standard Form of Bid Bond, CCDC Document
        Number 220-2002 or standard form of the qualified bonding company.
   4.5 Consign Bid Bonds to the Owner. The Bid security will be returned after the delivery to
        the Owner through the Consultant of the required Performance Bond & Labour and
        Materials Payment Bond, but in any case not more than 60 days after date of Bid
        submission. If no Contract is awarded, all security will be returned.
   4.6 Issue Bid Bonds by a duly incorporated Surety company authorized to transact business
        of suretyship in the Province of Alberta.
   4.7 Properly execute Bid Bonds by both Bidder and Surety. Endorse the Bid Bond in the
        name of the Owner as obligee, signed and sealed by the Bidder and the Surety
        Company.
   4.8 Provide a signed "Undertaking of Insurance Certificate" on a standard form provided by
        the insurance company, stating their intention to provide insurance requirements of the
        Contract Documents.

                              Architectural & Engineering Services
Calgary Board of Education                Appendix 1                             Section 00200
School Name, Project Title                                           INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Project No.                                                                        Page 4 of 9


    4.9 If a Bidder whose Bid is accepted by the Owner refuses or fails, within 15 days after a
        Contract is offered for acceptance, (1) to enter into a Contract with the Owner for the
        performance of the Work or (2) to provide the security as specified, and a Contract for
        the Work is entered into with another Bidder for a for a greater amount, the Bidder is
        liable to the Owner for the difference between the two (2) Bids up to the Amount of the
        Bid security. After deducting from the proceeds of the Bid Security an amount sufficient
        to cover the difference between the two (2) Bids, the balance of the proceeds, if any,
        shall be returned to the Bidder.
5. Performance Bond, Labour & Materials Payment Bond
   5.1 The successful Bidder will be required to provide and pay for a Performance Bond and a
        Labour & Materials Payment Bond in accordance with CCDC 2 - 2008, Article GC 11.2
        Bonds, of the General Conditions of the Contract, each covering Fifty Percent (50%) of
        the total Contract Price.
   5.2 Submit contract security to the Owner within 15 days of date of receipt of notice of
        Acceptance of Bid.
   5.3 Provide Performance Bond in accordance with Standard Form of Performance Bond
        CCDC 221-2002, and Labour and Materials Payment Bond in accordance with Standard
        Form of Labour & Materials Payment Bond CCDC 222-2002, both issued by a Surety
        Company licensed to conduct business in the Province of Alberta. Consign the
        Performance Bond to the Owner.
   5.4 Provide additional bonding and insurance to cover items added to the base bid. Costs
        for which are to be included in the applicable Alternative or Separate Prices listed in
        Appendix D and E or added to Change Orders as per G.C. 6.2.


          (USE IF PROJECT IS BETWEEN $50,000 - $99,999)

6. Bid Security
   6.1 Submit with the Bid, a Consent of Surety from a recognized bonding company to furnish
        a fifty percent (50%) Performance Bond and a fifty percent (50%) Labour and Materials
        Payment Bond for this Work.
   6.2 Include the cost of bonds in the Bid Price.
   6.3 Certified cheques shall not be accepted in lieu of any required Bond.
   6.4 Issue Bonds by a duly incorporated Surety company authorized to transact business of
        suretyship in the Province of Alberta.
   6.5 Properly execute Bonds by both Bidder and Surety. Endorse the Bond in the name of
        the Owner as obligee, signed and sealed by the Bidder and the Surety Company.
   6.6 Provide a signed "Undertaking of Insurance Certificate" on a standard form provided by
        the insurance company, stating their intention to provide insurance requirements of the
        Contract Documents.
7. Performance Bond, Labour & Materials Payment Bond
   7.1 The successful Bidder will be required to provide and pay for a Performance Bond and
        a Labour & Materials Payment Bond in accordance with CCDC 2 - 2008, Article GC 11.2
        Bonds, of the General Conditions of the Contract, each covering Fifty Percent (50%) of
        the total Contract Price.
   7.2 Submit contract security to the Owner within 15 days of date of receipt of notice of
        Acceptance of Bid.
   7.3 Provide Performance Bond in accordance with Standard Form of Performance Bond
        CCDC 221-2002, and Labour and Materials Payment Bond in accordance with Standard
        Form of Labour & Materials Payment Bond CCDC 222-2002, both issued by a Surety
        Company licensed to conduct business in the Province of Alberta. Consign the
        Performance Bond to the Owner.
   7.4 Provide additional bonding and insurance to cover items added to the base bid. Costs
        for which are to be included in the applicable Alternative or Separate Prices listed in
        Appendix D and E or added to Change Orders as per G.C. 6.2.

                              Architectural & Engineering Services
Calgary Board of Education                 Appendix 1                              Section 00200
School Name, Project Title                                             INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Project No.                                                                          Page 5 of 9


8. Deposit for Bidding Documents
    8.1 The deposit noted in the Invitation to Bid is required for loan of Drawings and
          Specifications. This deposit will be refunded when documents are returned in good
          reusable condition within two (2) weeks of time stated for receiving of Bids, otherwise
          cost of replacement may be charged against this deposit and the Bidder is liable for any
          additional costs. Note: Contractors who are on the Calgary Construction Plan Deposit
          Guarantee Programme are not required to provide a deposit.
    8.2 Return documents to the Consultant to the address as noted, prepaid, complete,
          undamaged and reusable.
    8.3 Prospective Bidders who do not intend to submit a Bid shall return the Bid Documents
          promptly, prior to time stated for receiving of Bids.
    8.4 Successful Bidders may retain Bid Documents. Successful Bidders' deposit will be
          refunded.
    8.5 Failure to comply with the requirements specified for return of Bid Documents may result
          in forfeiture of deposit.
    8.6 All other Bidders shall return Bid Documents no later than seven (7) days after Bid close
          date.
9. Qualifications
    9.1 As further described in the General Conditions, the Owner reserves the right to reject a
          proposed Subcontractor for reasonable cause. Refer to CCDC 2 - 2008, G.C. 3.7 of the
          General Conditions.
    9.2 Subcontractors and Suppliers may be required to submit evidence at any time after the
          submission of Bids, as to their ability to carry out the Work and be prepared to satisfy
          the Consultant as to their competency.
    9.3 The low Bidder may be required to provide the names of the Superintendent proposed
          for the Project and office personnel including their resumes, showing similar Projects
          that they have worked on.
    9.4 The low Bidder may be required to provide a list of references from Owners of Projects
          previously completed by the Bidder.
10. Bidding Documents
      10.1 Examine the following Bidding Documents:
           10.1.1 The Stipulated Price Bid Form including the following Appendices:
                     10.1.1.1 Appendix "A", Bid Documents.
                     10.1.1.2 Appendix "B", Subcontractors: Include the names of all Subcontractors
                                and the portion of the Work the Bidder will require them to perform.
                     10.1.1.3 Appendix "C", Unit Prices.
                     10.1.1.4 Appendix "D", Alternative Prices.
                     10.1.1.5 Appendix "E", Separate Prices.
                     10.1.1.6 Appendix “F”, Itemized Items.
                     10.1.1.7 Appendix "J”, Voluntary Alternatives to Specified Items.
                     10.1.1.8 Appendix “K”, Evaluation Sheet
           10.1.2 Instructions to Bidders.
           10.1.3 General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
           10.1.4 The Specifications, comprising Divisions 0 to 16 inclusive, as indicated in the
                     Table of Contents.
           10.1.5 The Drawings.
           10.1.6 Any Addenda issued.
11. Interpretation of Bidding Documents
    11.1 If any person contemplating submitting a Bid on this Work is in doubt as to the true
          meaning and intent of any part of Drawings and Specifications, he must request in
          writing, the Consultant for an interpretation thereof. If such an interpretation is not
          requested, the Bids will be presumed to be based upon the interpretation of directions
          that may be subsequently given by the Consultant after award of the Contract, in
          accordance with the provisions of the Contract.


                               Architectural & Engineering Services
Calgary Board of Education                  Appendix 1                              Section 00200
School Name, Project Title                                              INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Project No.                                                                           Page 6 of 9


    11.2 Advise the Consultant immediately of any discrepancies, ambiguities, omissions or
         conflicts in the Bidding Documents. The Consultant will issue an Addendum if he deems
         it necessary. Forward all requests to the Consultant in writing.
    11.3 Direct questions regarding interpretation of Bidding Documents as follows (provide
         Prime Consultant with a copy of all inquiries):
           11.3.1 For Architectural Items:
           11.3.2 For Structural Items:
           11.3.3 For Mechanical Items:
           11.3.4 For Electrical Items:
12. Examination of Documents and Site
    12.1 Examine Drawings and Specifications. The failure or omission of any Bidder to receive
         or examine any Document, or to visit site and acquaint himself with the existing
         conditions will not relieve the Bidder from any obligation with respect to his Bid.
    12.2 Check that Bidding Documents are complete and correspond with List of Drawings and
         the Table of Contents of the Specifications. Notify the Consultant of any omissions.
         Written instructions in the form of Addenda will be issued. Questions must be received
         in writing not less than five (5) working days before the Bid call date.
    12.3 Bidders must examine all Drawings and read through all Divisions of the Specifications,
         so that they are fully conversant with the scope of the Documents.
    12.4 The Consultant does not guarantee site information indicated in the Bid Documents, and
         each Bidder must evaluate such information relative to the actual conditions.
    12.5 Visit site of proposed Work, and note conditions as they exist, and the facilities,
         difficulties and restrictions involved.
    12.6 (For Modernizations Only) A Bidding period site visit for all prospective Bidders and
         suppliers will be held on site _______________, with representatives of the Owner and
         the Consultant, to view the existing conditions of the site and of the existing mini school.
         The Consultant will be available after the meeting to answer any questions. Information
         relevant to the Bid Documents will be recorded in an Addendum and issued to known
         Bidders.
13. Addenda
    13.1 Prior to the date Bids are received, any and all interpretations of the Drawings and
         Specifications will be in the form of written Addenda. Neither the Consultant nor Sub-
         consultants will be responsible for verbal or any other explanations or interpretations of
         Drawings and Specifications.
    13.2 Addenda, if issued, will be sent as promptly as is practicable to all firms or persons to
         whom complete Bidding Documents have been issued and will become part of the
         Contract Documents.
    13.3 Confirm receipt of all Addenda in the Stipulated Price Bid Form.
    13.4 Addenda will supersede and amend the Drawings, Specifications and Schedules as set
         forth therein.
    13.5 Addenda will not be issued within 48 hours of Bid Closing.
14. Base Bids/Substitutions/Voluntary Alternatives
    14.1 Materials and equipment are specifically described and named in the Specification to
         establish a standard of materials and workmanship. Where manufacturer's trade names
         are used, base the Bid on the use of materials and equipment as specified.
    14.2 During the Bidding period, Substitutions for specified materials or equipment equivalent
         in quality and performance may be submitted in writing to the Consultant up to five (5)
         working days prior to the time stated for receiving Bids. If an item is accepted as a
         Substitution in writing by the Consultant, Bidders may use that item in place of the
         specified item. ITEMS NOT ACCEPTED AS SUBSTITUTIONS WILL NOT BE
         ALLOWED IN THE BASE BID ON THIS PROJECT.
    14.3 Voluntary Alternative proposals may be submitted with Bid, based on the use of
         materials or equipment different to the materials or equipment specified in quality and
         performance. Under no circumstances Bid a Voluntary Alternative material or method of
         construction in the base Bid price. List Voluntary Alternative materials proposed in

                                Architectural & Engineering Services
Calgary Board of Education                    Appendix 1                              Section 00200
School Name, Project Title                                                INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Project No.                                                                             Page 7 of 9


            Section 00410, Stipulated Price Bid Form - Appendix "J" for each Voluntary Alternative.
      14.4 The Consultant reserves the right to accept or reject proposed Voluntary Alternatives or
            Substitutions or to deem whether items submitted can be Bid as Voluntary Alternatives
            or Bid as substitutes as he sees fit, and also to claim for the Owner the financial benefit
            of a Substitution.
      14.5 In submission of Substitutions or Voluntary Alternatives to products specified, include all
            changes which may be required in the Work to accommodate such Substitution or
            Voluntary Alternative. No later claims by the Bidder will be considered for an addition to
            the Contract Price because of the Substitution or Voluntary Alternative.
      14.6 A Voluntary Alternative Price is a price for a particular article or item of Work not
            specified in the Contract Documents, but offered by the Bidder in lieu of a specified
            article or item of Work, for selection at the discretion of the Owner.
      14.7 List voluntary Alternative Prices in Appendix "J" of Section 00410, Stipulated Price Bid
            Form. Note that the price indicated in Appendix "J" is the amount added to or deducted
            from the 'Base Bid Price'.
      14.8 The Owner will review all Voluntary Alternative Prices and accept or reject Voluntary
            Alternative Prices at its discretion.
      14.9 Include with each Voluntary Alternative Price, the Cost of overhead and profit and the
            cost of changes made to the Work, including the Work of other Subcontractors. Itemize
            the Voluntary Alternative Price in Appendix "J" of the Stipulated Price Bid Form,
            indicating modifications that will be required to the Work of other trades.
      14.10 Provide to the Consultant with the Bid Form, samples, Drawings, performance data and
            the like for Voluntary Alternative Price Items as may be required to properly assess the
            product.
      14.11 All Alternatives or other products used for this Project must meet the Owner’s standards
            and requirements, regardless of Consultant’s acceptance of such Projects.
      14.12 Product Acceptability:
              14.12.1 With the request for Substitution or Voluntary Alternative, submit proof that a
                         product (or products) proposed for use complies with requirements of Bid
                         Documents. Such proof shall be in the form of product data as specified in
                         Section 01600.
              14.12.2 Should it be determined that a proposed product does not meet requirements of
                         Bid Documents, the request for Substitution or Voluntary Alternative will be
                         rejected, and the Bidder shall base his bid on products specified or other
                         products accepted as Substitution.
      14.13 Submit requests for acceptance of variations from specified materials in writing to the
            Consultant, NOT LATER THAN five (5) working days prior to time stated for receiving of
            Bids.
      14.14 All references in the Specification to "Or Other Approved", "other preapproved product"
            or similar phrases mean that acceptance must be obtained as described above.
15.   Trade Union Labour
      15.1 It is not a requirement that workers on the site belong to a trade union.
      15.2 With respect to union and non-union labour, this Project will be an "OPEN SITE" and the
            Bidder is to make the necessary allowances and provisions in the Bid Price accordingly.
16.   Unit Prices
      16.1 Complete Stipulated Price Bid Form "Appendix C" showing the Unit Prices requested in
            Section 01230. Failure to do so will result in Bid being rejected for being incomplete.
17.   Alternative Prices
      17.1 Complete Alternative Prices Bid Form Appendix "D" with Alternative Prices as requested
            in Section 01230. List also any proposed "Voluntary Alternatives" in Appendix "J" of the
            Stipulated Price Bid Form. Failure to do so will result in Bid being rejected for being
            incomplete.
18.   Separate Prices
      18.1 Complete Stipulated Price Bid Form Appendix "E" with Separate Prices as requested in
            Section 01230. Failure to do so will result in Bid being rejected for being incomplete.

                                 Architectural & Engineering Services
Calgary Board of Education                 Appendix 1                              Section 00200
School Name, Project Title                                             INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Project No.                                                                          Page 8 of 9


    18.2 Separate Prices are not included in the Stipulated Price.
19. Itemized Items Prices
    19.1 Complete Stipulated Price Bid Form Appendix "F" with Itemized Item Prices as
         requested in Section 01230. Failure to do so will result in Bid being rejected for being
         incomplete.
    19.2 Itemized Items Prices are included in the Stipulated Price.
20. Evaluation Sheet
    20.1 The Owner, in evaluating Bids, may complete Evaluation Sheet Bid Form Appendix “K”
         if the Owner in its sole unfettered absolute discretion deems use of the Evaluation Sheet
         is most advantageous to itself.
    20.2 Bids capable of acceptance in accordance with these Instructions to Bidders will be
         rated according to the predetermined evaluation criteria. Such ratings will be confidential
         and no total scores will be released to a Bidder.
    20.3 At a minimum, the rating of bids will be based on (not necessarily or sequentially
         weighted):
         20.3.1 The Bidder’s ability and agreement to complete the project within the indicated
                    construction schedule.
         20.3.2 Successful completion of projects of comparable size and scope within the past
                    five (5) years.
         20.3.3 The Bidder’s ability to work cooperatively with the Owner, Consultants and
                    representatives and to meet project expectations.
         20.3.4 Related experience in this project type.
         20.3.5 Project personnel proposed and their related experience.
         20.3.6 The Bidder’s ability to effectively manage and do the Work using the named
                    superintendent and submitted subcontractors and suppliers.
         20.3.7 The Bidder’s history with respect to the quality of work, scheduling, changes in the
                    Work and force account work.
    20.4 A Bidder shall provide any information it determines will assist the Owner in using these
         criteria. The Owner may reject the lowest or any Bid in its sole discretion if after
         investigation and consideration, the Owner determines that the Bidder is not qualified to
         perform the Work, is incapable of performing the Contract in a manner satisfactory to the
         Owner or both.


                                        END OF SECTION




                               Architectural & Engineering Services
Calgary Board of Education                 Appendix 1                            Section 00200
School Name, Project Title                                           INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Project No.                                                                        Page 9 of 9




             APPENDIX “K” TO BID - EVALUATION SHEET
_______________________________ Evaluation By ________________________________


                                                                      Maximum
                              Criteria                                 Points       Score


EXPERIENCE                          (40%)
    Successful completion of projects of comparable size
      and scope within the past five (5) years.                              10
    Related experience in this type of project.                             10
    The Bidder’s ability to work cooperatively with the
      Owner, Consultants and representatives and to meet
      project expectations.                                                  10
    The Bidder’s history with respect to the quality of work,
      scheduling, changes in the Work and force account
      work.                                                                  10

RESOURCES(30%)                       (30%)
    Project personnel proposed and their related
     experience.                                                             10
    Proposed personnel’s time commitment to the project
     from start to post construction phase.                                  10
    The Bidder’s ability to effectively manage and do the
     Work using the named superintendent and submitted
     subcontractors and suppliers.                                            5
    The Bidder’s ability and agreement to complete the
     project within the indicated construction schedule.                      5

BID PRICE                                (30%)
    Bid Price.                                                              30

                                         Total Score                        100   _________



Points awarded for fees based upon the following formula:
                Fee Points Awarded = Max. Points Available x Lowest Price
                                           Price Being Evaluated




                              Architectural & Engineering Services
Design Guidelines                   Appendix             2                           Section 00410
Calgary Board of Education                                               Stipulated Price Bid Form
Capital Planning and Development Services                                              Page 1 of 11


BID
PROJECT TITLE & LOCATION:
                                          CALGARY, ALBERTA

SUBMITTED TO:                             ______________________________________________
                                          ARCHITECTURAL & ENGINEERING SERVICES
                                          THE CALGARY BOARD OF EDUCATION
                                          3610 - 9 STREET S.E.
                                          CALGARY, ALBERTA

SUBMITTED BY:

OF (Address):




Having examined the Bid Documents as listed in Appendix "A" of this Bid, and Addenda No.          to
No.          inclusive, all as issued by ___________ and having visited the Project Site, we hereby
offer to enter into a Contract to perform the Work required by the Bid Documents for the stipulated
price of




DOLLARS ($                          ) in Canadian funds, which price includes all specified Cash
Allowances, applicable taxes, excluding Value-Added Taxes (GST), in force at this date except as
may be otherwise provided in the Bid Documents.

GST Amount                                        (not included in Bid Price)

APPENDICES TO BID:
The information provided in the following Appendices forms an integral part of the Bid:
                "A", List of Bid Documents
                "B", List of Subcontractors
                "C", List of Unit Prices
                "D", List of Alternative Prices
                "E", List of Separate Prices
                “F”, List of Itemized Prices
                "J", Voluntary Alternatives to Specified Items.
Interest:
If the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as they become due under the terms of the
Contract, or in award by arbitration or court, interest of one (1) percent per annum above the Bank of
Canada Bank rate on such unpaid amounts shall also become due and payable until payment.
Design Guidelines                   Appendix             2                           Section 00410
Calgary Board of Education                                               Stipulated Price Bid Form
Capital Planning and Development Services                                              Page 2 of 11


DECLARATIONS:
We hereby declare that:
(a)    We agree to perform the Work in compliance with the required Completion Schedule
       stated in the Bid Documents, or if no Schedule is stated, to attain Substantial
       Performance of the Work of the entire Project by
                ;
(b)    No person, firm or corporation other than the undersigned has any interest in this Bid or in the
       proposed Contract for which this Bid is made;
(c)    This Bid is open to acceptance for a period of 60 days from the date of bid closing.


SIGNATURES: signed, sealed and submitted for and on behalf of:


Company Name and Address:
                                                                                 (Apply SEAL above)

Signature:

Name & Title:

Signature:

Name & Title:

Witness:

Dated at                                          this                  day of

Submitted by:
Design Guidelines                   Appendix              2                           Section 00410
Calgary Board of Education                                                Stipulated Price Bid Form
Capital Planning and Development Services                                               Page 3 of 11


           APPENDIX "A" TO BID - LIST OF BID DOCUMENTS

The following is the list or description of the Bid Documents referred to in the Bid for the above named
Contract.


1.      All specification sections, appendices listed in the attached Table of Contents.


2.      All Drawings listed in the drawing index dated                                                 .


3.      Addenda numbered                           to                                        as issued.


(N.B.: Bidders: Photocopy or remove from the Specifications, verify, sign and attach a copy of the
Table of Contents.)


NUMBER OF PAGES ATTACHED:
Design Guidelines                   Appendix             2                           Section 00410
Calgary Board of Education                                               Stipulated Price Bid Form
Capital Planning and Development Services                                              Page 4 of 11


Submitted by:

     APPENDIX "B" TO BID - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS

The following are the Subcontractors and Suppliers we propose to use for the portions of Work listed
hereunder. Where the bidder does not intend to employ a Subcontractor, he shall insert "Own
Forces" in space provided. If item of Work is not applicable to Project, insert N/A. No changes to the
list will be allowed without the express written consent of the Owner:

Division or Section of Work                Name of Subcontractor

1.      Earthwork

2.      Landscaping

3.      Asphalt Paving

4.      Concrete

4.      Concrete Reinforcement

5.      Masonry:

        .1      Concrete Block Supplier

        .2      Brick Supplier

6.      Structural Steel, &
        Steel Joists & Metal Deck

7.      Metal Fabrications

8.      Rough Carpentry

9.      Finish Carpentry &
        Architectural Woodwork

10.     Air / Vapour Barrier: (Supplier)

11.     Waterproof Flooring

12.     Batt Insulation, Board
        Insulation

13.     Foam-in-Place Insulation

14.     Insulation / Finish System

15.     Metal Siding & Soffit Cladding

16.     Sprayed Fireproofing

17.     Smokeseal & Firestop
Design Guidelines                   Appendix       2                       Section 00410
Calgary Board of Education                                     Stipulated Price Bid Form
Capital Planning and Development Services                                    Page 5 of 11



Submitted by:

      APPENDIX "B" TO BID - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS (CONTINUED)

Division or Section of Work            Name of Subcontractor

18.     Modified Bituminous Roofing
        & Metal Flashing: (Supplier)

19.     Standing Seam Metal
        Roofing

20.     Roof Access Hatch

21.     Sealants & Caulking

22.     Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
        (Including H. M. Windows):
        (Supplier)

23.     Wood Doors: (Supplier)

24.     Coiling Counter Shutters

25.     Aluminum Windows &
        Curtain Wall: (Supplier)

26.     Door Hardware: (Supplier)

27.     Glass, Glazing & Mirrors:
        (Supplier)

28.     Parging

29.     Gypsum Wallboard &
        Metal Framing

30.     Ceramic & Porcelain Tile

31.     Acoustic Ceilings

32.     Wood Flooring

33.     Resilient Flooring:
        (Supplier)

34.     Carpeting: (Supplier)

35.     Acoustic Panels

36.     Painting


37.     Tackboards, Whiteboards:
        (Supplier)
Design Guidelines                   Appendix    2                       Section 00410
Calgary Board of Education                                  Stipulated Price Bid Form
Capital Planning and Development Services                                 Page 6 of 11




Submitted by:

      APPENDIX "B" TO BID - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS (CONTINUED)

Division or Section of Work         Name of Subcontractor

38.     Metal Toilet Partitions

39.     Cubicle Curtains & Tracks

40.     Flagpole

41.     Signage

42.     Washroom Accessories:
        (Supplier)

43.     Athletic Equipment

44.     Hydraulic Elevator

45.     Wheelchair Lift

46.     Prime Mechanical

47.     Controls

48.     Plumbing

49.     Sheet Metal

50.     Prime Electrical

51.     Fire Alarm

52.     Data


Note: The above are samples; list specific Subcontractors for the Project that
are required to be named.
Design Guidelines                   Appendix             2                           Section 00410
Calgary Board of Education                                               Stipulated Price Bid Form
Capital Planning and Development Services                                              Page 7 of 11


Submitted by:

                 APPENDIX "C" TO BID - LIST OF UNIT PRICES

The following are our Unit Prices for the Units of Work listed hereunder. The Unit Prices listed apply
to performing the Units of Work only during the time scheduled for such Work in the Project
Schedule. These prices do not include value-added taxes (GST).


Unit Price ($)    Unit of Work                                              | ADDITION | DELETION


Refer to Section 01230 for information.


Unit Price U-1:                                                             $            $


Unit Price U-2:                                                             $            $


Unit Price U-3:                                                             $            $


Unit Price U-4:                                                             $            $


Unit Price U-5:                                                             $            $


Unit Price U-6:                                                             $            $
Design Guidelines                   Appendix           2                             Section 00410
Calgary Board of Education                                               Stipulated Price Bid Form
Capital Planning and Development Services                                              Page 8 of 11


Submitted by:

            APPENDIX "D" TO BID - ALTERNATIVE PRICES

The following are our prices for the Alternative Work listed hereunder. Such Alternative Work and
amounts are not included in our Stipulated Bid Price. Adjust our Bid Price by addition or deduction,
as indicated, for each Alternative implemented. OUR PRICES FOR ALTERNATIVE WORK ARE
OPEN FOR ACCEPTANCE FOR A PERIOD OF 60 DAYS FROM NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE OF
OUR BID. Alternative Work does not include for value-added taxes (GST).


Description of Alternative Work                                     ADDITION | DELETION


Refer to Section 01230 for information.


Alternative Price A-1:                                               $               $


Alternative Price A-2:                                               $               $


Alternative Price A-3:                                               $               $


Alternative Price A-4:                                               $               $


Alternative Price A-5:                                               $               $


Alternative Price A-6:                                               $               $


Note: Keep Alternatives to a minimum, include 2-3 cost reduction items and
2-3 additional cost items that can be used to adjust the Bid Price, depending
on how it comes in related to the Budget.
Design Guidelines                   Appendix        2                          Section 00410
Calgary Board of Education                                         Stipulated Price Bid Form
Capital Planning and Development Services                                        Page 9 of 11


Submitted by:                                                         on Date:

                APPENDIX "E" TO BID - SEPARATE PRICES

The following are our Separate Prices for the Work listed hereunder. Such Work and amounts are
not included in our Stipulated Bid Price. These Separate Prices do not include for value-added
taxes (GST).


Description of Separate Price Work                                        Amount ($)


Refer to Section 01230 for information.


Separate Price S-1:                                                       $


Separate Price S-2:                                                       $


Separate Price S-3:                                                       $


Separate Price S-4:                                                       $


Separate Price S-5:                                                       $


Separate Price S-6:                                                       $
Design Guidelines                   Appendix          2                        Section 00410
Calgary Board of Education                                     General Conditions of Contract
Capital Planning and Development Services                                       Page 10 of 11


Submitted by:                                                   on Date:

                APPENDIX “F” TO BID – ITEMIZED PRICES

The following are our Itemized Prices for the Work listed hereunder. Such Work and amounts are
included in our Stipulated Bid Price. These Itemized Prices do not include for value-added taxes
(GST).


Description of Itemized Price Work
Itemized Price                                                          Amounts ($)


Refer to Section 01230 for information.


Itemized Price 1-1:                                                     $


Itemized Price 1-2:                                                     $
Design Guidelines                   Appendix    2                    Section 00410
Calgary Board of Education                           General Conditions of Contract
Capital Planning and Development Services                             Page 11 of 11



Submitted by:                                                on Date:

     APPENDIX "J" TO THE BID - VOLUNTARY ALTERNATIVES TO SPECIFIED ITEMS


PROJECT TITLE
AND LOCATION:




Product Specified                 Alternative                           Amount


                                                                        $

                                                                        $

                                                                        $

                                                                        $

                                                                        $

                                                                        $

                                                                        $

                                                                        $

                                                                        $

                                                                        $

                                                                        $

                                                                        $

                                                                        $

                                                                        $

NOTE:
1.      Submit with Bid Form prior to Bid closing as specified in Section 00200.
2.      Acceptance of Alternative is subject to meeting all conditions of Bid
        Documents and Specifications. DO NOT INCLUDE IN BASE BID.
3.      Invalid unless signed below.

Signature (General Contract Bidder):
Design Guidelines                      Appendix 3                             Section 00700
Calgary Board of Education                                    General Conditions of Contract
Capital Planning and Development                                                 Page 1 of 2


1.    General Conditions
      The General Conditions of this Contract are the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price
      Contract, Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC 2. Where any part of the
      General Conditions is modified or voided by the Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered
      provisions shall remain in effect.
2.    Definitions
      The definitions included with CCDC 2 and as modified in the Supplementary Conditions are
      incorporated as part of the Contract Documents.
3.    Agreement between Owner and Contractor
      3.1 The Contractor will be required to execute the agreement with the Owner incorporated
           in CCDC 2.
      3.2 Completion Date: The date for Substantial Performance of the work incorporated under
           Article A-1, Item 1.3 CCDC 2 is ________________.
4.    General Conditions - List of Articles
      The following is a list of the headings to the General Conditions Articles of CCDC 2:
      Part 1 - General Provisions
      GC 1.1        Contract Documents
      GC 1.2        Law of the Contract
      GC 1.3        Rights and Remedies
      GC 1.4        Assignment
      Part 2 - Administration of the Contract
      GC 2.1        Authority of the Consultant
      GC 2.2        Role of the Consultant
      GC 2.3        Review and Inspection of the Work
      GC 2.4        Defective Work
      Part 3 - Execution of the Work
      GC 3.1        Control of the Work
      GC 3.2        Construction by Owner or Other Contractors
      GC 3.3        Temporary Supports, Structures and Facilities
      GC 3.4        Document Review
      GC 3.5        Construction Schedule
      GC 3.6        Construction Safety
      GC 3.7        Supervisor
      GC 3.8        Subcontractors and Suppliers
      GC 3.9        Labour and Products
      GC 3.10       Documents at the Site
      GC 3.11       Shop Drawings
      GC 3.12       Use of the Work
      GC 3.13       Cutting and Remedial Work
      GC 3.14       Cleanup
      Part 4 - Allowances
      GC 4.1        Cash Allowances
      GC 4.2        Contingency Allowances
      Part 5 - Payment
      GC 5.1        Financing Information Required of the Owner
      GC 5.2        Applications for Progress Payment
      GC 5.3        Progress Payment
      GC 5.4        Substantial Performance of the Work
      GC 5.5        Payment of Holdback upon Substantial Performance of the Work
      GC 5.6        Progressive Release of Holdback
      GC 5.7        Final Payment
      GC 5.8        Withholding of Payment
      GC 5.9        Non-conforming Work
Design Guidelines                      Appendix 3                             Section 00700
Calgary Board of Education                                    General Conditions of Contract
Capital Planning and Development                                                 Page 2 of 2


      Part 6 - Changes in the Work
      GC 6.1       Changes
      GC 6.2       Change Order
      GC 6.3       Change Directive
      GC 6.4       Concealed or Unknown Conditions
      GC 6.5       Delays
      Part 7 - Default Notice
      GC 7.1       Owner's Right to Perform the Work, Stop the Work or Terminate the Contract
      GC 7.2       Contractor's Right to Stop the Work or Terminate the Contract
      Part 8 - Dispute Resolution
      GC 8.1       Authority of the Consultant
      GC 8.2       Negotiation, Mediation, and Arbitration
      GC 8.3       Retention of Rights
      Part 9 - Protection of Persons and Property
      GC 9.1       Protection of the Work and Property
      GC 9.2       Damages and Mutual Responsibility
      GC 9.3       Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Materials
      Part 10 - Governing Regulations
      GC 10.1      Taxes and Duties
      GC 10.2      Laws, Notices, Permits and Fees
      GC 10.3      Patent Fees
      GC 10.4      Worker's Compensation
      Part 11 - Insurance – Bonds
      GC 11.1      Insurance
      GC 11.2      Bonds
      Part 12 - Indemnification - Waiver - Warranty
      GC 12.1      Indemnification
      GC 12.2      Waiver of Claims
      GC 12.3      Warranty.
Calgary Board of Education                   Appendix 4                       Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                       SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                     Page 1 of 18


The General Conditions for Stipulated Price Contract C.C.D.C. 2, 2008 Edition are hereby
amended as follows:
ARTICLE             A-5 PAYMENT
                    Notwithstanding the Article as written, all payments and release of holdback
                    amounts will be in accordance with the current and relevant provisions of the
                    builders’ lien legislation of Alberta.
          5.1       Paragraph 1, the blank space in the third line will be filled as “ten” “(10%).”
          5.3      Interest
                    Paragraph 1, replace (1) and (2) with “1% per annum above the prime rate”
                    The blank space in the seventh line shall be filled as "the Bank of Canada"
ARTICLE            A-6 RECEIPT OF AND ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES IN WRITING
      6.1          Replace the second sentence with:
                   “The delivery of a Notice in Writing will be by hand, by courier, by prepaid first
                   class mail, or by facsimile or other form of electronic communication provided that
                   confirmation of successful transmission is given by the activity report of the
                   sender’s facsimile machine or that receipt of an electronic communication is
                   acknowledged by the recipient.”
ARTICLE            A-7 LANGUAGE OF THE CONTRACT
      7.1          Delete this clause entirely.
DEFINITIONS        6. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
                   Revise to read:
                   The Contract Documents consist of those documents listed in Article A-3 of the
                   Agreement – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and written amendments agreed upon
                   between the parties.
                   14. PRODUCTS
                   Add the following wording:
                   “Product or Products shall include all operations manuals, warranty
                   documentation, plans, as built-Drawings, schematics, software programs, or other
                   similar materials or ancillary items, whether or not specified as required in the
                   Contract Documents, which are required or reasonably necessary to enable the
                   Owner to use, operate, maintain and service such Product or Products following
                   Substantial Performance of the Work.”
                   Add the following definition:
                   27. PERSONNEL
                   Personnel is anyone engaged by the Contractor to perform work on site.
G.C.1.1            CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
          1.1.6    Add the following wording:
                   “or in establishing the extent of work to be performed by a trade.”
          1.1.8    Revise to read:
                   “The Owner shall provide the Contractor with thirty-five sets of drawings and
                   specifications at no cost. Any additional sets of drawings or specifications will be
                   provided to the Contractor at the cost of reproduction.”
G.C.2.2            ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT
          2.2.1    Add the following wording:
                   “during construction until issuance of the final certificate for payment and subject
                   to GC 2.1 – AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT and with the Owner’s consent,
                   from time to time until the completion of any correction of defects as provided in
                   paragraph 12.3.4. of GC 12. 3 – WARRANTY.”
          2.2.16   Revise to read:
                   "The Consultant will conduct reviews of the Work to confirm the date of
                    Substantial Performance of the Work as provided in G.C.5.4 SUBSTANTIAL
                    PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK."
Calgary Board of Education                 Appendix 4                        Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                      SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                    Page 2 of 18


G.C.2.3           REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK
          2.3.8   Add new clause to read:
                  “In order to assist the Owner and the Consultant with their review of the status of
                  the Work, meetings at the site, or another location designated by the Owner, will
                  be held on regular basis, or as otherwise reasonably required by the Owner. The
                  Contractor will have a minimum of one of the key individuals listed in G.C.3.7.1 in
                  attendance which individual or individuals will be fully informed and able to
                  discuss any issues identified prior to or raised for discussion or action at such
                  regular meetings. Any issues of concern which the Contractor has regarding the
                  Work will be raised at such meetings, including any concerns regarding the
                  Owner’s or Consultant’s actions, inaction, or delays, if any.”
          2.3.9   Add new clause to read:
                  “The Consultant will keep and maintain detailed written minutes of such meetings
                  which minutes will accurately reflect the date, time, place and the issues
                  discussed, including any resolution of or further action required with respect to
                  such issues, including but not necessarily limited to the terms mentioned in
                  G.C.2.3.6. The minutes will be circulated to the Owner and the Contractor within
                  3 Working Days of the time of such meetings for their review and comments. The
                  absence of any comments from the Owner or the Contractor within 10 Working
                  Days from the time of such meetings will be construed as an acceptance of the
                  events as being depicted in the minutes.”
G.C.2.4           DEFECTIVE WORK
          2.4.1   Add the following wording:
                  “The Contractor will rectify in an acceptable manner all other defective Work and
                  deficiencies throughout the Work whether or not such defects or deficiencies are
                  identified by the Consultant or the Owner.”
          2.4.2   Delete G.C.2.4.2 and replace with the following wording:
                  “The Contractor will promptly pay the Owner for costs incurred by the Owner, the
                  Owner’s own forces, or the Owner’s other contractors, for Work destroyed or
                  damaged or any alternations necessitated by the Contractor’s removal,
                  replacement or re-execution of defective or deficient Work. The Owner may
                  require the Contractor to rectify any such defects or deficiencies to other
                  contractor’s work at the Contractor’s expense.”
G.C.3.1           CONTROL OF THE WORK
          3.1.3   Add a new clause:
                  “Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Contractor is responsible for
                  the co-ordination of the various parts of the Work so that no part is left in an
                  unfinished or incomplete condition.”
                  Add a new clause:
                  “At all times during the construction, CBE Project Managers, agents and
                  designates shall have the right to access, ingress and egress any work site,
                  building or facility where Contractor performs the Work, and any part thereof, for
                  any purpose.”
          3.1.4   Add a new clause:
                  “Prior to commencing any of the Work, the Contractor will verify all
                  measurements, dimensions, and levels necessary for the proper, timely and
                  complete performance of all aspects of the Work. Where measurements,
                  dimensions or levels are not included in the Contract Documents or exact
                  locations or requirements are not apparent, the Contractor will immediately notify
                  the Consultant in writing of such and will obtain instructions from the Consultant
                  prior to proceeding with any part of the Work affected thereby.”
G.C.3.4           DOCUMENT REVIEW
          3.4.2   Add a new clause to read:
                  “If the Contractor finds discrepancies in or omissions from, the Contract
                  Documents or has any doubts as to the meaning or intent of any part thereof,
Calgary Board of Education                 Appendix 4                        Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                      SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                    Page 3 of 18


                  the Contractor will immediately notify the Consultant by a Notice in Writing.
                  Upon receipt of such Notice in Writing the Consultant will provide the
                  Contractor with written clarification or instructions to address such discrepancy
                  or omission. If the Contractor fails to provide such Notice in Writing or
                  otherwise proceeds with any portion of the Work which the Contractor knew or
                  reasonably ought to have known was in error, inconsistent or omitted in the
                  Contractor Documents, the Contractor will be liable for making good such
                  Work.”
G.C.3.6           SUPERVISION
          3.6.1   Revise to read:
                  “The Contractor will assign the following qualified key individuals to the Project
                  in the following positions, namely:
                          (Persons to be named upon award of the Contract subject to the
                              approval of the Owner).
                  Such individuals shall remain assigned to the Project in the above mentioned
                  capacity up to and including the attainment of Substantial Performance of the
                  Work, will dedicate their full working time and attention to the Project and will
                  not be changed or re-assigned to another project without the prior written
                  consent of the Owner. These individuals will at a minimum also be available at
                  no additional cost for consultation and to provide direction during the
                  completion of deficiencies and undertaking of any warranty requirements. Any
                  replacement of these key individuals will be subject to the prior written consent
                  of the Owner, unless such individual leaves the employment of the Contractor.”
          3.6.3   Add a new clause to read:
                  "The Contractor will continue to have a supervisor in attendance on a full-time
                  basis until all deficiencies noted at the time of Substantial Performance of the
                  Work have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Consultant."
          3.6.4   Add a new clause to read:
                  “The Owner, may with reasonable cause, at any time during the execution of the
                  Work, require the replacement of any of the key individuals, or other supervisory
                  personal assigned to the Work or the Project. Upon receipt of such a request, the
                  Contractor will immediately make arrangements to appoint an acceptable
                  replacement.”
G.C.3.7           SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
          3.7.7   Add a new clause to read:
                  “The Contractor agrees not to change Subcontractors without the Owner’s prior
                  written consent. Any change in Subcontractors will not result in an adjustment to
                  the Contract Price or Contract Time.”
G.C.3.8           LABOUR AND PRODUCTS
          3.8.1   Delete from line 1 the word “The” and substitute the following words:
                  “Unless otherwise expressly stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents,
                  the”
          3.8.2   Add the following wording after the words “Products provided shall be new”;
                  “and fit for the purpose intended”.
          3.8.4   Add a new clause to read:
                  “Until such time as the Products are incorporated into the Work, the Contractor
                  will be responsible for the safe and secure storage of Products on the Project
                  site, or elsewhere if located off the Project site, in a manner as to avoid
                  damage, destruction, contamination, waste or spoilage to the Products or other
                  persons or property.”
G.C.3.9           DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE
          3.9.1   After the word “reports”, insert the following:
                  “including any reports or orders by authorities having jurisdiction.”
Calgary Board of Education                 Appendix 4                       Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                     SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                   Page 4 of 18


G.C.3.10          SHOP DRAWINGS
       3.10.5     After the first sentence, insert the following:
                  “Shop drawings that are not stamped, reviewed and signed by the Contractor
                  will be rejected by the Consultant.”
G.C.3.14
       3.14.1     Add a new clause to read:
                  “Unless otherwise expressly stated in the Contract Documents, in performing
                  any and all of the Work and all of the other obligations required of the
                  Contractor under the Contract, the Contractor will exercise a standard of care,
                  skill and diligence that would normally be provided by an experienced, prudent
                  and highly qualified Contractor supplying similar services for similar projects in
                  Alberta in an expeditious and efficient manner.”
G.C.4.1           CASH ALLOWANCES
          4.1.1   Revise to read:
                  "The Contract Price includes cash allowances stated in the Contract Documents.
                  Cash Allowance Authorizations will be issued to authorize expenditure of
                  individual cash allowances as the Work progresses in accordance with clause
                  4.1.7.”
          4.1.5   Add a new sentence to read:
                  “A Change Order will be issued to reconcile the final Cash Allowance balance with
                  the Contract Price."
G.C.4.2           CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES
          4.2.1   Delete this clause entirely.
          4.2.2   Delete this clause entirely.
          4.2.3   Delete this clause entirely.
          4.2.4   Delete this clause entirely.
G.C.5.1           FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
                  Revise title to read:
                  “FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE CONTRACTOR”.
          5.1.1   Delete this clause entirely and add a new clause to read:
                  “The Contractor will, at the request of the Owner, prior to the execution of the
                  Agreement, and promptly from time to time thereafter, furnish to the Owner
                  reasonable evidence that the Contractor has the financial capacity to complete all
                  of the obligations required of it by the Contract Documents.”
          5.1.2   Delete this clause entirely and add a new clause to read:
                  “The Contractor will keep the Owner appraised of any changes in its financial
                  capacity during its undertaking of the Work which may adversely impact on the
                  Contractor’s ability to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract.”
G.C.5.2           APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
          5.2.1   Revise to read:
                  "Applications for payment on account as provided in ARTICLE A-5 PAYMENT of
                  the Agreement, may be made monthly as the Work progresses to Substantial
                  Performance of the Work.”.
          5.2.2   Revise to read:
                                                         th
                  “Submit to the Consultant, by the 25 of each month, a draft application for
                  payment in the form and content required by the Consultant, for review by the
                  Consultant and Owner.”
          5.2.6   Add the following wording:
                  “as well as a detailed cost report and cost to complete projection in a format
                  acceptable to the Owner.”
          5.2.7   Revise to read:
                  "Claims for Products delivered to the Place of the Work but not yet incorporated
                  into the Work will only be made if ownership of the Products has been transferred
                  from the Supplier to the Contractor and will be supported by such evidence as the
Calgary Board of Education                      Appendix 4                         Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                            SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                          Page 5 of 18


                    Consultant may reasonably require to establish the value, delivery, payment for
                    and transfer of ownership of the Products. Despite the transfer of ownership of
                    the Products or payment by the Owner to the Contractor, the Contractor will
                    remain liable for the Products until incorporated into the Work."
          5.2.8     Add a new clause to read:
                    “Applications for payment will, commencing on the second application, be
                    accompanied by a statement sworn by an authorized officer of the Contractor in
                    CCDC form 9B-2001, stating that all accounts for labour, subcontracts, Products,
                    construction machinery and equipment and all other indebtedness which may
                    have been incurred by the Contractor in the performance of the Work up to the
                    date of the previous application and for which the Owner might in any way be held
                    responsible have been paid in full, except for amounts retained as a holdback or
                    as an identified amount in dispute.”
          5.2.9     Add a new clause to read:
                    “When required by the Owner, the Contractor will provide receipts, declarations or
                    other documentary evidence to the Owner’s satisfaction evidencing full and timely
                    payment of the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Suppliers involved in the Work.”
          5.2.10    Add a new clause to read:
                    “Prior to the release by the Owner of any Progress Payments to the Contractor,
                    the Contractor will provide a certified copy of a Certificate of Title for the lands on
                    which the Contractor has been performing the Work, dated the day each
                    Progress Payment is released by the Owner to the Contractor, evidencing the
                    absence of any builders’ liens, or such similar charges, registered against and
                    upon the Certificate of Title. If the Certificate of Title indicates that a builders’ lien,
                    or liens, have been registered which lien or liens arise out of the Contractor’s
                    performance of the Work, or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible, the
                    Owner will comply with the then current and relevant provisions of the builders’
                    lien legislation of Alberta.”
G.C.5.3             PROGRESS PAYMENT
          5.3.1.4   Add a new clause to read:
                    “The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with written confirmation from the
                    applicable workers’ compensation authorities that Contractor and any
                    Subcontractors are in good standing with such authorities, and no Contractor
                    invoice shall be payable until such confirmation is received.”
G.C.5.4             SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK
          5.4.1     Revise to read:
                    "When the Contractor considers that the Work is substantially performed, the
                    Contractor will prepare and submit to the Consultant a comprehensive list of items
                    to be completed or corrected and will prepare and submit to the Consultant a
                    certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work for verification by the
                    Consultant. Failure to include an item on the list does not alter the responsibility
                    of the Contractor to complete the Contract."
          5.4.2     Revise to read:
                    "The Consultant will, not later than ten (10) days after the submission by the
                    Contractor of a certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, conduct an
                    inspection and assessment of the Work in order to verify the validity of the
                    certificate. The Consultant will, no later than seven (7) days after its inspection
                    notify the Contractor in writing of its approval or reasons for disapproval of the
                    certificate."
                    "Immediately following the approval of the certificate of Substantial Performance
                    of the Work, the Consultant will issue a list of deficiencies and incomplete Work
                    remaining to be done on the Project. These deficiencies will be valued by the
                    Consultant in conjunction with the Contractor at a rate of two (2) times normal
                    construction value. The Owner will be entitled to retain a deficiency holdback, in
                    addition to any other holdbacks, which deficiency holdback will be held by the
                    Owner until all deficiencies have been completed to the satisfaction of the
Calgary Board of Education              Appendix 4                        Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                   SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                 Page 6 of 18


               Consultant and Owner. In the event that the Contractor requests an inspection
               and the deficiencies are found to be incomplete, any costs incurred by the
               Consultant and Owner for additional inspections will be borne by the Contractor.”
       5.4.3   Revise to read:
               "Immediately following the approval of the certificate of Substantial Performance
               of the Work, the Contractor in consultation with the Consultant will establish a
               reasonable date for finishing the Work and provide written confirmation of the date
               to the Owner. Such date, hereinafter the date of Total Performance of the Work,
               must be acceptable to the Owner and will not under any circumstances be greater
               than sixty days from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work."
       5.4.4   Add a new clause to read:
               “In the event that all deficiencies are not completed by the Contractor in
               accordance with the Contract Documents and to the satisfaction of the Consultant
               within the time established by G.C.5.4.4, the Owner will have the right to have the
               deficiencies completed by another contractor and recover or set-off the costs of
               such completion work from the Contractor as permitted by this Contract or
               otherwise at law. If any deficiency remains uncompleted or unfulfilled as at the
               date of Total Performance of the Work, the value of such deficiency as previously
               determined will become a deduction from the Contract Price and may be
               recovered or set-off against monies otherwise due or accruing due to the
               Contractor as permitted by this Contract or otherwise at law. In the event that the
               Contractor fails to remedy a deficiency within the time established by G.C.5.4.4
               once the Owner has proceeded with any activities necessary to remedy the
               deficiency, the Contractor will be liable to and will indemnify the Owner for all
               corrective actions taken by any parties performed in respect of such deficiency
               and such corrective actions will not constitute a waiver of any of the Contractor’s
               warranty obligations.”
       5.4.5   Add a new clause to read:
               “The Contractor acknowledges that the Owner will require the Work to be
               completed in order to be fully useable, operational and capable of being occupied
               for the purpose intended by the date of Substantial Performance of the Work, in
               order for the Owner to have sufficient time to the have the Project fully available
               for the commencement of School activities. In the event that the Project is not
               available as required, the Owner will suffer severe inconvenience and incur
               additional costs and expenses, including, but not limited to, administrative costs
               and expenses, with respect to the reassignment and relocation of personnel and
               provision of temporary facilities, all of which costs and expenses are foreseeable
               and will be the responsibility of and to the account of the Contractor.
               The Contractor further acknowledges that the assessment of the costs and
               expenses which may be incurred by the Owner in the event that the date of
               Substantial Performance of the Work is delayed even nominally is difficult, and
               accordingly, the Contractor agrees that, notwithstanding any other rights or
               remedies of the Owner, it will pay as liquidated damages and not as a penalty the
               sum of $500.00 a day for each and every day that Substantial Performance of the
               Work is not attained by the Contractor as at the date of Substantial Performance
               of the Work required by the Contract Documents. It is acknowledged by the
               Contractor that the above amount represents a genuine pre-estimate of damages
               and is not a penalty in any manner. The Owner will be entitled to deduct or
               withhold any liquidated damages to which the Contractor is obligated to pay from
               any monies otherwise due or accruing due to the Contractor under this Contract
               or any other contract between the Owner and the Contractor.
G.C.5.5.       PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE
               WORK
       5.5.1   In the first line delete the word "issuance" and substitute the words "verification"
               by the Consultant.
               Add new clauses .3, .4, and .5 to read:
Calgary Board of Education                 Appendix 4                        Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                      SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                    Page 7 of 18


                  .3     "Provide written notification of any monies being retained by the Contractor
                         as deferred by agreement or as a result of a dispute with a Subcontractor,
                         or Supplier."
                  .4     "Submit a copy of a current Worker's Compensation Board clearance letter
                         confirming that the Contractor’s account relative to the Project is in good
                         standing."
                  .5     "Submit a copy of Certificate of Title dated the 46th day or after from the
                         issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work
                         evidencing the absence of any builders’ liens or such similar charges being
                         registered against the Project lands."
          5.5.3   Delete this clause entirely.
          5.5.4   Delete existing and substitute the following:
                  "The holdback amount authorized by the Certificate of Payment for the holdback
                  is due and payable on the day following the expiration of the holdback period
                  stipulated in the current lien legislation of Alberta and will be paid to the
                  Contractor within five (5) Working Days provided all appropriate preconditions of
                  payment have been met by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner. If
                  permitted by the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work, the Owner
                  may retain out of the holdback amount any sums required by law to satisfy any
                  registered liens against the Work, or any other third party monetary claims against
                  the Contractor which are enforceable against the Owner."
          5.5.5   Delete this clause entirely.
G.C.5.6           PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK
          5.6.1   Delete the existing and substitute the following:
                  "Where legislation permits and where upon application by the Contractor, the
                  Consultant has verified that the Work of a Subcontractor has been totally
                  performed to the satisfaction of the Consultant prior to the attainment of
                  Substantial Performance of the Work, the Owner may pay the Contractor the
                  holdback amount retained for such subcontract Work, on the day following the
                  expiration of the holdback period for such Work as stipulated in and provided for
                  by the current Alberta lien legislation."
          5.6.2   Delete this clause entirely.
          5.6.4   Add the following:
                  "When submitting an application for payment through the Contractor for
                  progressive release of holdback, the Subcontractor will submit all documents as
                  required by Clause 5.5.1 of G.C.5.5 and a letter from the Contractor confirming
                  the final subcontract amount."
G.C.5.7           FINAL PAYMENT
          5.7.1   Revise to read:
                  "When the Contractor considers that the Work is completed, the Contractor will
                  submit an application for final payment. No applications for payment are to be
                  submitted between the application for payment at Substantial Performance of the
                  Work and application for final payment."
          5.7.5   Add a new clause:
                  “Any payments made to the Contractor by the Owner with respect to the
                  performance of the Work, may be subject to adjustment at any time up to one
                  year from the date of the payment by the Owner of the final payment for errors,
                  overpayments, set-offs, back charges, withholdings, or other items as permitted
                  under the Contract, or otherwise at law”.
G.C.6.2           CHANGE ORDERS
          6.2.1   Delete existing clause and substitute the following:
                  "When a change in the Work is proposed or required, the Consultant will provide
                  a Proposed Change Notice to the Contractor. The Contractor will forward
                  promptly by the date called for, and in a form acceptable to the Consultant, a
                  method of adjustment or an amount of adjustment for the Contract Price if any
Calgary Board of Education                   Appendix 4                        Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                        SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                      Page 8 of 18


                   and the adjustment in the Contract Time if any for the proposed change in the
                   Work.”
          6.2.2    Delete existing clause and substitute the following:
                   "When the Owner and the Contractor agree to the adjustments in the Contract
                   Price and Contract Time or to the method to be used to determine the
                   adjustments, such an agreement will be effective immediately and will be
                   recorded in a Change Order issued by the Consultant and signed by the
                   Consultant, Contractor and Owner. The value of the Work performed as a result
                   of a Change Order will be included in applications for progress payment."
          6.2.3    Add new clause to read:
                   “Changes submitted for approval are to be accompanied by a detailed breakdown
                   of labour and materials, to which will be added all applicable charges including
                   reasonable overhead, profit and supervision charges. Any impact on the Contract
                   Time must be clearly stated.
                   Change charges submitted will be calculated in the following manner:
                   (a)    Compile a detailed breakdown of labour and material incurred by the
                          change.
                   (b)    Compile a detailed breakdown of labour and material replaced by the
                          change.
                   (c)    Calculate the net direct cost by deducting the cost of deletions from the cost
                          of additions.
                   (d)    For Work done by the Contractor, add to the net direct cost not more than
                          10% for overhead and 5% for profit and no supervision charges.
                   (e)    For Work done by Subcontractors/Supplier, add to the net direct cost, not
                          more than 10% for overhead and 5% for profit payable to the
                          Subcontractor/Supplier; and add not more than 5% to the
                          Subcontractor's/Supplier       amount      for    supervision       of     the
                          Subcontractor/Supplier by the Contractor.”
          6.2.4    Add a new clause:
                   “All indirect and impact costs related to and or resulting from the Contractor’s
                   implementation of a particular authorized change, are deemed to be included in
                   the amount stated on that particular Change Order as the sum by which, and only
                   which, the Contract Price, and Contract Time if applicable, will be adjusted. The
                   Contractor is not entitled to any additional compensation other than the
                   adjustments in the Contract Price and the Contract Time specifically recorded on
                   Change Orders.”
G.C.6.3            CHANGE DIRECTIVE/SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION
          6.3.11   Delete and substitute the following:
                   "When a clarification or modification of the Work is required which would not
                   adjust the Contract Price or Contract Time, the Consultant will issue a
                   Supplemental Instruction."
          6.3.12   Delete existing clause and substitute the following:
                   "Upon receipt of a Supplemental Instruction, the Contractor will proceed promptly
                   with the change in the Work, if the Contractor agrees that there is no adjustment
                   required in the Contract Price or Contract Time. The Contractor is to confirm
                   acceptance of the Supplemental Instruction by signing and returning a copy to the
                   Consultant within seven (7) days. Failure to respond will be considered as
                   undisputed concurrence with the instructions."
          6.3.13   Delete existing clause and substitute the following:
                   "In the event that the Contractor disagrees that no change in the Contract Price or
                   Contract Time is involved with a Supplemental Instruction, the Contractor will
                   immediately notify the Consultant in writing that a Change Order is required and
                   submit a method of adjustment or an amount of adjustment for the Contract Price
                   and the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. The Consultant will provide a
                   written interpretation and finding of the Contractor’s disagreement pursuant to
Calgary Board of Education                  Appendix 4                       Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                      SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                    Page 9 of 18


                   G.C.2.2.6 and will notify the Contractor of the Consultant’s findings with 10
                   Working Days.”
G.C.6.5            DELAYS
          6.5.6    Add new clause to read:
                   "If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by any cause within
                   the Contractor’s or his Subcontractor’s control, and where requested to do so, the
                   Contractor will at no added cost to the Owner take effective action to restore the
                   Work to the agreed upon schedule. If the Contractor fails to restore the Work to
                   the agreed upon schedule, the Contractor will reimburse the Owner the full
                   amount of any costs resulting from the delay including the costs of compensation
                   to the Consultant for his additional services."
          6.5.7    Add a new clause to read:
                   “No claim for delay will be considered or be valid unless a copy of the Notice in
                   Writing of the cause of delay which is required to be provided to the Consultant
                   has been simultaneously provided to the Owner.”
          6.5.8    Add a new clause to read:
                   “Inclement weather conditions are not considered as a cause beyond the
                   Contractor’s control, temporary facilities that would allow the Work to proceed
                   are to be provided.”
          6.5.9    Add a new clause to read:
                   “No authorization, other than an authorization by the Owner that is expressly
                   provided for in the Contract, will be made by the Owner for any adjustment to
                   the Contract Price, or Contract Time, for any extra expense or any loss, or
                   damage incurred or sustained by or through the Contractor.”
          6.5.10   Add a new clause to read:
                   “If the Contractor anticipates incurring or sustaining, any extra expense, loss or
                   damage or loss of time that is directly and solely attributable to any neglect or
                   unreasonable delay on the part of the Owner failing to perform any term of the
                   Contract which is the responsibility of the Owner, the Contractor will promptly
                   advise the Owner and the Consultant in writing of the particulars of such extra
                   expense, loss or damage and the cause thereof within ten (10) Working Days
                   of the event of delay which causes or is anticipated to cause the Contractor
                   incurring such extra expense, loss or damage. The Contractor will afford the
                   Owner an opportunity to rectify any such situation or circumstance which has
                   given rise to or is anticipated to cause the Contractor to incur or sustain any
                   such extra expense, loss or damage and will not claim for any such extra
                   expense, loss or damage until the expiration of such ten (10) Working Day
                   period if the Owner has not rectified such situation or circumstance. A Notice
                   in Writing as aforesaid must be provided by the Contractor to the Owner for
                   each and every event of delay and a continuing notice of delay will not
                   constitute proper Notice in Writing.”
          6.5.11   Add a new clause to read:
                   “The Notice in Writing required to be provided by the Contractor will contain a
                   sufficient description of the facts and circumstances of the occurrence or
                   omission that is the subject matter of the extra expense, loss or damage in
                   order to enable the Owner to readily and fully determine the nature and extent
                   of the circumstance and whether or not the claim is justified and proper. The
                   Contractor will promptly provide the Owner with such other additional
                   information as may be required by the Owner.”
          6.5.12   Add a new clause to read:
                   “If the Contractor fails to provide the Owner and the Consultant with the Notice
                   in Writing required herein within the time frame stipulated, the Contractor will
                   be barred from advancing or recovering any adjustment to the Contract Price,
                   or the Contract Time, or both, or any additional compensation whatsoever. This
                   requirement is of the essence and it is the express intention of the Contractor
Calgary Board of Education                   Appendix 4                        Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                        SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                     Page 10 of 18


                    and the Owner that any such claims by the Contractor will be barred unless the
                    Contractor has strictly complied with the requirements hereof.”
G.C.7.1             OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, STOP THE WORK,
                    OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT
                    Revise title to read:
                    “OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM, SUSPEND, OR STOP THE WORK, OR
                    TERMINATE THE CONTRACT”
          7.1.1     Add a new sentence to read:
                    “The Contract may be immediately terminated by the Owner for non-
                    compliance by the Contractor of any of its obligations under the safety
                    provisions of G.C.9.4 and failure to address the safety deficiencies addressed
                    in the progressive steps outlined in Schedule C Undertaking to Comply Form
                    and Pre-Construction Meeting Contractor Safety Checklist.”
          7.1.7     Add a new clause to read:
                    “The Owner in its sole discretion will have the right, which may be exercised from
                    time to time, to suspend, abandon or terminate the Work, or the Project, and the
                    Contract, by giving not less than 30 Working Days Notice in Writing to the
                    Contractor.”
          7.1.8     Add a new clause to read:
                    “In the event that the Work or the Project is suspended for a period of 60 days
                    inclusive of the notice period set forth in 7.1.7 above, abandoned or terminated
                    by the Owner at any time, the Contractor will be entitled to be paid for all Work
                    completed by the Contractor to the date of receipt by the Contractor of the
                    aforesaid Notice in Writing as well as reasonable costs relating to the
                    demobilization required to be performed by the Contractor, all as determined
                    by the Consultant with the Owner’s concurrence. Under no circumstances will
                    the Owner be liable to the Contractor, or any party contracting with the
                    Contractor, for consequential losses, restocking charges, loss of anticipated
                    profit, loss of opportunity, or damages of any kind in respect of or arising out of
                    the suspension, abandonment or termination of the Work, the Project or the
                    Contract. The Contractor will ensure that G.C.7.1.7 and G.C.7.1.8 are included
                    in all subcontracts entered into by the Contractor with Subcontractors and
                    Suppliers.”
          7.1.9     Add a new clause to read:
                    “During any period of suspension, the Contractor will take such steps as are
                    necessary to ensure the security of the Work performed up to and including the
                    effective date of suspension, and will continue to ensure the security of the Work
                    during the period of suspension unless directed otherwise by the Owner. The
                    costs of such will be reimbursed to the Contractor by the Owner on a cost plus
                    basis using the percentage mark ups which are provided for in G.C.6.2.3.”
G.C.7.2             CONRACTOR’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE
                    CONTRACT
                    Delete G.C.7.2.3.1.
          7.2.3.4   Delete the following wording:
                    “except for G.C.5.1 – FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE
                    OWNER,”
          7.2.5     Insert the following wording after “reasonable profit”:
                    “earned to the date that such Notice in Writing is provided”


G.C.8.2             NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION
          8.2.9     Add a new clause:
                    “Within five (5) days of receipt of the Notice in Writing of arbitration, by the
                    responding party under paragraph 8.2.6, the Owner or Contractor will give the
                    Consultant a Notice in Writing containing:
                    (a) a copy of the notice of arbitration,
Calgary Board of Education                   Appendix 4                       Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                       SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                    Page 11 of 18


                   (b)      any claims or issues which the Contractor or the Owner, as the case may
                            be, wishes to raise in relation to the Consultant arising out of the issues
                            in dispute in the arbitration.”
          8.2.10    Add a new clause:
                    “The Owner and the Contractor agree that the Consultant may elect, with ten
                    (10) days of receipt of the Notice in Writing under paragraph 8.2.9, to become
                    a full party to the arbitration under paragraph 8.2.6 if the Consultant
                    (a) has a vested or contingent financial interest in the outcome of the
                            arbitration;
                    (b)     gives the notice of election to the Owner and the Contractor before the
                            arbitrator is appointed;
                    (c)     agrees to be a party to the arbitration within the meaning of the rules
                            referred to in paragraph 8.2.6. and,
                    (d)     agrees to be bound by the arbitral award made in the arbitration.”
          8.2.11   Add a new clause:
                   “If an election is made under paragraph 8.2.10, the Consultant may participate
                   in the appointment of the arbitrator and, notwithstanding the rules referred to in
                   paragraph 8.2.6, the time period for reaching agreement on the appointment of
                   the arbitrator will begin to run from the date the respondent receives a copy of
                   the Notice in Writing of arbitration.”
          8.2.12   Add a new clause:
                   “The arbitrator in the arbitration in which the Consultant has elected under
                   paragraph 8.2.10 to become a full party may:
                   (a) on application of the Owner or the Contractor, determine whether the
                           Consultant has satisfied the requirements of paragraph 8.2.10; and
                   (b) make any procedural order considered necessary to facilitate the addition
                           of the Consultant as a party to the arbitration.”
          8.2.13   Add a new clause:
                   “The provisions of paragraph 8.2.9 will apply mutatis mutandis to Notice in
                   Writing to be given by the Consultant to any Subconsultant.”
          8.2.14   Add a new clause:
                   “In the event of Notice in Writing of arbitration given by the Consultant to a
                   Subconsultant, the Subconsultant is not entitled to any election with respect to
                   the proceeding as outlined in 8.2.10, and is deemed to be bound by the
                   arbitration proceeding.”
G.C.9.1            PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
          9.1.5    Add a new clause to read:
                   “The Contractor will provide at its cost adequate site security at all times during
                   the term of the Contract and will ensure that all materials, tools, supplies,
                   temporary works, equipment and property on site or incorporated into the Work
                   is not stolen, damaged, altered or removed without authorization. The Owner
                   will not be responsible for the costs of any such damage, alteration, loss or
                   replacement. The Contractor will cooperate at all times with the Owner’s site
                   personnel and comply in all respects with the Owner’s security policies and
                   procedures relating to the Project site.”
G.C.9.4            CONSTRUCTION SAFETY
          9.4.1    Delete the following wording from lines 1 and 2:
                   “Subject to paragraph 3.2.2.2 of G.C.3.2 – CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR
                   OTHER CONTRACTORS,”.
                   Add a new sentence to read:
                   “Contractor shall comply with, and shall ensure Subcontractors and Suppliers
                   comply with, all applicable federal, provincial, and municipal laws, regulations
                   and by-laws, and to all other applicable orders, rules and regulations of any
                   authority having jurisdiction respecting the Work, including without restriction
                   all applicable environmental legislation, employment standards codes and
                   workers’ compensation legislation or equivalent legislation.”
Calgary Board of Education               Appendix 4                         Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                     SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                  Page 12 of 18


       9.4.2   Add a new clause:
               “The Contractor hereby assumes and accepts any and all responsibility as the
               “Prime Contractor” as that term is defined in the Alberta Occupational Health and
               Safety Act and regulations thereunder and the Contractor hereby indemnifies and
               holds the Owner harmless from any and all liabilities arising thereunder for the
               duration of this Contract.”
       9.4.3   Add a new clause to read:
               “Contractor shall comply with and shall ensure all of its agents, employees and
               Subcontractors and Suppliers comply with all applicable fire, safety, health, and
               environmental laws and regulations, including all safety, health and environmental
               requirements pursuant to any government permit, license, or authorization.
               Contractor shall be solely responsible for ensuring the safety and health of its
               agents, employees and Subcontractors and for ensuring that its activities do not
               compromise the safety of the Owner’s operations.”
       9.4.4   Add a new clause to read:
               “Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Occupational Health
               and Safety Act (Alberta) (the “Act”) and regulations thereunder. Contractor shall
               execute and provide to the Owner the attached Undertaking to Comply Form and
               Pre-Construction Meeting Contractor Safety Checklist prior to mobilizing on site.
               Contractor shall also supply to the Owner a copy of their Certificate of Recognition
               (COR) prior to commencing work on site.
       9.4.5   Add a new clause to read:
               .1    “The Contractor will direct all Subcontractors , other contractors, employers,
                     workers, suppliers and any other personnel at the work site on safety
                     related matters, to the extent required to fulfil its “Prime Contractor”
                     responsibilities pursuant to the Act, regardless of:
                     (a)       whether or not any contractual relationship exists between the
                               Contractor and any of these entities, or
                     (b)       whether or not such entities have been specifically identified in this
                               agreement;
               .2    The Contractor shall ensure all obligations under the Act are strictly
                     adhered to by all personnel:
                     (a)       the Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all personnel
                               assigned to the Project are “Competent” as is defined under the
                               OHS Regulations, Section 1(g) – as “adequately qualified, suitably
                               trained, and with sufficient experience to safely perform the work
                               without supervision or with only a minimal degree of supervision”,
                               and as is required by Section 13 of the Regulation;
                     (b)       the Contractor provide the CBE with evidence of such training of
                               its personnel and the Subcontractors.
               .3    The Contractor will be diligent in ensuring that its subcontracts comply with
                     all health, safety and environmental legislation;
               .4    The Contractor shall take appropriate disciplinary action against
                     Subcontractors who contravene health, safety or environmental legislation,
                     which includes but is not limited to the suspending of the Work performed
                     by the Subcontractors, before allowing them to continue to work on the site;
                     and
               .5    The Contractor will ensure that Contractor or Subcontractors never place
                     the CBE students, staff, volunteers or the general public at risk of injury or
                     illness related to Work conducted under this Agreement.”
Calgary Board of Education                Appendix 4                         Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                      SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                   Page 13 of 18


G.C.11.1        INSURANCE
       11.1.1   Delete initial wording and substitute the following:
                "Without restricting the generality of G.C.12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION, the following
                insurance coverage listed in this General Condition shall be provided as stipulated
                herein."
                .1    General Liability Insurance
                      Delete initial wording and substitute the following:
                       a. For projects with a value of under one hundred thousand dollars
                            ($100,000.00), "The Contractor will provide, maintain and pay for
                            General Liability Insurance in the joint name of the Contractor, the
                            Owner, and the Consultant with limits of not less than five million dollars
                            ($5,000,000.00) inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, and property
                            damage including loss of use thereof, with a property damage
                            deductible of not more than two thousand five hundred dollars
                            ($2,500.00) to be paid for by the Contractor. Coverage provided will be
                            in a form decided by the Owner but in any case will be equivalent or
                            superior to the coverage in the latest edition of IBC Form Commercial
                            General Liability 2100 and will include twelve (12) months Completed
                            Operations coverage, from the date of the Certificate of Substantial
                            Performance of the Work.”
                       b. For projects with a value of one hundred thousand dollars
                            ($100,000.00) to one million dollars ($1,000,000.00) "The Contractor
                            will provide, maintain and pay for General Liability Insurance in the joint
                            name of the Contractor, the Owner, and the Consultant with limits of not
                            less than ten million dollars ($10,000,000.00) inclusive per occurrence
                            for bodily injury, and property damage including loss of use thereof, with
                            a property damage deductible of not more than five thousand dollars
                            ($5,000.00) to be paid for by the Contractor. Coverage provided will be
                            in a form decided by the Owner but in any case will be equivalent or
                            superior to the coverage in the latest edition of IBC Form Commercial
                            General Liability 2100 and will include twelve (12) months Completed
                            Operations coverage, from the date of the Certificate of Substantial
                            Performance of the Work.”
                       c. For projects with a value of over one million dollars
                            ($1,000,000.00). The CBE will provide General Liability Insurance.

                .2    Automobile Liability Insurance
                      Delete initial wording and substitute the following:
                      "The Contractor will provide, maintain and pay for Automobile Liability
                      Insurance in respect of licensed vehicles which will have limits of not less
                      than two million dollars ($2,000,000.00) inclusive per occurrence for bodily
                      injury, death, and damage to property, in the following forms endorsed to
                      provide the Owner with not less than fifteen (15) days Notice in Writing in
                      advance of any cancellation, change or amendment restricting coverage.
                      Standard Owner's form automobile policy providing third party liability and
                      accident benefits insurance and covering licensed vehicles owned or
                      operated by or on behalf of the Contractor."
                .3    Aircraft and Watercraft Liability Insurance
                      Delete this clause entirely.
                .4    Course of Construction Insurance
                      Delete initial wording of Paragraph (1) and substitute the following:
                      a. For projects with a value of under one hundred thousand dollars
                         ($100,000.00), course of construction insurance is not required.
                      b. For projects with a value between one hundred thousand dollars
                         ($100,000.00) and one million dollars ($1,000,000.00), "The
                         Contractor will provide, maintain and pay for Course Of Construction
Calgary Board of Education                 Appendix 4                         Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                       SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                    Page 14 of 18


                           Insurance in the joint names of the Contractor, Subcontractors and
                           Suppliers, the Owner and Consultant insuring not less than the sum of
                           the amount of the Contract Price and the full value of Products that are
                           specified to be provided by the Owner for incorporation into the Work
                           with a deductible of Five Thousand Dollars ($5,000.00) This deductible
                           amount will be paid for by the Contractor. Coverage provided will be in
                           a form decided by the Owner but in any case will be equivalent to the
                           coverage in the latest edition of IBC Form Course of Construction. The
                           duration of the All Risks Property Insurance shall be from the date of
                           commencement of the Work until the Date of Substantial Performance
                           of the Work as set out in the Certificate of Substantial Performance of
                           the Work."
                           Add to paragraph (2) second sentence, the following:
                           "with respect to Boiler Insurance the Contractor will act on behalf of the
                           Owner and himself for the purpose of adjusting the amount of such loss
                           or damage payment with Insurers with respect to Property Insurance."
                        c. For projects with a value of over one million dollars
                           ($1,000,000.00) the CBE will provide course of construction insurance.
                 .5    Contractor's Equipment Insurance
                       Add to the beginning of the first sentence in paragraph (5) the following:
                       "The Contractor will provide, maintain and pay for”.
                 .6    Asbestos Abatement / Environmental Impairment Liability Insurance
                       (a) Contractor, or Subcontractor when applicable, will provide Asbestos
                            Abatement/Environmental Impairment Liability Insurance with limits
                            of no less than $2,000,000.00 per occurrence. Such insurance will
                            include all operations associated with hazardous materials removal
                            and will be written on an occurrence basis form. A “claims made”
                            policy is not acceptable.
                 or
                        (b)   Asbestos abatement coverage may alternately be provided under the
                              Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability Insurance specified
                              in 11.1.1 provided the policy is specifically endorsed to provide this
                              coverage and the limit of liability is in an amount of not less than
                              $2,000,000.00 inclusive per occurrence.”
       11.1.4    Delete initial wording of paragraph (1) and substitute the following:
                 ”If the Contractor fails to provide or maintain insurance as required by the
                 Contract Documents then the Owner will have the right to provide and maintain
                 such insurance and give evidence to the Contractor. The Contractor will pay the
                 costs thereof to the Owner on demand, along with a 50% insurance premium
                 surcharge. The Owner may deduct the amount from that which is due or may
                 become due to the Contractor.”
G.C. 11.2        CONTRACT SECURITY
        11.2.1   Revise to read:
                 "The Contractor will prior to commencement of the Work, pay for and provide to
                 the Owner a Performance Bond in the amount of 50% of the Contract Price
                 covering the performance of the Contract including the requirements of G.C. 12.3
                 – WARRANTY and a Labour and Material Payment Bond in the amount of 50%
                 of the Contract Price. The Owner will not be obligated to provide any payment to
                 the Contractor until such time as the Performance Bond and the Labour and
                 Materials Payment Bond have been delivered to the Owner by the Contractor.”
        11.2.2   Delete the words “If the Contract Documents require surety bonds to be
                 provided,”
G.C. 12.1        INDEMNIFICATION
        12.1     Delete this clause entirely and replace with:
Calgary Board of Education                Appendix 4                       Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                    SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                 Page 15 of 18


       12.1.1    The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Consultant,
                 their agents, employees, volunteers and students from and against any and all
                 claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, liabilities, actions, suits, penalties,
                 fines, punitive awards or proceedings (hereinafter “Claims”) by any third parties
                 that arise out of, or are attributable to, the performance or non-performance of
                 the Work, or the acts or omissions of the Contractor, its Subcontractors,
                 Suppliers or any person or entity engaged, employed or contracted by the
                 Contractor to perform the Work.
       12.1.2    Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, unless otherwise
                 expressly provided for in GC 12.1, and subject to the limitations and conditions
                 thereof, the Owner shall not be liable or responsible in any manner whatsoever
                 for any personal injury, death or property damage of any nature that may be
                 suffered or sustained by the Contractor, its officers, directors, employees and
                 agents, Subcontractors, Suppliers or any person or entity engaged, employed
                 or contracted by the Contractor that arise out of or are related to the Work, this
                 Contract or the Project.
       12.2      Delete this clause entirely and replace with:
       12.2.1    Waiver of Claims by the Owner:
                 As of the date of the final certificate for payment, the Owner expressly waives
                 and releases the Contractor from all claims against the Contractor including
                 without limitation those that might arise from the breach of contract by, or
                 negligence, acts or omissions of, the Contractor, except one or more of the
                 following:
                 (a) those made in writing by the Owner prior to the date of the final certificate
                       of payment and still unsettled;
                 (b) those made in writing within a period of two (2) years from the date of
                       Substantial Performance of the Work, as such date is set out in the
                       certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, or within such longer
                       period as may be prescribed by the applicable limitation statute of the
                       Province of Alberta; and
                 (c) those arising from any liability of the Contractor for deficiencies in the
                       Work or work performed pursuant to GC 12.3 – WARRANTY.
       12.2.2    Waiver of Claims by Contractor:
                 As of the date of approval and payment by the Owner of the final certificate for
                 payment, the Contractor expressly waives and releases the Owner and
                 Consultant, their agents, employees, volunteers and students from any and all
                 claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, liabilities, actions, suits or
                 proceedings against the Owner including without limitation those that might
                 arise from the breach of contract by the Owner, or wrongful acts or omissions
                 of the Owner, or any person or entity for whom the Owner is responsible under
                 this Contract or at law, except those made by proper Notice in Writing to the
                 Owner in accordance with the requirements of this Contract prior to the
                 Contractor's application for final payment and still unsettled.
G.C. 12.3        WARRANTY
        12.3.1   Revise to read:
                 "Except for extended warranties as described in paragraph 12.3.6, the warranty
                 period under the Contract is one (1) year from the date of Substantial
                 Performance of the Work as verified by the Consultant or those periods specified
                 in the Contract Documents for certain portions of the Work or Products."
        12.3.4   Add to G.C.12.3.3 the following wording:
                 “The Contractor will ensure that it maintains skilled personnel to dedicate to the
                 performance of both remedial and warranty Work. Remedial Work will include the
                 re-execution of defective Work as provided for in G.C.2.4.1. All such remedial
                 and warranty Work will be executed at times convenient to the Owner and this
                 may require Work at the Contractor’s expense outside of normal Working Day
                 hours.”
Calgary Board of Education                 Appendix 4                        Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                      SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                   Page 16 of 18


         12.3.7   Add new clause to read:
                  (a)    If any remedial or warranty Work presents a potential emergency, risk, or
                         disruption to the normal operation of a school facility, the Contractor will
                         carry out such remedial or warranty Work within twenty-four (24) hours of
                         notification from the Consultant or the Owner of the necessity or the
                         Contractor to perform such remedial or warranty Work.
                  (b)    Should an emergency condition at the facility requiring immediate
                         remedial/emergency repairs occur outside of normal working hours, and the
                         Owner is unable to contact the Contractor, the Owner’s operation or
                         maintenance staff will respond. Any such remedial or warranty Work will be
                         at the cost of the Contractor.
                  (c)    Prior to performing such remedial or warranty Work in all other situations
                         which do not involve an emergency, risk or disruption as aforesaid, the
                         Contractor will submit to the Consultant, or the Owner subject to the
                         Owner’s direction, for their prior approval, a schedule indicating the time
                         frame in which such remedial or warranty Work is to commence and be
                         fully completed to the satisfaction of the Owner.”
         12.3.8   Add a new clause to read:
                  “Subject to any provisions in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will remedy
                  all defects due to faulty Products and/or workmanship within a period of one (1)
                  year from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work and will pay for all
                  damage to other work or property resulting therefrom.”
G.C.13            OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK
         13.1     Add a new clause to read:
                  “The Owner reserves the right to take possession and occupancy of the Work, or
                  any part thereof, at its discretion, and the Contractor will conform with the
                  requirements hereof without adjustment of the Contract Price or Contract Time.
                  The Owner will have the right to enter and occupy the Project premises before
                  Substantial Performance of the Work for whatever purposes the Owner deems
                  appropriate, provided such entry and occupancy does not substantially
                  interference with or prevent the Contractor from the performance of the Contract
                  as specified. Any such entry or occupancy by the Owner will not be considered
                  as an acceptance of the Work or in any way relieve the Contractor of any of its
                  obligations to perform the Contract.”
G.C.14            FREEDOM OF INFORMATION AND PROTECTION OF PRIVACY
         14.1     Add a new clause to read:
                  “It is acknowledged by the Contractor that the Contract Documents contain
                  confidential information the disclosure of which would be detrimental to the
                  Owner. Accordingly, the Contractor agrees to keep such information as
                  designated by the Owner from time to time as confidential. If a request is made
                  to access information or an application is made for disclosure under the Alberta
                  Freedom of Information and Protection of Privacy Act, the Contractor will take
                  such steps as are available under that legislation to retain full confidentiality or
                  as much confidentiality as is available at law and shall co-operate with the
                  Owner in the Owner’s best interests as such may be determined by the
                  Owner.”
Calgary Board of Education                 Appendix 4                       Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                     SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                  Page 17 of 18



                          UNDERTAKING TO COMPLY FORM

Name of Contractor:                                                          (the "Contractor")
Construction Safety Agreement for:                                               (the "Project")
Name of Authorized Representative of the Contractor:
1.   The Contractor hereby undertakes to CBE:
     (a) to comply with all health, safety and environmental legislation in the performance of this
           Agreement;
     (b) to maintain a safe and healthy work environment during the performance of this
           Agreement; and
     (c) to comply with all clauses of G.C.9.4 of the Contract.
2.   The Contractor hereby agrees with CBE:
     (a) that compliance with all health, safety and environmental legislation is a condition of
           this Agreement and that non-compliance with the same may, in CBE's discretion, lead
           to the termination of this Agreement; and
     (b) to permit CBE to audit the Contractor's health, safety and environmental records during
           the term of this Agreement and upon its conclusion and to cooperate fully with any such
           audit(s).
3.   The Contractor understands that, at CBE's discretion, any Contractor safety deficiencies will
     be addressed by CBE in the following progressive steps:
     (a) the problems will be identified to the Contractor (site supervisor);
     (b) the Contractor's head office will be contacted about the problem, orally and later in
           writing;
     (c) if required by law to report the problem to a Provincial and or Federal Ministry, CBE will
           immediately do so;
     (d) if not required by law to report the problem, and the problem remains unresolved, CBE
           may report the problem; and
     (e) the Agreement may, in CBE's sole discretion, be suspended, terminated or payment
           withheld by CBE, or a combination of all or some of these.
4.   The Contractor acknowledges and agrees with CBE that, depending upon the nature and/or
     seriousness of the deficiency, CBE reserves the right to bypass any or all of the steps
     described in Section 3 (above).
5.   Prime Contractor Designation: The Contractor and the CBE hereby agree that the
     Contractor shall, pursuant G.C.9.4 of the Contract:
          be the “prime contractor”.
     at the work site on the Lands for the purposes of the Occupational Health and Safety Act
     (Alberta) and Environmental Issues, during the Term.


        CBE                                              Contractor
The undersigned hereby confirms that he/she has the authority to bind the Contractor:
Date:

CONTRACTOR

Insert Full Name of Contractor
Per:

Print Name:
Calgary Board of Education                            Appendix 4                         Section 00800
School Name, Project Title                                                  SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Project No.                                                                               Page 18 of 18



            PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING CONTRACTOR SAFETY CHECKLIST

Meeting Date: ___________________________                        Agreement No.: _________________________
Contractor: _____________________________                        Contractor Representative: _______________
CBE Representative: _____________________

         √ Means complied to                X Means not complied with              n/a Means not applicable

 1   Notice of Project filed with Alberta Infrastructure &
     Transportation (if applicable)                          □   8    Contractor Staff Training:

 2
     Review Board Safety Compliance                          □        Roles & Responsibilities                            □
     Undertaking to Comply Form Signed                       □        Emergency Response                                  □
     Progressive Disciplinary Action Reviewed                □        WHIMIS Training Verification                        □
 3   Contractor Health & Safety Policy                       □        OH&S                                                □
     Prime Contractor & Safety Management
     Certificate                                             □        MSDS Received                                       □
 4   Health & Safety Representatives / Joint Site
     Health & Safety Committee                               □        Scaffold                                            □
     Name &
     Phone:__________________________________
                                                                      Confined Space Code of Practice                     □
 5   Personal Protective Equipment:
                                                                      TOG Training Verification                           □
     Hard Hats                                               □        Working Alone                                       □
     Footwear                                                □   9
                                                                      Review Contractor Signage & Barricades              □
     Safety Glasses                                          □   10
                                                                      Written Work Site Plan / Schedule Submitted         □
     Hearing                                                 □   11
                                                                      Building Fire Plan                                  □
                                                                 12   Accident Investigation / Notification / Reporting
     Dust & Fumes                                            □        Procedures                                          □
                                                                      Contingency Plan for Control & Clean up of a
     Face Protection                                         □   13
                                                                      Spill                                               □
     Others: _________________________________               □   14   Fire Protection / Extinguishers                     □
     __________________________                              □   15   First Aid Kits on Site                              □
     __________________________                              □   16
                                                                      First Aiders on Staff                               □
 6   Equipment Certification:
                                                                      Names:_______________________________

     Trench Boxes                                            □   17   Fall Protection / Safety Harness                    □
     Scaffolds                                               □   18   Methane Gas Detection in Sewer                      □
     Others:________________________________                 □   19   Clean Up - Good Housekeeping                        □
     ______________________________________                  □   20   Weekly Safety Talks / Meetings                      □
 7   Provision of Hazardous Material Information to
     Contract                                                □   21   Other Issues                                        □
     Confirmation of Employee Awareness of
     Hazardous Material                                      □        Agreement for Supply of Services Project:
     Asbestos                                                □        ______________________________________


     Lead                                                    □        195591\655714.v5
     PCB                                                     □
Design Guidelines                   Appendix 5                                             Appendix 5
Calgary Board of Education                                                             Standard Forms
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                 Page 1 of 11


                                CALGARY BOARD OF EDUCATION
                                 SAFETY ADVISORY SERVICES

                                     PROJECT CHECKLIST


School:                                                                 Date:

Project Manager:


Scope of Work: (Attach marked up Floor Plans, use Asbestos Survey Floor Plan)




List all materials that may be disrupted (plaster walls, ceiling tiles, sheet flooring, etc.):



Check the Asbestos Database for information on all materials to be disrupted.
NOTE: The Asbestos Database will not provide information on all materials.
Is additional asbestos sampling / analysis required? (): Yes _____No _____
If yes, contact Asbestos Consultant or Safety Services (294-8478)
Do any materials to be disrupted contain asbestos? (): Yes _____No _____ Unknown____
If yes, asbestos removal and / or special procedures will be required.
Contact Asbestos Consultant and Asbestos Contractors.


Project Go Ahead (): Yes ____         No _____         Funding Type:

Contractor (if not in house):

Asbestos Consultant (if required):

Asbestos Contractor (if required):
*IF ANY ASBESTOS WORK IS TO BE DONE, PROJECT CHECK LIST MUST BE FAXED TO
SAFETY SERVICES PRIOR TO START OF THE PROJECT FOR NOTIFICATION PURPOSES.
Project Check List faxed to Safety Advisory Services () fax: 294-8603: Yes ____                 No ____


Attach copies of all of the following, if applicable:     () if attached.
_____ All estimates

_____ All additional asbestos sampling / analysis results

_____ Asbestos Database Update Report (required for all Asbestos Projects)

*ALL ASBESTOS INFORMATION MUST BE FAXED TO SAFETY ADVISORYSERVICES
(additional asbestos sampling / analysis results, Asbestos Database Update Report, employee
training files)
All asbestos information faxed to Safety Advisory Services () Fax 294-8603: Yes __ No __
Design Guidelines                   Appendix 5                                         Appendix 5
Calgary Board of Education                                                         Standard Forms
Capital Planning and Development Services                                             Page 2 of 11


                          CALGARY BOARD OF EDUCATION
                           SAFETY ADVISORY SERVICES

                       ASBESTOS DATABASE UPDATE REPORT


School:                                                                   Date:

Project Manager:



                                                                                           QUANTITY
                                                                                           REMOVED
                                                         MATERIAL TYPE
  ASBESTOS               ROOM DESCRIPTION                                                (Specify Room
                                                     (Ceiling Tiles, Pipe Elbow,
SURVEY ROOM #          (Gym, Classroom 10, etc.)                                      Location & Amount,
                                                                 etc.)
                                                                                       i.e. NE Corner, 3
                                                                                             metres)




Dates of Asbestos Removal (month and year):

Asbestos Consultant:                                             Signature:

Asbestos Contractor:                                             Signature:

Comments:




Completion of this Report is required for all Projects involving asbestos. This Report will be used
to update the Asbestos Database.

                   FAX TO SAFETY ADVISORY SERVICES Fax: 294-8603
Design Guidelines                   Appendix 5                                                      Appendix 5
Calgary Board of Education                                                                      Standard Forms
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                          Page 3 of 11


Consulting Architectural Firm                                                Calgary Board of Education
Architectural Firm Address                                          Architectural & Engineering Services
Phone & Fax No.                                                                      3610 – 9 Street S. E.
                                                                                 Calgary, Alberta T2G 3C5
                                                                                      Fax (403) 777-6014

Contractor Project Manager’s Name                         PROPOSED CHANGE NOTICE #
Contractor Firm Name                                                           Issue Date:
Contractor Firm Address
                                                                               Submit quotation to Architect within
                                                                               10 working days from issue date

School
Project Name                                                                   CBE Project #
Address


This is a request for quotation. This is NOT a Change Order. For pricing purposes only: Submit Change in
Contract Price and Contract time to Architect and a copy to Architectural & Engineering Services within 10
working days from issue date.
Do NOT include GST. Submit a detailed breakdown of each item separately complete with backup.
Ensure all subtrade costs are included.


Sample Change Notice

Architect to prepare the Proposed Change Notices in a format to match this sample.

Maintain a Log of all dates for PCNs issued, quote received, quote reviewed, returned for
revision, resubmitted, approved or cancelled, etc.




Reason for Change: Omission from Contract documents.



Distribution:   General Contractor    (   )   Structural Engineer      (   )       Other                        ( )
                Architect             (   )   Mechanical Engineer      (   )       AES File                     (3a)
                Electrical Engineer   (   )




Prime Consultant
Design Guidelines                   Appendix 5                                                     Appendix 5
Calgary Board of Education                                                                     Standard Forms
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                         Page 4 of 11



Consulting Architectural Firm                                                Calgary Board of Education
Architectural Firm Address                                          Architectural & Engineering Services
Phone & Fax No.                                                                       3610 – 9 Street S.E.
                                                                                 Calgary, Alberta T2G 3C5
                                                                                      Fax (403) 777-6014

Contractor Project Manager's Name                                              CHANGE ORDER #
Contractor Firm Name                                                           Issue Date:
Contractor Firm Address
                                                                               Related PCN #
                                                                               Contractor’s Quote #
School
Project Name                                                                   CBE Project #
Address


You are hereby authorized to proceed with the following Changes to the Work of the above Project, subject
to the terms and conditions of the Contract. The price agreed to below is the TOTAL cost for the Change,
including impact costs for the Schedule revision indicated. No additional costs or changes to the Contract
time will be considered.


Sample Change Order
Architect to prepare the Change Orders in a format to match this sample.
The detailed description of the Changes to the Work should be included on the CO rather than as
Attachments wherever possible. CO must be a “Stand Alone” document.
List copies of revised Drawings or Sketches issued as part of the Change.
The Architect and Consulting Engineers to review the Contractor's quotation and / or schedule
impact for the related PCN and if the amounts / impact are acceptable a CO is to be issued.
Three (3) copies of the CO are to be forwarded to the General Contractor for signature, then all
copies to Architectural & Engineering Services for signature, approving the Change, then one (1)
copy will be returned to the Architect and Contractor.

                                              This Change adjusts the Contract amount by $

Reason for Change: i.e.: Unforseen circumstances or conditions encountered.

Distribution:   General Contractor    (   )   Structural Engineer      (   )      Other                      ( )
                Architect             (   )   Mechanical Engineer      (   )      AES File                   (3c)
                Electrical Engineer   (   )



 Schedule Impact:                                                      Original Contract:        $       -
 Nil   Days Extension                                                   Total Additions:         $       -
 Nil   Days Reduction                                                   Total Deletions:         $       -

                                                                       Revised Contract:         $       -




Prime Consultant                      General Contractor                          CBE Project Manager
Design Guidelines                   Appendix 5                                             Appendix 5
Calgary Board of Education                                                             Standard Forms
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                 Page 5 of 11


Consulting Architectural Firm                                         Calgary Board of Education
Architectural Firm Address                                   Architectural & Engineering Services
Phone & Fax No.                                                                3610 – 9 Street S.E.
                                                                          Calgary, Alberta T2G 3C5
                                                                               Fax (403) 777-6014

Contractor Project Manager’s Name                       CHANGE DIRECTIVE For PCN #
Contractor Firm Name                                                   Issue Date:
Contractor Firm Address

School
Project Name                                                           CBE Project #
Address


You are hereby authorized to proceed with the following Changes to the Work of the above Project, on a
"TIME & MATERIAL" basis, subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract, to the maximum upset cost
indicated below.
Provide an itemized accounting and all requested Supporting data.
A Change Order will be issued when final costs and any schedule impact have been agreed upon.

Sample Change Directive

To be issued along with a PCN to allow Work to proceed for critical Changes only when
approved by AES Construction Administrator.




Maximum cost for this Work NOT to exceed … $




Distribution:   General Contractor   (   )   AES File           (3a)
                Architect            (   )




Prime Consultant                     General Contractor                   CBE Project Manager
Design Guidelines                   Appendix 5                                               Appendix 5
Calgary Board of Education                                                               Standard Forms
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                   Page 6 of 11


Consulting Architectural Firm                                          Calgary Board of Education
Architectural Firm Address                                    Architectural & Engineering Services
Phone & Fax No.                                                                 3610 – 9 Street S.E.
                                                                           Calgary, Alberta T2G 3C5
                                                                                Fax (403) 777-6014

Contractor’s Project Manager’s Name                     CASH ALLOWANCE AUTHORIZATION #
Contractor Firm Name                                                     Issue Date:
Contractor Firm Address

School
Project Name                                                             CBE Project #
Address


You are hereby authorized to proceed with the following Work for the above Project, subject to the terms
and conditions of the Contract. This Work is to be paid from the Cash Allowance specified, included in the
Contract amount.
A Change Order will be issued to reconcile the final Cash Allowance balance with the Contract amount.


Sample Authorization

Architect to prepare the Cash Allowance Authorizations in a format to match this sample.

The detailed description of the expenditure against the specified Cash Allowance should be
included on the CAA.

The Architect and Consulting Engineers to review the Contractor's quotation for the Work related
to the Allowance included in the Contract amount and if the amounts are acceptable a CAA is to
be issued.

Three (3)copies of the CAA are to be forwarded to the General Contractor for signature, then all
copies to Architectural & Engineering Services for signature, approving the Authorization, then
one (1) copy will be returned each to the Architect and Contractor.


           Amount authorized to be expended …….$


Distribution:   General Contractor   (   )   Other                ( )
                Architect            (   )   AES File             (3d)


                                                             Cash Allowance total Specified: $
                                                             Expenditures Authorized:            $

                                                             Cash Allowance Balance:             $


Prime Consultant                     General Contractor                  CBE Project Manager
Design Guidelines                   Appendix 5                                            Appendix 5
Calgary Board of Education                                                            Standard Forms
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                Page 7 of 11


Consulting Architectural Firm                                          Calgary Board of Education
Architectural Firm Address                                    Architectural & Engineering Services
Phone & Fax No.                                                                 3610 – 9 Street S.E.
                                                                           Calgary, Alberta T2G 3C5
                                                                                Fax (403) 777-6014

Contractor Project Manager’s Name                       SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION #
Contractor Firm Name                                                 Issue Date:
Address

School
Project Name                                                         CBE Project #
Address


This Supplemental Instruction is issued subsequent to the award of Contract, in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the Contract, to provide for certain clarifications to the Work which are deemed to be
consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.

It is understood that by accepting these Instructions and proceeding with the Work, the Contractor agrees
that there is no Change to the Contract amount or Contract time. The Contractor is requested to review
these Instructions and confirm acceptance with the content by signing and returning a copy of this
Instruction within seven (7) days. Failure to respond shall be considered as undisputed concurrence with
the Instructions.



Sample Instruction

Architect to prepare the Supplementary Instructions in a format to match this sample.

The detailed description of the clarification or no-cost Change to the Work should be included on
the SI rather than as attachments wherever possible.

List copies of revised Drawings or Sketches issued as part of the Instruction.

The SI is to be issued directly to the General Contractor with a copy to Architectural &
Engineering Services at the same time.




Distribution:   General Contractor   (   )   Other                        ( )
                Consultants          (   )   AES File                     (3g)




Prime Consultant                     General Contractor            CBE Project Manager
Design Guidelines                   Appendix 5                                                      Appendix 5
Calgary Board of Education                                                                      Standard Forms
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                          Page 8 of 11


Consulting Architectural Firm                                                 Calgary Board of Education
Architectural Firm Address                                           Architectural & Engineering Services
Phone & Fax No.                                                                        3610 – 9 Street S.E.
                                                                                  Calgary, Alberta T2G 3C5
                                                                                       Fax (403) 777-6014

                                                           CERTIFICATE OF PAYMENT #
Contractor Project Manager's Name                                              Issue Date:
Contractor Firm Name
Contractor Firm Address                                                      Work Period:
                                                                                      To:
School
Project Name                                                               CBE Project #:
Address


This is to certify    Contractor Name
Is entitled to        Two Hundred Thirty One Thousand Dollars and Zero Cents

Contract Amount                                 $     1,000,000.00
Total Additions to date                         $              -
Total Deletions to date                         $              -

Current Contract Amount                         $     1,000,000.00                                     $    1,000,000.00

Amount of Work Finished                         $       800,000.00
Deficiency Retention                            $              -
Lien Fund Holdback                              $        80,000.00

Current Work less Holdbacks                     $       720,000.00                                     $      720,000.00

Holdback Previously released                    $               -
Holdback released this issue                    $               -

Total Holdback released to date                 $               -                                      $             -

Payable To Date                                                                                        $      720,000.00
Less Previous Payable                                                                                  $      500,000.00

Payable this Issue                                                                                     $      220,000.00
G.S.T. payable                                                                                         $       11,000.00

Total Payable this Issue                                                                               $      231,000.00

This Certificate of Payment issued on the above date to the CALGARY BOARD of EDUCATION, CORPORATE
FINANCIAL SERVICES, General Accounting, for processing of payment based on the recommendation of the
Consultants and/or as determined by Architectural & Engineering Services to be properly due. Payment to be made
within five (5) working days.

Distribution:   General Contractor    (   )     Other                        ( )
                Architect             (   )     AES File                     (5a)



                                                                    __
Prime Consultant                     CBE Project Manager                     Manager, Architectural & Engineering
                                                                             Services
Design Guidelines                   Appendix 5                                              Appendix 5
Calgary Board of Education                                                              Standard Forms
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                  Page 9 of 11


Consulting Architectural Firm                                           Calgary Board of Education
Architectural Firm Address                                     Architectural & Engineering Services
Phone & Fax No.                                                                  3610 – 9 Street S.E.
                                                                            Calgary, Alberta T2G 3C5
                                                                                 Fax (403) 777-6014

Contractor Project Manager’s Name                                  FIELD REVIEW REPORT #
Contractor Firm Name                                                   Issue Date:
Contractor Firm Address
                                                                       Date of Visit:

School
Project Name                                                           CBE Project #
Address


A Field Review Report is issued on a periodic basis, to summarize progress, materials delivered to site, and
to record observations made and questions requiring answered, at the time of review.

Weather Conditions: (for new construction or additions)

Issued by the Architect following each “Site Visit” to record progress, materials delivered, confirm
compliance with Contract Documents, quality of Work and resolve problems on site, etc.

Similar reports to be provided by Consulting Engineers.

Content and set up of report body as required for each Project.




Distribution:   General Contractor   (   )   Other                          ( )
                Architect            (   )   AES File                       (3e)




Prime Consultant
Design Guidelines                   Appendix 5                                          Appendix 5
Calgary Board of Education                                                         Standard Forms
Capital Planning and Development Services                                             Page 10 of 11


FACILITY ACCESS SIGN-OUT FORM: Outside Contractors

This Section to be completed by CBE Employee authorizing sign-out.

Project Name:

Facility:                                        Date keys to be returned:

Address:

CBE Employee Name:                                             Service Area:

Signature:                                                     Phone #:

This Section to be completed by Contractor. Read and note the following:
 1. Lost keys will result in the site being re-keyed at the Contractor's expense ($1,500.00 to
      $12,000.00 depending on site).
 2. Keys must NOT be duplicated or re-keying will be required at Contractor's expense.
 3. Keys are NOT to be loaned out to any other party (Subcontractor, etc.). The General
      Contractor is to open and lock up the site and ensure sign in / out book at School is
      utilized. Building must be kept locked outside of regular School hours and security is the
      responsibility of the General Contractor.
 4. Security Office must be called upon entering and exiting the facility (Phone 214-1131).
 5. Contractor is to ensure that all workers wear the CBE ID Badges, whenever they are on
      CBE property.
 6. There will be a $50.00 charge for each ID Badge not returned to Security Office.
 7. Keys and ID Badges must be returned to Security Office upon completion of Work.
 8. There will be a $150.00 charge for each call out due to failure to follow the entry / exit
      procedures. (These procedures will be reviewed with the Security Operator.)

I as authorized representative for:
have read and understand these conditions.                         (Company Name)

Signature:                                   Print Name:

Company Phone #:                                       Pager / Cell Phone#:

Keys / ID Badges Out: Date:                            Security Operator:

Keys Signed Out:

ID Badges Signed Out:

Keys / ID Badges Returned: Date:                       Security Operator:

Keys Signed In:

ID Badges Signed In:

Comments:

This form to be completed and kept on file at the CBE Highfield Security Office.
Design Guidelines                                              Appendix 5                                               Appendix 5
Calgary Board of Education                                                                                          Standard Forms
Capital Planning and Development Services                                                                             Page 11 of 11


                                                                      ARCHITECTURAL & ENGINEERING SERVICES
          Calgary Board of Education                                  3610 - 9 Street S. E., Calgary, Alberta   T2G 3C5
                                                                      Fax: 403-777-6014           Phone: 403-214-1116




                                  Warranty Work Request #

    Project / School Name:                                                              Date:
             CBE Project #:
                                                                            Warranty Expires:
        General Contractor:
                      Fax:
                Telephone:

          Prime Consultant:                                            AES Project Manager:
                      Fax:



Subtrade required (Plumbing, Electrical, etc.):

Description:




Fax completed "Warranty Work Request" form to Architectural & Engineering Services: 403-777-6014

For emergency work call or fax to General Contractor or Subcontractor directly and follow-up with fax to
Architectural & Engineering Services

Contractor to notify Architectural & Engineering Services when work is complete.



                                                                            Facility Operator:

                                            Date Request Completed (Contractor to indicate):

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:13
posted:8/23/2014
language:Unknown
pages:261